2015 Hyundai Santa Fe 75344

OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may
be carried out.
This manual applies to all of this vehicle and includes descriptions

and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions
of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation
of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or
state agencies.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adverse-
ly affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the
radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary meas-
ures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
F2
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you
or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equip-
ment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who
drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of
which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read
it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance
that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please
leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do
not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the spec-
ifications listed on Page 8-6 and 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the
Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in
any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor
America.
F4
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts In addition, any damage to or fail-
1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? ure of Hyundai Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the of an imitation, counterfeit or used
same parts used by Hyundai Motor salvage part is not covered by any
Company to manufacture vehicles. Hyundai Warranty.
They are designed and tested for
the optimum safety, performance,
and reliability to our customers. 3. How can you tell if you are pur-
chasing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
2. Why should you use genuine Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
parts? Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi- Hyundai Genuine Parts for export
neered and built to meet rigid man- are packaged with labels written
ufacturing requirements. Using imi- only in English.
tation, counterfeit or used salvage Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
parts is not covered under the sold through authorized Hyundai
Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Dealerships.
Warranty or any other Hyundai A100A03L
warranty.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
F5
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle handling instructions / 1
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance 2

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle 3

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors 4
/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Multimedia system / Etc.
table of contents Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / All Wheel Drive (AWD) / Brake system / Cruise con- 5
trol system / Blind Spot Detection System / Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency 6
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / 7
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

Index I
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-6
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest The general layout of the manual is Symbols used in this manual
possible driving experience from provided in the Table of Contents. A Warnings, Cautions and Notices
your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual good place to start is the index; it has
can assist you in many ways. We an alphabetical listing of all informa-
strongly recommend that you read tion in your manual. WARNING
the entire manual. In order to mini- Sections: This manual has eight sec- A WARNING indicates that a
mize the chance of death or injury, tions plus an index. Each section condition may result in harm,
you must read the WARNING and begins with a brief list of contents so serious bodily injury or death if
CAUTION sections in the manual. you can tell at a glance if that section the warning is ignored.
Illustrations complement the text in has the information you want.
this manual to best explain how to You will find various WARNINGS,
use your vehicle. By reading your CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this CAUTION
manual, you will learn about fea- manual. These WARNINGS were pre- A CAUTION indicates that a con-
tures, important safety information, pared to enhance your personal safe- dition may result in damage to
and driving tips under various road ty. You should carefully read and fol- your vehicle if the caution is
conditions. low ALL procedures and recommen- ignored.
dations provided in these WARN-
INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
Safety symbol in illustrations
The symbol means to "Avoid"

or "Do not do something".
1 2
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain Gasoline containing alcohol and "E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
maximum performance with UNLEAD- methanol prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and percent gasoline, and is manufac-
emissions and spark plug fouling. ethanol (also known as grain alco- tured exclusively for use in Flexible
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con- Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
Your new vehicle is designed to use taining methanol (also known as ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
only unleaded fuel having a pump wood alcohol) are being marketed may result in poor engine perform-
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 along with or instead of leaded or ance and damage to your vehicle's
(Research Octane Number 91) or unleaded gasoline. engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
higher. (Do not use methanol blend- Do not use gasohol containing more recommends that customers do not
ed fuels.) than 10% ethanol, and do not use use fuel with an ethanol content
gasoline or gasohol containing any exceeding 10 percent.
Never add any fuel system cleaning methanol. Either of these fuels may
agents to the fuel tank other than what cause drivability problems and dam- ✽ NOTICE
has been specified. (Consult an age to the fuel system, engine con-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
trol system and emission control sys- does not cover damage to the fuel
details.) tem. system or any performance prob-
Discontinue using gasohol of any lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
WARNING - Refueling kind if drivability problems occur.
• Do not "top off" after the noz- Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
zle automatically shuts off lems may not be covered by the
when refueling. Attempts to manufacturer’s warranty if they result
force more fuel into the tank from the use of:
can cause fuel overflow onto 1. Gasohol containing more than
you and the ground causing a 10% ethanol.
risk of fire. 2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
• Always check that the fuel cap methanol.
is installed securely to pre- 3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
1 3
Introduction
Other fuels Do not use methanol For customers who do not use TOP
Using fuels such as Fuels containing methanol (wood Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel alcohol) should not be used in your have problems starting their vehicle or
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce the engine does not run smoothly,
vehicle performance and damage additives that you can buy separately
- Other metallic additives contained may be added to the gasoline.
fuels components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
may cause vehicle and engine dam- control system. available, one bottle of additive added
age. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp to the fuel tank at every 7,500mile or
(MIL) may illuminate or cause plug-
ging, misfiring, poor acceleration, ✽ NOTICE every engine oil change is recom-
mended. Additives are available from
engine stalling, catalyst melting, Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc- may not cover damage to the fuel along with information on how to use
tion, etc. system and any performance prob- them. Do not mix other additives.
lems that are caused by the use of
Gasoline containing MMT fuels containing methanol.
Operation in foreign countries
Some gasoline contains harmful man- If you are going to drive your vehicle
ganese-based fuel additives such as Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use in another country, be sure to:
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl). good quality gasolines treated with • Observe all regulations regarding
detergent additives such as TOP registration and insurance.
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT. TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help • Determine that acceptable fuel is
prevent deposit formation in the available.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emis- engine. These gasolines will help the
sion control system. engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
The malfunction indicator lamp on
System. For more information on TOP
the cluster may come on.
TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go
to the website (www.toptiergas.com)
1 4
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS VEHICLE HANDLING

No special break-in period is needed. INSTRUCTIONS
By following a few simple precautions CALIFORNIA PROPO- As with other vehicles of this type,
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you SITION 65 WARNING failure to operate this vehicle correct-
may add to the performance, econo- Items contained in motor vehi- ly may result in loss of control, an
my and life of your vehicle. cles or emitted from them are accident or vehicle rollover.
• Do not race the engine. known to the State of California Specific design characteristics (high-
• While driving, keep your engine to cause cancer and birth er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
speed (rpm, or revolutions per defects or reproductive harm. this vehicle a higher center of gravity
minute) between 2,000 rpm and These include: than other types of vehicles. It is not
4,000 rpm. • Gasoline and its vapors designed for cornering at the same
• Do not maintain a single speed for • Engine exhaust speeds as a conventional 2-wheel
long periods of time, either fast or • Used engine oil drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid
slow. Varying engine speed is sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
• Interior passenger compart-
needed to properly break-in the Failure to operate this vehicle cor-
ment components and materi-
engine. rectly may result in loss of control, an
als
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer- accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure
• Component parts which are to read the “Reducing the risk of a
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat subject to heat and wear
properly. rollover” driving guidelines, in
In addition, battery posts, termi- section 5 of this manual.
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an These data can help provide a bet- To read data recorded by an EDR,
event data recorder (EDR). The ter understanding of the circum- special equipment is required, and
main purpose of an EDR is to stances in which crashes and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
record, in certain crash or near injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are needed. In addition to the vehicle
crash-like situations, such as an recorded by your vehicle only if a manufacturer, other parties, such
air bag deployment or hitting a non-trivial crash situation occurs; as law enforcement, that have the
road obstacle, data that will assist no data are recorded by the EDR special equipment, can read the
in understanding how a vehicle's under normal driving conditions information if they have access to
systems performed. The EDR is and no personal data (e.g., name, the vehicle or the EDR.
designed to record data related to gender, age, and crash location)
vehicle dynamics and safety sys- are recorded. However, other par-
tems for a short period of time, ties, such as law enforcement,
typically 30 seconds or less. The could combine the EDR data with
EDR in this vehicle is designed to the type of personally identifying
record such data as: data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your crash investigation.
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
1 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview
Interior overview (I).
II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4
Interior overview (II)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-5
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-6 2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-7
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
1. Panoramic sunroof ..............................4-47

2. Front windshield wiper blades .............7-43
3. Outside rearview mirror.......................4-67
4. Door locks ...........................................4-21
5. Headlight .............................................7-75
6. Front fog light.....................................4-116
7. Hood ....................................................4-41
8. Tires and wheels.........................7-48 / 8-4
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

ONCEIN2001
2 2
■ Rear view
1. Antenna .............................................4-161
2. Defroster............................................4-124
3. Parking assist system........................4-105
4. Fuel filler door .....................................4-43
5. Towing hook.........................................6-31
6. Rear combination lamp .......................7-79
7. Rear window wiper blade ....................7-44
8. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-81
9. Rearview camera ..............................4-109

ONCEIN2002
2 3
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
1. Inside door handle...............................4-23

2. Driver position memory system.............3-8
3. Outside rearview mirror control ...........4-67
4. Power window lock button ...................4-40
5. Central door lock switch ......................4-23
6. Power window switch...........................4-36
7. Fuel-filler door opener .........................4-43
8. Instrument panel illumination
control knob.........................................4-72
9. DBC button..........................................5-40
10. ESC OFF button................................5-35
11. Active ECO button.............................5-56
12. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-53
13. AWD LOCK button ............................5-22
14. AC inverter button ...........................4-153
15. BSD on/off button ..............................5-50
16. Steering wheel...................................4-53
17. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever .......................................4-54
18. Inner panel fuse ................................7-63
19. Hood release lever ............................4-41
20. Seat .....................................................3-2

ONCNIN3003
2 4
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
1. Power outlet.......................................4-152
2. Aux, USB and iPod® ..........................4-156
3. Seat warmer/
Air ventilation seat button ...............3-13/3-14
4. Parking assist system button.............4-105
5. Transaxle shift lever .............................5-14
6. Cup holder.........................................4-150

OANNIN2006
2 5
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Lighting control lever .........................4-112

2. Audio remote control buttons ............4-161
3. Bluetooth hands-free
buttons ..................................4-196 / 4-247
4. Cruise control button ...........................5-46
5. Driver selectable steering mode button ..4-55
6. LCD display control buttons ................4-72
7. Horn.....................................................4-54
8. Driver’s front air bag ............................3-62
9. Wiper and washer control lever .........4-117
10. Ignition switch/
Engine start/stop button..............5-6 / 5-9
11. Audio ...............................................4-161
12. Hazard warning flasher ...................4-110
13. Climate control system .......4-125 / 4-135
14. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-62
15. Glove box ........................................4-147

OANNIN2004
2 6
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline 3.3L GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir .....................7-33

2. Engine oil filler cap ..............................7-30
3. Brake fluid reservoir ............................7-35
4. Air cleaner ...........................................7-38
5. Fuse box..............................................7-63
6. Negative battery terminal ....................7-45
7. Positive battery terminal ......................7-45
8. Radiator cap ........................................7-34
9. Engine oil dipstick................................7-30
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-37
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
ONCEIN2007
2 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 • SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 • Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 • Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 3
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-49
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Do not Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
• Occupant classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
• Main components of occupant classification system . 3-57
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
SEATS
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer* /
Manual seat Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
2nd row seat

(7) Forward and backward
Power seat (8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Walk-in seat lever
(10) Headrest
(11) Armrest
(12) Seat warmer*
3rd row seat

(13) Seatback folding
(14) Headrest
* if equipped
ONCNSA3001
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3 2
WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver WARNING - Driver’s seat

objects responsibility for passengers To avoid serious injury or death:
Loose objects in the driver’s Riding in a vehicle with the • Never attempt to adjust the
foot area could interfere with seatback reclined could lead to seat while the vehicle is mov-
the operation of the foot pedals, serious or fatal injury in an acci- ing. This could result in loss
possibly causing an accident. dent. If a seat is reclined during of control, and an accident
Do not place anything under the an accident, the occupant’s causing death, serious injury,
front seats. hips may slide under the lap or property damage.
portion of the seat belt, apply-
• Do not allow anything to inter-
ing great force to the unprotect-
fere with the normal position
ed abdomen. Serious or fatal
WARNING - Uprighting internal injuries could result.
of the seatback. Storing items
seat against a seatback or in any
The driver must advise the pas-
When you return the seatback other way interfering with
senger to keep the seatback in
to its upright position, hold the proper locking of a seatback
an upright position whenever
seatback and return it slowly could result in serious or fatal
the vehicle is in motion.
and be sure there are no other injury in a sudden stop or col-
occupants around the seat. If lision.
the seatback is returned with- • In order to avoid unnecessary
out being held and controlled, WARNING and perhaps severe air bag
the back of the seat could Occupants should never sit on injuries, always sit as far back
spring forward resulting in acci- seat cushions. The passenger's as possible from the steering
dental injury to a person struck hips may slide under the lap wheel while maintaining com-
by the seatback. portion of the seat belt during fortable control of the vehicle.
an accident or a sudden stop. We recommend that your
Serious or fatal internal injuries chest be at least 10 inches
could result because the seat (250 mm) away from the steer-
belt cannot operate normally. ing wheel.
3 3
WARNING - Rear (Continued) WARNING

seatbacks • Luggage and other cargo • Do not adjust the seat while
should be laid flat in the cargo wearing seat belts. Moving the
• The rear seatback must be
area or on the folded rear seat cushion forward may
securely latched. If not, pas-
seatback. If objects are large, cause strong pressure on the
sengers and objects could be
heavy, or must be piled, they abdomen.
thrown forward resulting in
must be secured. Under no
serious injury or death in the • Use extreme caution so that
circumstances should cargo
event of a sudden stop or col- hands or other objects are not
be piled higher than the seat-
lision. caught in the seat mechanisms
backs. Failure to follow these
• No passenger should ride in warnings could result in seri- while the seat is moving.
the cargo area or sit or lie on ous injury or death in the • Do not place a cigarette
folded seatbacks while the event of a sudden stop, colli- lighter on the floor or seat.
vehicle is moving. All passen- sion or rollover. When you operate the seat,
gers must be properly seated gas may exit out of the lighter
in seats and restrained prop- and cause a fire.
erly while riding.
WARNING • Use extreme caution when
• When resetting the seatback picking small objects trapped
to the upright position, make After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked under the seats or between
sure it is securely latched by the seat and the center con-
pushing it forward and rear- into place by attempting to
move the seat forward or sole. Your hands might be cut
wards. or injured by the sharp edges
reverse without using the lock
• To avoid the possibility of release lever. Sudden or unex- of the seats mechanism.
burns, do not remove the car- pected movement of the dri-
pet in the cargo area. Emission ver's seat could cause you to
control devices beneath this lose control of the vehicle
floor generate high tempera- resulting in an accident.
tures.
(Continued)
3 4
Front seat adjustment - Manual Seatback angle Seat cushion height

(if equipped) (for driver’s seat) (if equipped)
Forward and rearward
ONCESA2003
To recline the seatback: ONCESA2004
ONCESA2002
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the To change the height of the seat
To move the seat forward or rearward: seatback recline lever. cushion, push the lever upwards or
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment 2. Carefully lean back on the seat downwards.
lever up and hold it. and adjust the seatback of the • To lower the seat cushion, push the
seat to the position you desire. lever down several times.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure • To raise the seat cushion, pull the
the seatback is locked in place. lever up several times.
3. Release the lever and make sure (The lever MUST return to its orig-
the seat is locked in place. inal position for the seatback to
Adjust the seat before driving, and lock.)
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and rear-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
3 5
2-way lumbar support Front seat adjustment - power

(for driver’s seat) (if equipped) CAUTION
The front seat can be adjusted by • The power seat is driven by an
using the control knobs located on electric motor. Stop operating
the outside of the seat cushion. once the adjustment is com-
Before driving, adjust the seat to the pleted. Excessive operation
proper position so as to easily con- may damage the electrical
trol the steering wheel, pedals and equipment.
switches on the instrument panel. • When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
WARNING unnecessary battery drain,
The power seat is operable with don’t adjust the power seat
the ignition OFF. longer than necessary while
ONCESA2005 the engine is not running.
Therefore, children should never
1. Press the front portion of the be left unattended in the vehicle. • Do not operate two or more
switch to increase support or the power seat control knobs at the
rear portion of the switch to same time. Doing so may result
decrease support. in power seat motor or electri-
2. Release the switch once it reach- cal component malfunction.
es the desired position.
3 6
Forward and backward Seatback angle
ONCESA2009
ONCESA2006 ONCESA2007
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
1. Push the control switch forward or 1. Push the control switch forward or 1. Pull the front portion of the control
backward to move the seat to the backward to move the seatback to switch up to raise or down to lower
desired position. the desired angle. the front part of the seat cushion.
Pull the rear portion of the control
2. Release the switch once the seat 2. Release the switch once the seat switch up to raise or down to lower
reaches the desired position. reaches the desired position. the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
3 7
4-way lumbar support Driver position memory system

(for driver’s seat, if equipped) (if equipped, for power seat) WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
Storing positions into memory

using the buttons on the door
ONCESA2008 ODM042335 Storing driver’s seat positions
The lumbar support can be adjusted A driver position memory system is 1. Shift the shift lever into P or N
by pressing the switch. provided to store and recall the driv- while the engine start/stop button
1. Press the front portion (1) of the er seat and outside rearview mirror is ON or ignition switch ON.
switch to increase support, or the position with a simple button opera- 2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-
rear portion (2) of the switch, to tion. By saving the desired position side rearview mirror to a position
decrease support. into the system memory, different that is comfortable for the driver.
2. Release the switch once it reach- drivers can reposition the driver seat 3. Press SET button on the control
es the desired position. based upon their driving preference. panel. The system will beep once.
If the battery is disconnected, the posi-
3. Press the upper portion (3) of the 4. Press one of the memory buttons
switch to move the support position memory will be erased and the
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
tion up, or press the lower portion driving position should be restored in
pressing the SET button. The sys-
(4) of the switch, to move the sup- the system.
tem will beep twice when memory
port position down. has been successfully stored.
4. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
3 8
Recalling positions from memory Easy access function

The position in memory will be WARNING (if equipped)
recalled when: Use caution when recalling the The system will move the driver's
1. The shift lever is in P or N with one adjustment memory while sit- seat automatically as follows:
of the condition below: ting in the vehicle. Push the • Without smart key system
seat position control switch to - It will move the driver’s seat rear-
- The ignition switch in the ON the desired position immediate-
position or engine running. ward when the ignition key is
ly if the seat moves too far in removed and front driver’s door is
- The ignition switch in the any direction.
LOCK/OFF or ACC position opened.
while the driver's door is opened. - It will move the driver’s seat for-
2. Press the desired memory button ward when the ignition key is
(1 or 2). The system will beep inserted.
once, then the driver’s seat will • With smart key system
automatically adjust to the stored - It will move the driver’s seat rear-
position. ward when the engine start/stop
Adjusting the control switch for the button is changed to the OFF
driver’s seat while the system is position and front driver’s door is
recalling the stored position will opened.
cause the movement to stop and - It will move the driver’s seat for-
move in the direction that the control ward when the engine start/stop
switch is moved. button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this

feature. Refer to "User settings" in
section 4.
3 9
Headrest Forward and backward adjustment

WARNING - Headrest
adjustment
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is simi-
lar with the height of the top of
their eyes.
OHM038048N ONCESA2015
Also adjust the headrest as
The driver's and front passenger's close to your head as possi- The headrest may be adjusted for-
seats are equipped with a headrest ble. For this reason, the use of ward to 4 different positions by pulling
for the occupant's safety and comfort. a cushion that holds the body the headrest forward to the desired
The headrest not only provides com- away from the seatback is not detent. To adjust the headrest to
fort for the driver and front passenger, recommended. backwards position, press and hold
but also helps to protect the head and • Do not operate the vehicle the release button (1), and adjust
neck in the event of a collision. with the headrests removed. position of the headrest. Adjust the
Severe injury to an occupant headrest so that it properly supports
may occur in the event of an the head and neck.
accident. Headrests may pro-
vide protection against severe
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest
position of the driver's seat
while the vehicle is in motion.
3 10
Adjusting the height up and down Removal and installation

■ Type A
OYFH034205 ONCNSA3150
■ Type B
ONCESA2016
CAUTION
To raise the headrest :
If you recline the seatback
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1). towards the front with the head-
rest and seat cushion raised,
To lower the headrest : the headrest may come in con-
1. Push and hold the release button tact with the sunvisor or other
(2) on the headrest support parts of the vehicle.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3). ONCNSA3152
To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3 11
3. Press the headrest release button ■ Type A 3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
(3) while pulling the headrest up priate height.
(4).
WARNING
WARNING Always make sure the headrest
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a locks into position after rein-
seat with the headrest removed. stalling and adjusting it properly.
ONCNSA3151
■ Type B
ONCNSA3153
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3 12
Seat warmer (if equipped) With the ignition switch in the ON

position, push either of the switches CAUTION
■ Type A
(red color) to warm the driver's seat • When cleaning the seats, do
or the front passenger's seat. not use an organic solvent
During mild weather or under condi- such as thinner, benzene,
tions where the operation of the seat alcohol and gasoline. Doing
warmer is not needed, keep the so may damage the surface of
switches in the OFF position. the heater or seats.
• Each time you push the button, the • To prevent overheating the
temperature setting of the seat is seat warmer, do not place any-
changed as follows : thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( ) blankets, cushions or seat
OANNSA2018
covers while the seat warmer
→
■ Type B
is in operation.
• The seat warmer defaults to the • Do not place heavy or sharp
OFF position whenever the ignition objects on seats equipped
switch is turned on. with seat warmers. Damage to
• With the seat warmer switch in the the seat warming components
ON position, the heating system in could occur.
the seat turns off or on automati-
cally depending on the seat tem-
perature.
OANNSA2019
The seat warmer is provided to warm

the front seats during cold weather.
3 13
Air ventilation seat (if equipped) • Each time you press the button, the
WARNING - Seat warmer airflow will change as follows:
burns
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
Never allow passengers who
→
may not be able to take care of
themselves to be exposed to
the risk of seat warmer burns. • The air ventilation seat defaults to
These include: the OFF position whenever the igni-
tion switch is turned on.
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily OANNSA2020
3. Fatigued individuals The air ventilation seat is provided to

4. Intoxicated individuals cool the front seats during hot weath-
er by blowing air through small vent
5. Individuals taking medication holes on the surface of the seats.
that can cause drowsiness or While the engine is running, press
sleepiness (sleeping pills, the cooling portion (blue color) of the
cold tablets, etc.) switch to cool the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat.
When the operation of the seat cool-
er is not needed, keep the switches
in the OFF position.
3 14
Seatback pocket Rear seat adjustment

WARNING Forward and backward
For proper operation of the (if equipped)
occupant classification system:
■ 7-seater
• Do not place any items cumu-
latively weighing over 2.2 lbs
(1 kg) in the seatback pocket
or on the seat.
OCM030052
OANNSA2021
■ 6-seater
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the
occupant sensing system.
ONCDSA2113
To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
3 15
2. Slide the seat to the position you Seatback angle 3. Release the lever and make sure
desire. the seatback is locked in place. (The
■ 7-seater
3. Release the lever and make sure lever MUST return to its original
the seat is locked in place. position for the seatback to lock.)
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
OANNSA2022
■ 6-seater
ONCDSA3125
To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seat-
back of the seat to the position you
desire.
3 16
Headrest (for rear seat) Adjusting the height up and down

(Continued)
- 2nd row
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravi-
ty of most people's head is
similar with the height of the
top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as
OHM038049N
close to your head as possi-
The rear seat(s) is equipped with ble. For this reason, the use of OANNSA2024
headrests in all the seating positions a cushion that holds the body To raise the headrest :
for the occupant's safety and comfort. away from the seatback is not
recommended. 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps to • Do not operate the vehicle
protect the head and neck in the with the headrests removed. To lower the headrest :
event of a collision. Severe injury to an occupant 1. Push and hold the release button
may occur in the event of an (2) on the headrest support
WARNING - Headrest accident. Headrests may pro- 2. Lower the headrest to the desired
adjustment vide protection against severe position (3).
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
(Continued) motion.
3 17
Removal and installation Fold the headrest - 3rd row

- 2nd row WARNING
• Make sure the headrest locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occu-
pants.
• After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed
in the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash
injury during rear impact.
ONCESA2106
OANNSA2025
To fold the headrest :
To remove the headrest : Pull the strap.
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
3 18
Unfold the headrest - 3rd row Armrest Seat warmer

■ 7-seater
(for rear seat, if equipped)
OANNSA2028
■ 6-seater
ONCESA2107
ODM032026
To unfold the headrest :
Raise the headrest manually. The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the rear seats.
During mild weather or under condi-
ONCESA2108 tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
To use the armrest, pull it forward switches in the OFF position.
from the seatback.
3 19
• Each time you push the button, the

temperature setting of the seat is CAUTION WARNING - Seat warmer
changed as follows : • When cleaning the seats, do burns
not use an organic solvent Never allow passengers who
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
such as thinner, benzene, may not be able to take care of
→
alcohol and gasoline. Doing themselves to be exposed to

so may damage the surface of the risk of seat warmer burns.
• The seat warmer defaults to the the heater or seats. These include:
OFF position whenever the ignition • To prevent overheating the
switch is turned on. 1. Infants, children, elderly or
seat warmer, do not place any- disabled persons, or hospital
• With the seat warmer switch in the thing on the seats that insu- outpatients
ON position, the heating system in lates against heat, such as
the seat turns off or on automati- blankets, cushions or seat 2. Persons with sensitive skin
cally depending on the seat tem- covers while the seat warmer or those that burn easily
perature. is in operation. 3. Fatigued individuals
• Do not place heavy or sharp 4. Intoxicated individuals
objects on seats equipped 5. Individuals taking medication
with seat warmers. Damage to that can cause drowsiness or
the seat warming components sleepiness (sleeping pills,
could occur. cold tablets, etc.)
3 20
Walk-in seat Folding the rear seat

(2nd row seat, if equipped) The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
ODM032027 ONCESA2109 moving. This is not a proper
3.The 2nd row seatback will be fold- seating position and no seat
ed and push the seat to the far- belts are available for use.
thest forward position. This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
After getting in or out, slide the 2nd accident or sudden stop.
row seat to the farthest rearward
position and pull the seatback firm- • Objects carried on the folded
ly backward until it clicks into place. down seatback should not
Make sure that the seat is locked in extend higher than the top of
place. the front seatbacks. Doing
ONCESA2110
this could allow cargo to slide
forward and cause injury or
To get in or out of the 3rd row seat, WARNING damage during sudden stops.
1. Route the seat belt webbing Never attempt to adjust while
through the rear seat belt guide clip. the vehicle is moving or while
After inserting the seat belt, tighten the 2nd row seat is occupied as
the belt webbing by pulling it up. the seat may suddenly move
and cause the seated passenger
2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the to be injured.
2nd row seatback.
3 21
■ 2nd row seat To fold down the rear seatback

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
■ 3rd row seat
ODM032034/OXM039030/ODM032027/ODM032035
3 22
■ 2nd row seat 4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,

then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle. When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever (2nd row) or
strap (3rd row).
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
■ 3rd row seat
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
OANNSA2026/ONCESA2100/OANNSA2027/ONCESA2102
3 23
2nd row seat folding To fold down the rear center seat-
(from outside, if equipped) WARNING - Rear seat back (for 2nd row seat)
folding
Do not fold the rear seats (2nd &
3rd row seats), if passengers,
pets or luggage are in the rear
seats.
It may cause injury or damage
to passengers, pets or luggage.
ONCDSA3116 ONCESA2104
Pull the 2nd row seat back folding 1. Lower the rear headrests to the
lever out. lowest position.
The 2nd row seat back will be folded. 2. Push the center seatback folding
lever up, then fold the seat toward
If you pull the left side lever (1) out,
the front of the vehicle.
left side seat back and center seat
back will be folded.
If you pull the right side lever (2) out, When you return the seatback to its
right side seat back will be folded. upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
3 24
WARNING - 2nd row center WARNING - Uprighting CAUTION - Damaging

seat folding seat rear seat belt buckles
When you return the seatback When you fold the rear (2nd
to its upright position, hold the and/or 3rd row) seatback, insert
seatback and return it slowly. If the buckle in the pocket between
the seatback is returned with- the rear seatback and cushion.
out holding it, the back of the Doing so can prevent the buckle
• Do not fold the 2nd row center seat could spring forward from being damaged by the rear
seat, if occupants are seated resulting in injury caused by seatback.
in the 3rd row seats, it may being struck by the seatback.
cause injury to occupants by
the seat device. CAUTION - Rear seat belts
If occupants are seated in the WARNING - 2nd row LH When returning the rear (2nd
3rd row seats, fix the upright seat folding and/or 3rd row) seatbacks to the
position of the 2nd row center upright position, remember to
seat. return the rear shoulder belts to
• The 2nd row center seat back their proper position. Routing the
does not fix when it is folded. seat belt webbing through the
If you use the 2nd row center rear seat belt guides will help
seat back folding function to keep the belts from being trapped
carry long objects, you should behind or under the seats.
fix the long object to prevent it
from being thrown about the
vehicle in a collision and Be careful when you fold the
causing injury to vehicle 2nd row LH seat, if the center
occupants. seat is folded. It may cause the
injury to you by the seat device.
3 25
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects in the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seats, since they
cannot be properly secured and
may hit the front seat occupants
in a collision. OUN026140
WARNING
WARNING - Cargo loading If the tailgate is pushed down to
Make sure the engine is off, the close it when a passenger's
automatic transaxle is in P (Park) head is not against a properly
and the parking brake is secure- adjusted headrest or a tall per-
ly applied whenever loading or son is seated, the tailgate may
unloading cargo. Failure to take hit the occupant's head, which
these steps may allow the vehi- could cause injury.
cle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
3 26
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system (Continued) WARNING
• Never wear the shoulder belt Seat belts are designed to bear
WARNING under your arm or behind
• For maximum restraint sys- upon the bony structure of the
your back. An improperly body, and should be worn low
tem protection, the seat belts positioned shoulder belt can
must always be used whenev- across the front of the pelvis,
cause serious injuries in a chest and shoulders, as appli-
er the car is moving. crash. The shoulder belt cable; wearing the lap section
• Seat belts are most effective should be positioned midway of the belt across the abdominal
when seatbacks are in the over your shoulder across area must be avoided.
upright position. your collarbone.
Seat belts should be adjusted
• Children age 12 and younger • Avoid wearing twisted seat as firmly as possible, consis-
must always be properly belts. A twisted belt can't do tent with comfort, to provide the
restrained in the rear seat. its job as well. In a collision, it protection for which they have
Never allow children to ride in could even cut into you. Be been designed.
the front passenger seat. If a sure the belt webbing is
child over 12 must be seated straight and not twisted. A slack belt will greatly reduce
in the front seat, he/she must the protection afforded to the
• Be careful not to damage the occupant.
be properly belted and the belt webbing or hardware. If
seat should be moved as far the belt webbing or hardware (Continued)
back as possible. is damaged, replace it.
(Continued)
3 27
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

(Continued) WARNING
Care should be taken to avoid • No modifications or additions
contamination of the webbing should be made by the user
with polishes, oils and chemi- which will either prevent the
cals and particularly battery seat belt adjusting devices
acid. Cleaning may safely be from operating to remove
carried out using mild soap and slack, or prevent the seat belt
water. The belt should be assembly from being adjusted
replaced if webbing becomes to remove slack.
frayed, contaminated or dam- • When you fasten the seat belt,
aged. It is essential to replace be careful not to latch the seat
the entire assembly after it has belt in the buckles of another.
been worn in a severe impact It's very dangerous and you 1GQA2083
even if damage to the assembly may not be protected by the The driver's seat belt warning light
is not obvious. Belts should not seat belt properly. and chime will activate to the follow-
be worn with straps twisted.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt ing table when the ignition switch is
Each seat belt assembly must
and do not fasten and unfas- in "ON" position.
only be used by one occupant;
ten the seat belt repeatedly
it is dangerous to put a belt while driving. This could result
around a child being carried on in loss of control, and an acci-
the occupant's lap. dent causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle. The seat belt may
not be fastened securely.
3 28
Conditions Warning Pattern Seat belt - Driver's and passen- The seat belt automatically adjusts to
Vehicle Chime- ger’s 3-point system with emer- the proper length only after the lap
Seat Belt Light-Blink belt portion is adjusted manually so
Speed Sound gency locking retractor
Unbuckled 6 seconds
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
Buckled 6 seconds None
motion, the belt will extend and let
Below 3 mph you move around. If there is a sud-
6 seconds None
(5 km/h) den stop or impact, however, the belt
Buckled → 3 mph~ will lock into position. It will also lock
6 seconds
Unbuckled 6 mph if you try to lean forward too quickly.
Above 6 mph 6 sec. on / 24 sec. off If you are not able to pull out the seat
(10 km/h) (11 times) belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
Above 6 mph belt out and release it. Then you will
(10 km/h) 6 seconds *1 be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Unbuckled ↓ ↓
B180A01NF-1
Below 3 mph Stop *2
(5 km/h) To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times the retractor and insert the metal tab
with an interval of 24 seconds. If (1) into the buckle (2). There will be
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the an audible "click" when the tab locks
light will stop within 6 seconds and into the buckle.
chime will stop immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
3 29
Height adjustment (Front) To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
Front seat
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
B200A02NF
OCM030026
You can adjust the height of the shoul- WARNING
der belt anchor to one of 4 positions Improperly positioned seat
for maximum comfort and safety. belts may increase the risk of
The shoulder portion should be serious injury in an accident.
adjusted so that it lies across your Take the following precautions
chest and midway over your shoulder when adjusting the seat belt:
nearest the door and not your neck. • Position the lap portion of the
The height of the adjusting seat belt seat belt as low as possible
should not be too near your neck. across your hips, not on your
To adjust the height of the seat belt waist, so that it fits snugly.
anchor, lower or raise the height (Continued)
adjuster into an appropriate position.
3 30
Seat belts - Rear seat 3-point sys- When the seat belt is fully extended
(Continued) from the retractor to allow the instal-
tem with combination locking
• Position one arm under the retractor lation of a child restraint system, the
shoulder belt and the other seat belt operation changes to allow
over the belt, as shown in the To fasten your seat belt:
the belt to retract, but not to extend
illustration. Combination retractor type seat belts (Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
• Always position the shoulder are installed in the rear seat positions Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
to help accommodate the installation tem” in this section.
belt anchor into the locked
of child restraint systems. Although a
position at the appropriate To convert from the automatic lock-
combination retractor is also installed
height. ing feature to the emergency locking
in the front passenger seat position, it
• Never position the shoulder is strongly recommended that children operation mode, allow the unbuckled
belt across your neck or face. always be seated in the rear seat. seat belt to fully retract.
NEVER place any infant restraint sys-
tem in the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion of
the seat belt is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips.
3 31
Stowing the rear seat belt

■ 2nd row seat
ODM032051 B210A01NF-1/H ODM032034

When using the rear center seat belt, To release the seat belt: ■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark The seat belt is released by pressing
must be used. the release button (1) in the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
OXM039030
• The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when
not in use.
3 32
■ 2nd row seat Pre-tensioner seat belt

CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides.
If you pull the seat belt when it
is stored in the guides, it may
damage the guides and/or belt
webbing.
ODM032027
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
OANNSA2023
Your vehicle is equipped with pre-ten-

sioner seatbelts in the front seating
positions (driver side with retractor
pre-tensioner, passenger side with
retractor and EFD (Emergency
Fastening Device)).
ODM032035 The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
• Routing the seat belt webbing activated, where the frontal collisions
through the rear seat belt guides (or side collisions or rollovers) are
will help keep the belts from being severe enough, together with the air
trapped behind or under the seats. bags.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
3 33
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

if the occupant tries to lean forward WARNING
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will • Do not put anything near the
lock into position. In certain frontal buckle. Placing objects near
collisions (or side collisions or the buckle may increase the
rollovers), the pre-tensioner will acti- risk of personal injury in the
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter event of a collision.
contact against the occupant's body.
• For your safety, be sure that
(1) Retractor Pretensioner the belt webbing is not loose
The purpose of the retractor pre- or twisted and always sit
tensioner is to make sure that the properly on your seat.
shoulder belts fit in tightly against ODMESA2024
the occupant's upper body in cer- The seat belt pre-tensioner system
tain frontal collisions (or side colli- consists mainly of the following com-
sions or rollovers). ponents. Their locations are shown in
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device) the illustration:
The purpose of the EFD is to make 1. SRS air bag warning light
sure that the pelvis belts fit in tight- 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
ly against the occupant's lower 3. SRS control module
body in certain frontal collisions (or
rollovers). (for passenger’s side) 4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
If the system senses excessive ten-

sion on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner system
activates, the load limiter inside the
retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
3 34
✽ NOTICE
WARNING CAUTION
• Both the driver's and front pas-
To obtain maximum benefit senger's seat belt pre-tensioner If the pre-tensioner seat belt
from a pre-tensioner seat belt: system may be activated not only system are not working proper-
1. The seat belt must be worn in certain frontal collision but also ly, this warning light will illumi-
correctly and adjusted to the in certain side collision or rollover, nate even if there is no malfunc-
proper position. Please read if the vehicle is equipped with a tion of the SRS air bag. If the
and follow all of the important side or curtain air bag. SRS air bag warning light blinks
information and precautions • When the pre-tensioner seat belts or does not illuminate when the
about your vehicle’s occupant are activated, a loud noise may be ignition switch is turned ON, or if
safety features – including heard and fine dust, which may it remains illuminated after illu-
seat belts and air bags – that appear to be smoke, may be visible minating for approximately 6
are provided in this manual. in the passenger compartment. seconds, or if it illuminates while
These are normal operating condi- the vehicle is being driven, have
2. Be sure you and your passen- tions and are not hazardous. an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
gers always wear seat belts • Although it is harmless, the fine inspect the pre-tensioner seat
properly. dust may cause skin irritation and belt and SRS air bag system as
should not be breathed for pro- soon as possible.
longed periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tension-
er seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
3 35
(Continued) Seat belt precautions

WARNING
• Pre-tensioner seatbelt sys- • Improper handling of the pre-
tems are designed to operate tensioner seat belt assem- WARNING
only one time. After activation, blies, and failure to heed the All occupants of the vehicle
pre-tensioner seat belts must warnings not to strike, modify, must wear their seat belts at all
be replaced. All seat belts, of inspect, replace, service or times. Seat belts and child
any type, should always be repair the pre-tensioner seat restraints reduce the risk of
replaced after they have been belt assemblies may lead to serious or fatal injuries for all
worn during a collision. improper operation or inad- occupants in the event of a col-
vertent activation and serious lision or sudden stop. Without a
• The pre-tensioner seat belt injury. seat belt, occupants could be
assembly mechanisms become shifted too close to a deploying
hot during activation. Do not • Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a air bag, strike the interior struc-
touch the pre-tensioner seat ture or be thrown from the vehi-
belt assemblies for several min- motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner cle. Properly worn seat belts
utes after they have been acti- greatly reduce these hazards.
vated. seat belt must be discarded,
contact an authorized Even with advanced air bags,
• Do not attempt to inspect or unbelted occupants can be
replace the pre-tensioner seat HYUNDAI dealer.
severely injured by a deploying
belts yourself. This must be air bag.
done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
• Do not strike the pre-tension- occupant seating contained in
er seat belt assemblies. this manual.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
(Continued)
3 36
Infant or small child ✽ NOTICE Larger children

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Small children are best protected Children who are too large for child
You should be aware of the specific from injury in an accident when restraint systems should always
requirements in your state. Child properly restrained in the rear seat occupy the rear seat and use the
and/or infant seats must be properly by a child restraint system that available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
placed and installed in the rear seat. meets the requirements of the portion should be fastened snug on
For more information about the use of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety the hips and as low as possible.
these restraints, refer to “Child Standards. Before buying any child Check belt fit periodically. A child's
restraint system” in this section. restraint system, make sure that it squirming could put the belt out of
has a label certifying that it meets position. Children are afforded the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety most safety in the event of an acci-
WARNING dent when they are restrained by a
Standard 213. The restraint must be
Every person in your vehicle appropriate for your child's height proper restraint system in the rear
needs to be properly restrained and weight. Check the label on the seat. If a larger child (over age 12)
at all times, including infants child restraint for this information. must be seated in the front seat, the
and children. Never hold a child Refer to “Child restraint system” in child should be securely restrained
in your arms or lap when riding this section. by the available lap/shoulder belt and
in a vehicle. The violent forces the seat should be placed in the rear-
created during a crash will tear most position. Children age 12 and
the child from your arms and under should be restrained securely
throw the child against the inte- in the rear seat. NEVER place a child
rior. Always use a child restraint age 12 and under in the front seat.
appropriate for your child's NEVER place a rear facing child seat
height and weight. in the front seat of a vehicle.
3 37
If the shoulder belt portion slightly Pregnant women Injured person

touches the child’s neck or face, try The use of a seat belt is recom- A seat belt should be used when an
placing the child closer to the center of mended for pregnant women to injured person is being transported.
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still lessen the chance of injury in an When this is necessary, you should
touches their face or neck they need to accident. When a seat belt is used, consult a physician for recommenda-
be returned to a child restraint system. the lap belt portion should be placed tions.
as low and snugly as possible on the
WARNING - Shoulder hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a One person per belt
belts on small children Two people (including children)
physician.
• Never allow a shoulder belt to should never attempt to use a single
be in contact with a child’s seat belt. This could increase the
neck or face while the vehicle WARNING - Pregnant severity of injuries in case of an acci-
is in motion. women dent.
• If seat belts are not properly Pregnant women must never
worn and adjusted on chil- place the lap portion of the Do not lie down
dren, there is a risk of death or safety belt over the area of the
serious injury. abdomen where the unborn To reduce the chance of injuries in
child is located or above the the event of an accident and to
abdomen where the belt could achieve maximum effectiveness of
seriously injure or even cause the restraint system, all passengers
the death of the unborn child should be sitting up and the front and
during an impact. rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper pro-
tection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the seats are in a
reclined position.
3 38
Care of seat belts Periodic inspection

WARNING Seat belt systems should never be All seat belts should be inspected
Riding with a reclined seatback disassembled or modified. In addi- periodically for wear or damage of
increases your chance of seri- tion, care should be taken to assure any kind. Any damaged parts should
ous or fatal injuries in the event that seat belts and belt hardware are be replaced as soon as possible.
of a collision or sudden stop. not damaged by seat hinges, doors
The protection of your restraint or other abuse.
system (seat belts and air bags) Keep belts clean and dry
is greatly reduced by reclining Seat belts should be kept clean and
your seat. Seat belts must be WARNING - Pinched dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
snug against your hips and seat belt cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
chest to work properly. The Make sure that the webbing tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
more the seatback is reclined, and/or buckle does not get strong detergents or abrasives
the greater the chance that an caught or pinched in the rear should not be used because they
occupant's hips will slide under seat when returning the rear may damage and weaken the fabric.
the lap belt causing serious seatback to its upright position.
internal injuries or the occu- A caught or pinched webbing/ When to replace seat belts
pant's neck could strike the buckle may become damaged
shoulder belt. Drivers and pas- and could fail during a collision Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
sengers should always sit well or sudden stop resulting in seri- assemblies should be replaced if the
back in their seats, properly ous injury or death. vehicle has been involved in an acci-
belted, and with the seatbacks dent. This should be done even if no
upright. damage is visible. Additional ques-
tions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3 39
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in Children could be injured or killed in
(Continued)
the rear seat and must always be a crash if their restraints are not
properly restrained to minimize the properly secured. For small children • A seat belt or child restraint
risk of injury in an accident, sudden and babies, a child seat or infant seat system can become very hot
stop or sudden maneuver. According must be used. Before buying a par- if it is left in a closed vehicle
to accident statistics, children are ticular child restraint system, make on a sunny day, even if the
safer when properly restrained in the sure it fits your car seat and seat outside temperature does not
rear seats than in the front seat. belts, and fits your child. Follow all feel hot. Be sure to check the
Larger children not in a child restraint the instructions provided by the man- seat cover and buckles before
should use one of the seat belts pro- ufacturer when installing the child placing a child there.
vided. restraint system. • When the child restraint sys-
You should be aware of the specific tem is not in use, store it in
requirements in your state. Child the luggage area or fasten it
and/or infant safety seats must be
WARNING with a seat belt so that it will
properly placed and installed in the • A child restraint system must not be thrown forward in the
rear seat. You must use a commer- be placed in the rear seat. case of a sudden stop or an
cially available child restraint system Never install a child or infant accident.
that meets the requirements of the seat on the front passenger's • Children may be seriously
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety seat. Should an accident injured or killed by an inflating
Standards (FMVSS). occur and cause the passen- air bag. All children, even
ger-side air bag to deploy, it those too large for child
Child restraint systems are designed could severely injure or kill an
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap restraints, must ride in the
infant or child seated in an rear seat.
belts or the lap belt portion of a infant or child seat. Thus only
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys- use a child restraint in the
tem (if equipped). rear seat of your vehicle.
(Continued)
3 40
WARNING (Continued) (Continued)

To reduce the chance of serious • Never put a seat belt over • Never allow a child to stand-
or fatal injuries: yourself and a child. During a up or kneel on the seat or floor
crash, the belt could press of a moving vehicle. During a
• Children of all ages are safer deep into the child causing collision or sudden stop, the
when restrained in the rear serious internal injuries. child can be violently thrown
seat. A child riding in the front against the vehicle’s interior,
passenger seat can be force- • Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle – not even resulting in serious injury.
fully struck by an inflating air
for a short time. The car can • Never use an infant carrier or
bag resulting in serious or a child safety seat that
fatal injuries. heat up very quickly, resulting
in serious injuries to children "hooks" over a seatback, it
• Always follow the child inside. Even very young chil- may not provide adequate
restraint system manufactur- dren may inadvertently cause security in an accident.
er’s instructions for installation the vehicle to move, entangle • Seat belts can become very
and use of the child restraint. themselves in the windows, or hot, especially when the car is
• Always make sure the child lock themselves or others parked in direct sunlight.
seat is secured properly in the inside the vehicle. Always check seat belt buck-
car and your child is securely • Never allow two children, or les before fastening them
restrained in the child seat. any two persons, to use the over a child.
• Never hold a child in your same seat belt. • After an accident, have an
arms or lap when riding in a • Children often squirm and authorized HYUNDAI dealer
vehicle. The violent forces cre- reposition themselves improp- check the child restraint sys-
ated during a crash will tear erly. Never let a child ride with tem, seat belt, tether anchor
the child from your arms and the shoulder belt under their and lower anchor.
throw the child against the arm or behind their back. • If there is not enough space to
car’s interior. Always properly position and place the child restraint sys-
(Continued) secure children in the rear seat. tem because of the driver's
(Continued) seat, install the child restraint
system in the rear right seat.
3 41
Using a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend

(Continued)
that the child restraint system be
Rearward-facing child restraint system Before installing the child
used in the rear seats.
restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the
WARNING child restraint system manu-
Never place a rear-facing child facturer.
restraint in the front passenger • If the seat belt does not oper-
seat, because of the danger that ate as described in this sec-
an inflating passenger-side air tion, have the system checked
bag could impact the rear-facing immediately by your author-
child restraint and kill the child. ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system • Failure to observe this manu-
Since all passenger seat belts move al's instructions regarding
freely under normal conditions and child restraint systems and
only lock under extreme or emer- the instructions provided with
gency conditions (emergency locking the child restraint system
mode), you must manually change could increase the chance
these seat belts to the automatic lock- and/or severity of injury in an
ing mode to secure a child restraint. accident.
• If the vehicle headrest pre-
WARNING - Child seat vents proper installation of a
OANNSA2032 installation child seat, the headrest of the
For small children and babies, the use • A child can be seriously respective seating position
of a child seat or infant seat is required. injured or killed in a collision if shall be readjusted or entirely
This child seat or infant seat should be the child restraint is not prop- removed.
of appropriate size for the child and erly anchored to the vehicle
should be installed in accordance with and the child is not properly
the manufacturer's instructions. restrained in the child restraint.
(Continued)
3 42
Placing a passenger seat belt

into the automatic locking mode
OMD030053A OMD030054A
To install a child restraint system on 3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
E2MS103005
the outboard or center rear seats, do seat belt all the way out. When the
the following: shoulder portion of the seat belt is
The automatic locking mode will help 1. Place the child restraint system in fully extended, it will shift the
prevent the normal movement of the the seat and route the lap/shoulder retractor to the “Automatic locking”
child in the vehicle from causing the belt around or through the restraint, (child restraint) mode.
seat belt to loosen and compromise following the restraint manufactur-
the child restraint system. To secure er’s instructions. Be sure the seat
a child restraint system, use the fol- belt webbing is not twisted.
lowing procedure.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
3 43
To remove the child restraint, press

the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
OMD030055A OMD030056A
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion 5. Remove as much slack from the
of the seat belt to retract and listen belt as possible by pushing down
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet- on the child restraint system while
ing” sound. This indicates that the feeding the shoulder belt back into
retractor is in the “automatic lock- the retractor.
ing” mode. If no distinct sound is 6. Push and pull on the child restraint
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4. system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Automatic locking” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Automatic
locking” mode.
3 44
Securing a child restraint seat with “Tether Anchor” system

WARNING - Automatic
locking mode ■ 7-seater ■ 6-seater
The lap/shoulder belt automati-

cally returns to the “emergency
lock mode” whenever the belt is
allowed to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each
time a child restraint is installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops sud-
denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly This symbol indicates the
anchored to the car, including position of the tether anchor.
setting the retractor to the
Automatic Locking mode.
When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Automatic lock- ONCESA2021/ONCESA2112/ONCESA2111
ing” mode to the emergency lock Child restraint hooks (tether anchors) are located on the rear of the seat backs.
mode for normal adult usage.
3 45
WARNING WARNING
• When using the vehicle's A child can be seriously injured
"Tether Anchor" system to or killed in a collision if the
install a child restraint system child restraint is not properly
in the rear seat, all unused anchored to the car and the
vehicle rear seat belt metal child is not properly restrained
latch plates or tabs must be in the child restraint. Always fol-
latched securely in their seat low the child seat manufactur-
belt buckles and the seat belt er’s instructions for installation
webbing must be retracted and use.
OANNSA2033 behind the child restraint to
1. Route the child restraint seat strap prevent the child from reaching
over the seatback. and taking hold of unretracted WARNING - Tether strap
seat belts. Unlatched metal
For vehicles with adjustable head- latch plates or tabs may allow Never mount more than one
rests, route the tether strap under the child to reach the unretract- child restraint to a single tether
the headrest and between the ed seat belts which may result anchor or to a single lower
headrest posts, otherwise route in strangulation and a serious anchorage point. The increased
the tether strap over the top of the injury or death to the child in load caused by multiple seats
seatback. the child restraint. may cause the tethers or
❈ Refer to "Adjusting the height up anchorage points to break,
• Do not place anything around causing serious injury or death.
and down - 2nd row" in this chap- the lower anchors. Also make
ter. sure that the seat belt is not
2. Connect the tether strap hook to caught in the lower anchors.
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
3 46
Securing a child restraint seat with Lower Anchor

WARNING - Child restraint child seat lower anchor system Position Indicator
check
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or
serious injury.
Lower Anchor
ODM032038
WARNING - Child restraint Child restraint symbols are located
anchorage OXM039035
on the left and right rear seat backs
• Child restraint anchorages are to indicate the position of the lower
designed to withstand only Some child seat manufacturers anchors for child restraints.
those loads imposed by cor- make child restraint seats that are
rectly fitted child restraints. labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
Under no circumstances are patible child restraint seats. LATCH
they to be used for adult seat stands for "Lower Anchors and
belts or harnesses or for Tethers for Children". These seats
attaching other items or equip- include two rigid or webbing mount-
ment to the vehicle. ed attachments that connect to two
• The tether strap may not work LATCH anchors at specific seating
properly if attached some- positions in your vehicle. This type of
where other than the correct child restraint seat eliminates the
tether anchor. need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
3 47
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

WARNING - Unused rear instructions to properly install child WARNING - LATCH lower
seatbelts restraint seats with LATCH or anchors
Always fasten the seatbelts LATCH-compatible attachments. LATCH lower anchors are only
behind the child restraint seat Once you have installed the LATCH to be used with the left and right
when they are not used to child restraint, assure that the seat is outboard seating positions of
secure the child seat. Failure to properly attached to the LATCH and the second row. Never attempt
do so may result in child stran- tether anchors. to attach a LATCH equipped
gulation. Also, test the child restraint seat seat in the the second center
before you place the child in it. Tilt and the third seating positions.
the seat from side to side. Also try to You may damage the anchors or
WARNING tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors may fail and break
the anchors hold the seat in place. in a collision.
Do not place anything around
the lower anchors. Also make
sure that the seat belt is not CAUTION ✽ NOTICE
caught in the lower anchors. Do not allow the rear seat belt The recommended weight for the
webbing to get scratched or LATCH system is under 65 lb
pinched by the child-seat latch (30 kg).
LATCH anchors have been provided and LATCH anchor during the
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors How to calculate the child restraint
installation. weight :
are located in the left and right out-
board seating positions of the sec- Child restraint weight =
ond row. Their locations are shown in 65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight
the illustration. There is no LATCH WARNING
anchors provided for the second cen- If the child restraint is not
ter and the third seating positions. anchored properly, the risk of a
The LATCH anchors are located child being seriously injured or
between the seatback and the seat killed in a collision greatly
cushion of the rear seat left and right increases.
outboard seating positions.
3 48
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Driver’s knee air bag
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the seat belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
ONCESA2052
3 49
How does the air bag system • The front air bags will completely This speed of inflation reduces the
operate inflate and deflate in an instant. risk of serious or life-threatening
It is virtually impossible for you to injuries and is thus a necessary part
• Air bags are activated (able to of air bag design.
inflate if necessary) only when the see the air bags inflate during an
ignition switch is turned to the ON or accident. However, air bag inflation can also
START position. It is much more likely that you will cause injuries which normally can
simply see the deflated air bags include facial abrasions, bruises and
• The appropriate air bags inflate broken bones because the inflation
instantly in the event of serious hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision. speed also causes the air bags to
frontal or side collision in order to expand with a great deal of force.
help protect the occupants from • In addition to inflating in serious
serious physical injury. side collisions, side and/or curtain • There are even circumstances
air bags will inflate if the sensing under which contact with the air
• There is no single speed at which bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
the air bags will inflate. system detects a rollover.
cially if the occupant is positioned
Generally, air bags are designed to • When a rollover is detected, side excessively close to the air bag.
inflate by the severity of a collision and/or curtain air bags will remain
and its direction. These two factors inflated longer to help provide pro-
determine whether the sensors tection from ejection, especially WARNING
send out an electronic deployment/ when used in conjunction with the • To avoid severe personal injury
inflation signal. seat belts. or death caused by deploying
• Air bag deployment depends on a • In order to help provide protection, air bags in a collision, the driv-
number of factors including vehicle the air bags must inflate rapidly. The er should sit as far back from
speed, angles of impact and the speed of air bag inflation is a con- the steering wheel air bag as
density and stiffness of the vehicles sequence of the extremely short possible (at least 10 inches
or objects which your vehicle hits in time in which to inflate the air bag (250 mm) away). The front pas-
the collision. Though, factors are not between the occupant and the vehi- sengers should always move
limited to those mentioned above. cle structures before the occupant their seats as far back as pos-
impacts those structures. sible and sit back in their seat.
(Continued)
3 50
Though the smoke and powder are Do not install a child restraint on
(Continued)
non-toxic, they may cause irritation to the front passenger’s seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
event of collision, and passen- this is the case, wash and rinse with
gers may be injured by the air cold water immediately and consult a
bag expansion force if they are doctor if the symptom persists.
not in proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause WARNING - Hot
injuries which normally include components
facial or bodily abrasions,
injuries from broken glasses or Do not touch the air bag storage
burns by the air bag inflation area's internal components
gasses. immediately after air bag infla-
tion. The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument 1JBH3051
Noise and smoke panel and the roof rails above
When the air bags inflate, they make a the front and rear doors are Never place a rear-facing child
loud noise and they leave smoke and very hot. Hot components can restraint in the front passenger’s
powder in the air inside of the vehicle. result in burn injuries. seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
This is normal and is a result of the impact the rear-facing child restraint,
ignition of the air bag inflator. After the causing serious or fatal injury.
air bag inflates, you may feel substan- In addition, do not place front-facing
tial discomfort in breathing due to the child restraints in the front passen-
contact of your chest with both the ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
seat belt and the air bag, as well as ger air bag inflates, it could cause
from breathing the smoke and powder. serious or fatal injuries to the child.
Open your doors and/or windows
as soon as possible after impact in
order to reduce discomfort and pre-
vent prolonged exposure to the
smoke and powder.
3 51
Air bag warning light SRS components and functions

WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could cause seri-
ous injury or death to an infant
or child.
W7-147 OEN031051N
The purpose of the air bag warning The SRS consists of the following
light in your instrument panel is to components:
alert you of a potential problem with 1. Driver's front air bag module
your airbag system, which includes
side and/or curtain airbags used for 2. Passenger's front air bag module
rollover protection. 3. Side impact air bag modules
When the ignition switch is turned 4. Curtain air bag modules
ON, the indicator light should illumi- 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
nate for approximately 6 seconds, blies
then go off. 6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
3 52
10. “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”

indicator (Front passenger’s seat WARNING
only) If any of the following condi-
11. Occupant classification system tions occurs, this indicates a
(Front passenger’s seat only) malfunction of the SRS. Have an
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s authorized HYUNDAI dealer
seat belt buckle sensors inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on
The SRSCM continually monitors all briefly when you turn the igni-
SRS components while the ignition tion ON.
switch is ON to determine if a crash W7-147
impact is severe enough to require • The light stays on after illumi-
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner The SRS air bag warning light " " nating for approximately 6
seat belt deployment. on the instrument panel will illumi- seconds.
nate for about 6 seconds after the • The light comes on while the
ignition switch is turned to the ON vehicle is in motion.
position, after which the SRS air bag
• The light blinks when the igni-
warning light " " should go out.
tion switch is in ON position.
3 53
Driver’s front air bag (1) Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
OHM039102N OHM039103N OHM039104N

The front air bag modules are located Upon deployment, tear seams mold- A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
in the center of the steering wheel, in ed directly into the pad covers will tion with a properly worn seat belt,
the front passenger's panel above the separate under pressure from the slows the driver's or the passenger's
glove box and in the driver’s side expansion of the air bags. Further forward motion, reducing the risk of
knee bolster. When the SRSCM opening of the covers then allows full head and chest injury.
detects a sufficiently severe impact to inflation of the air bags.
the front of the vehicle, it will auto-
matically deploy the front air bags. After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
3 54
Passenger’s front air bag

(Continued) WARNING
• When installing a container of • If an air bag deploys, there
liquid air freshener inside the may be a loud noise followed
vehicle, do not place it near by a fine dust released in the
the instrument cluster nor on vehicle. These conditions are
the instrument panel surface. normal and are not hazardous
It may become a dangerous - the air bags are packed in
projectile and cause injury if this fine powder. The dust gen-
the passenger's air bag erated during air bag deploy-
inflates. ment may cause skin or eye
B240B05L irritation as well as aggravate
asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
WARNING areas thoroughly with luke-
• Do not install or place any warm water and a mild soap
accessories (drink holder, CD after an accident in which the
or discs holder, sticker, etc.) air bags were deployed.
on the front passenger's • The SRS can function only
panel above the glove box in a when the ignition switch is in
vehicle with a passenger's air the ON position.
bag. Such objects may (Continued)
become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
(Continued)
3 55
(Continued) Occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with an

occupant classification system in the
If the SRS air bag warning light ■ Type A
front passenger's seat.
" " does not illuminate, or The occupant classification system
continuously remains on after is designed to detect the presence of
illuminating for about 6 sec- a properly-seated front passenger
onds or blinks when the igni- and determine if the passenger's
tion switch is turned to the ON front air bag should be enabled (may
position, or after the engine is inflate) or not. The driver's front air
started, comes on while driv-
bag is not affected or controlled by
ing, the SRS is not working the occupant classification system.
properly. If this occurs, have ■ Type B
your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or
disconnect a battery terminal,
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and remove
the ignition key for ignition
key, and turn the engine ■ Type C
start/stop button to the OFF
position for smart key. Never
remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warn-
ing will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
OANNSA2003/OANNSA2002/OANNSA2004
3 56
Main components of occupant You will find the PASSENGER AIR • The OCS may not function proper-
classification system BAG "OFF" indicator on the center ly if the passenger takes actions
facia panel. This system detects the which can affect the classification
• A detection device located within
conditions 1~4 in the following table system. These include:
the front passenger seat cushion.
and activates or deactivates the front (1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
• Electronic system to determine passenger air bag based on these tion.
whether the front passenger air conditions.
bag system should be activated or (2) Leaning against the door or
Always be sure that you and all vehi- center console.
deactivated.
cle occupants are seated and
• An indicator light located on the restrained properly (sitting upright (3) Sitting towards the sides or the
instrument panel which illuminates with the seat in an upright position, front of the seat.
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG centered on the seat cushion, with (4) Putting legs on the dashboard
"OFF" indicating the front passen- the person's legs comfortably or resting them on other loca-
ger air bag system is deactivated. extended, feet on the floor, and wear- tions which reduce the passen-
• The instrument panel air bag indi- ing the safety belt properly) for the ger weight on the front seat.
cator light is interconnected with most effective protection by the air (5) Improperly wearing the safety
the occupant classification system. bag and the safety belt. belt.
If the front passenger seat is occupied (6) Reclining the seat back.
by a person that the system deter- (7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski
mines to be of adult size, and he/she wear or hip protection wear.
sits properly (sitting upright with the
seatback in an upright position, cen- (8) Put on the seat an additional
tered on the seat cushion with their thick cushion.
seat belt on, legs comfortably extend-
ed and their feet on the floor), the
PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indica-
tor will be turned off and the front pas-
senger's air bag will be able to inflate,
if necessary, in frontal crashes.
3 57
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification

system WARNING - OCS system
Riding in an improper position
Indicator/Warning light Devices
adversely affects the occupant
Condition detected by the PASSENGER AIR classification system (OCS) and
occupant classification system SRS Front passenger
BAG “OFF”
warning light air bag may result in the deactivation of
indicator light front passenger air bag. It is
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2 Off Off Activated important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
2. Infant or child restraint system proper seating instructions as
On Off Deactivated
with 12 months old*3 *4 contained in this manual.
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated (Continued)
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
* The system judges a person of adult

1
* Never install a child restraint system on
3
size as an adult. When a smaller adult the front passenger seat.

sits in the front passenger seat, the *4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"
system may recognize him/her as a indicator may turn on or off when a
child depending on his/her physique child above 12 months to 12 years old
and posture. (with or without child restraint system)
* Do not allow children to ride in the front
2
sits in the front passenger seat. This is
passenger seat. When a larger child a normal condition.
who has outgrown a child restraint sys-
tem sits in the front passenger seat,
the system may recognize him/her as
an adult depending upon his/her
physique or sitting position.
3 58
(Continued)
OVQ036013N 1KMN3663 1KMN3665

- Never put a heavy load, an - Never sit with hips shifted - Never place feet on the dash-
active electronic device or towards the front of the seat. board.
blanket in the front passenger
seat or seatback pocket.
OHG031073A 1KMN3662 1KMN3664

- Never sit on the front passen- - Never excessively recline the - Never lean on the door or cen-
ger seat with anything attached front passenger seatback. ter console.
such as a blanket or cushion. - Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
3 59
Proper position If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" ✽ NOTICE

indicator is still on, ask the passen- The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF"
ger to move to the rear seat. indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
WARNING - AIR BAG turned to the ON position or after the
"OFF" light engine is started. If the front passen-
ger seat is occupied, the occupant
Do not allow an adult passenger classification sensor will then classify
to ride in the front seat when the the front passenger after several
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” more seconds.
indicator is illuminated, because
B990A01O the air bag will not deploy in the
When an adult is seated in the front
event of a crash.The driver must WARNING
instruct the passenger to repo- Do not hang onto the front pas-
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER sition himself in the seat. Failure
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn senger seat. Do not hang any
to properly position yourself items, such as a seatback table
the ignition switch to the LOCK or may lead to air bag deactivation
OFF position and ask the passenger or entertainment system, on the
resulting in air bag non-deploy- front passenger seatback. Do
to sit properly (sitting upright with the ment in a collision. If the PAS-
seat back in an upright position, cen- not place feet on the front pas-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica- senger seatback. Do not place
tered on the seat cushion with their tor remains illuminated after the
seat belt on, legs comfortably any items under the front pas-
passenger repositions them- senger seat. Any of these could
extended and their feet on the floor). selves properly and the vehicle
Restart the engine and have the per- interfere with proper sensor
is restarted, it is recommended operation.
son remain in that position. This will the passenger move to the rear
allow the system to detect the person seat because the passenger's
and to enable the passenger air bag. front air bag will not deploy.
3 60
WARNING (Continued) (Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is • If the PASSENGER AIR BAG • Do not use accessory seat
equipped with the occupant "OFF" indicator is illuminated covers on the front seats.
classification system, never when the front passenger's • Accident statistics show that
install a child restraint system seat is occupied by an adult children are safer if they are
in the front passenger's seat. and he/she sits properly (sit- restrained in the rear, as
A deploying air bag can force- ting upright with the seatback opposed to the front seat. It is
fully strike a child resulting in in an upright position, cen- recommended that child
serious injuries or death. Any tered on the seat cushion with restraints be secured in a rear
child age 12 and under should their seat belt on, legs com- seat, including an infant riding
ride in the rear seat. Children fortably extended and their in a rear-facing infant seat, a
too large for child restraints feet on the floor), have that child riding in a forward-fac-
should use the available person sit in the rear seat. ing child seat and an older
lap/shoulder belts. No matter • Do not modify or replace the child riding in a booster seat.
what type of crash, children of front passenger seat. Don't • Air bags can only be used
all ages are safer when place anything on or attach once – have an authorized
restrained in the rear seat. anything such as a blanket or HYUNDAI dealer replace the
• The occupant classification seat heater to the front pas- air bag immediately after
system may not work properly senger seat. This can adverse- deployment.
if water, coffee or any other ly affect the occupant classifi-
cation system. (Continued)
liquid on the front passenger
seat. Keep the front seat dry • Do not sit on sharp objects
at all times. such as tools when occupying
(Continued) the front passenger seat. This
can adversely affect the occu-
pant classification system.
(Continued)
3 61
(Continued) Driver's and passenger's front

WARNING air bag
• A smaller-stature adult in the If the occupant classification
front passenger’ seat who is ■ Driver’s front air bag
system is not working properly,
not seated correctly (for exam- the SRS air bag warning light
ple: seat excessively reclined, on the instrument panel will illu-
leaning on the door or center minate because the passenger's
console, or hips shifted for- front air bag is connected with
ward in the seat) can cause a the occupant classification sys-
condition where the occupant tem. If there is a malfunction of
classification system senses the occupant classification sys-
less weight than if the occu- tem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
pant were seated properly (sit- "OFF" indicator will not illumi- ■ Driver’s knee air bag
ting upright with the seatback nate and the passenger's front
in an upright position, cen- air bag will inflate in frontal
tered on the seat cushion with impact crashes even if there is
their seat belt on, legs com- no occupant in the front passen-
fortably extended and their ger's seat. If the SRS air bag
feet on the floor). warning light does not illumi-
This condition can result in an nate when the ignition switch is
adult potentially being mis- turned to the ON position,
classified as a child and illu- remains illuminated after ■ Passenger’s front air bag
mination of the PASSENGER approximately 6 seconds or
AIR BAG "OFF" indicator. blinks when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position, or if
it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the occupant classification sys-
tem and the SRS air bag system
as soon as possible. ODM032040/ODM032041/ODM032042
3 62
Your vehicle is equipped with a The seat belt buckle sensors deter- Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) mine if the driver and front passen- with an occupant classification sys-
System and the lap/shoulder belts at ger's seat belts are fastened. These tem in the front passenger's seat.
both the driver and passenger seat- sensors provide the ability to control The occupant classification system
ing positions. the SRS deployment based on detects the presence of a passenger
The front air bags are designed to whether or not the seat belts are fas- in the front passenger's seat and will
supplement the three-point seat tened, and how severe the impact is. turn off the front passenger's air bag
belts. For these air bags to provide under certain conditions. For more
protection, the seat belts must be detail, see "Occupant classification
The advanced SRS offers the ability system" in this section.
worn at all times when driving. to control the air bag inflation within
The indications of the system's pres- two levels. A first stage level is pro-
ence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" vided for moderate-severity impacts.
embossed on the air bag pad cover A second stage level is provided for
in the steering wheel, on the knee more severe impacts.
bolster below the steering wheel col-
umn and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box. According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
The SRS consists of air bags Control Module) controls the air bag
installed under the pad covers in the inflation. Failure to properly wear
center of the steering wheel , in the seat belts can increase the risk or
knee bolster below the steering severity of injury in an accident.
wheel column and the passenger's
side front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity.
3 63
✽ NOTICE
WARNING • Be sure to read information about WARNING
Do not place any objects under- the SRS on the labels provided on Always use seat belts and child
neath the front seats as they the sun visor. restraints – every trip, every
could interfere with the occu- • Advanced air bags are combined time, everyone! Air bags inflate
pant classification system. with pre-tensioner seat belts to with considerable force and in
help provide enhanced occupant the blink of an eye. Seat belts
protection in frontal crashes. help keep occupants in proper
WARNING Front air bags are not intended to position to obtain maximum
deploy in collisions in which pro- benefit from the air bag. Even
If you are considering modifica- tection can be provided by the pre- with advanced air bags, improp-
tion of your vehicle due to a dis- tensioner seat belt. erly and unbelted occupants
ability, please contact the can be severely injured when
Hyundai Customer Assistance the air bag inflates.
Center at 1-800-633-5151.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual. To reduce the chance of
serious or fatal injuries and
receive the maximum safety ben-
efit from your restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child
or booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children
in the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age
to ride.
(Continued)
3 64
(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)

• Front and side air bags can • No objects should be placed • If the SRS air bag warning
injure occupants improperly over or near the air bag mod- light remains illuminated while
positioned in the front seats. ules on the steering wheel, the vehicle is being driven,
• Move your seat as far back as instrument panel, and the have an authorized HYUNDAI
practical from the front air front passenger's panel above dealer inspect the air bag sys-
bags, while still maintaining the glove box, because any tem as soon as possible.
control of the vehicle. such object could cause harm • Air bags can only be used once
if the vehicle is in a crash – have an authorized HYUNDAI
• You and your passengers severe enough to cause the
should never sit or lean unnec- dealer replace the air bag
air bags to deploy. immediately after deployment.
essarily close to the air bags.
Improperly positioned driver • Never place covers, blankets • The SRS is designed to deploy
and passengers can be severe- or seat warmers on the pas- the front air bags only when
ly injured by inflating air bags. senger seat as these may frontal impact is sufficiently
interfere with the occupant severe and when the impact
• Never lean against the door or classification system.
center console – always sit in angle is toward from the for-
an upright position. • Do not tamper with or discon- ward longitudinal axis of the
nect SRS wiring or other com- vehicle. Additionally, the air
• Do not allow a passenger to ponents of the SRS system. bags will only deploy once.
ride in the front seat when the Doing so could result in injury, Seat belts must be worn at all
PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" due to accidental deployment times.
indicator is illuminated, of the air bags or by rendering
because the air bag will not • Front air bags are not intended
the SRS inoperative. to deploy in side-impact, rear-
deploy in the event of a mod-
erate or severe frontal crash. (Continued) impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
(Continued) deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
3 65

• Even though your vehicle is • For maximum safety protec- • The SRS air bag system must
equipped with the occupant tion in all types of crashes, all deploy very rapidly to provide
classification system, do not occupants including the driver protection in a crash. If an
install a child restraint system should always wear their seat occupant is out of position
in the front passenger seat belts whether or not an air bag because of not wearing a seat
position. A child restraint sys- is also provided at their seatbelt, the air bag may forcefully
tem must never be placed in ing position to minimize the contact the occupant causing
the front seat. The infant or risk of severe injury or death serious or fatal injuries.
child could be severely injured in the event of a crash. Do not
or killed by an air bag deploy- sit or lean unnecessarily close
ment in case of an accident. to the air bag while the vehicle
• Children age 12 and under is in motion.
must always be properly • Sitting improperly or out of
restrained in the rear seat. position can result in serious
Never allow children to ride in or fatal injury in a crash. All
the front passenger seat. If a occupants should sit upright
child over 12 must be seated with the seatback in an
in the front seat, he or she upright position, centered on
must be properly belted and the seat cushion with their
the seat should be moved as seat belt on, legs comfortably
far back as possible. extended and their feet on the
(Continued) floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
(Continued)
3 66
Side impact air bag The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy only during cer- WARNING
tain side-impact collisions, depend- • The side impact air bag is sup-
ing on the crash severity, angle, plemental to the driver's and
speed and point of impact. The side the passenger's seat belt sys-
impact air bags are not designed to tems and is not a substitute
deploy in all side impact situations or for them. Therefore your seat
rollover situations. belts must be worn at all times
The side impact air bags do not only while the vehicle is in motion.
deploy on the side of the impact but The air bags deploy only in
ODM032043 also on the opposite side. certain side impact conditions
The side and/or curtain air bags on severe enough to cause sig-
both sides of the vehicle may deploy nificant injury to the vehicle
if a rollover or possible rollover is occupants.
detected. • For best protection from the
side impact air bag system
WARNING and to avoid being injured by
the deploying side impact air
Do not allow the passengers to bag, both front seat occupants
lean their heads or bodies onto should sit in an upright posi-
OHM032071 doors, put their arms on the tion with the seat belt properly
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ doors, stretch their arms out of fastened. The driver's hands
from the illustration. the window, or place objects should be placed on the steer-
between the doors and passen- ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
Your vehicle is equipped with a side gers when they are seated on positions. The passenger's
impact air bag in each front seat. The seats equipped with side and/or arms and hands should be
purpose of the air bag is to provide the curtain air bags. placed on their laps.
vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-
senger with additional protection than (Continued)
that offered by the seat belt alone.
3 67
(Continued) (Continued) Curtain air bag

• Do not use any accessory • If the seat or seat cover is
seat covers. damaged, have the vehicle
• Use of seat covers could checked and repaired by an
reduce or prevent the effec- authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tiveness of the system. because your vehicle is
equipped with side impact air
• Do not install any accessories bags and an occupant classi-
on the side or near the side air fication system.
bag.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air OANNSA2036
bag and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between
the front door and the front
seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if the supple-
mental side air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag OHM032072
that may result in personal
injury, avoid impact to the side ❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
impact sensor when the igni-
tion switch is on.
Curtain air bags are located along
(Continued) both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
3 68
They are designed to help protect

WARNING (Continued)
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject- • In order for side and curtain • Do not allow the passengers
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a air bags to provide the best to lean their heads or bodies
rollover, especially when the seat- protection, front seat occu- onto doors, put their arms on
belts are also in use. pants and outboard rear occu- the doors, stretch their arms
pants should sit in an upright out of the window, or place
• The curtain air bags are designed
position with the seat belts objects between the doors
to deploy during certain side
properly fastened. and passengers when they are
impact collisions, depending on the
seated on seats equipped with
crash severity, angle, speed and Importantly, children should side and/or curtain air bags.
point of impact. sit in a proper child restraint
system in the rear seat. • Never try to open or repair any
• The curtain air bags do not only
components of the side cur-
deploy on the side of the impact • When children are seated in tain air bag system. This
but also on the opposite side. the rear outboard seats, they should only be done by an
• Also, the curtain air bags on both must be seated in the proper authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
sides of the vehicle will deploy in child restraint system. Make
certain rollover situations. sure to put the child restraint Failure to follow the above
system as far away from the instructions can result in injury
• The curtain air bags are not or death to the vehicle occu-
designed to deploy in all side door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint sys- pants in an accident.
impact or rollover situations.
tem in a locked position.
(Continued)
3 69
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a Air bag collision sensors

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
1 2 3 4
ONCESA2105/OANNSA2037/ONCDSA3123/OANNSA2038/ODM032048
(1) SRS control module / (3) Side impact sensor

Rollover sensor (4) Side impact sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
3 70
• Problems may arise if the sensor Air bag inflation conditions

WARNING - Air bag installation angles are changed
sensors due to the deformation of the front
• Do not hit or allow any objects bumper, body or C pillars or front
to impact the locations where door where side collision sensors
air bags or sensors are are installed. Have the vehicle
installed. checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which • Your vehicle has been designed to
could result in serious per- absorb impact and deploy the air
sonal injury or death. bag(s) in certain collisions. Installing
bumper guards or side steppers or
• If the installation location or replacing a bumper with non-gen-
angle of the sensors is altered uine parts may adversely affect your 1VQA2084
in any way, the air bags may vehicle’s collision and air bag Front air bags
deploy when they should not deployment performance.
or they may not deploy when Front air bags are designed to inflate
they should, causing severe in a frontal collision depending on
injury or death. the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3 71
Side impact and curtain air bags Side air bag and/or curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are may also inflate where rollover sen-
designed to inflate when an impact is sors indicate the possibility of a
detected by side collision sensors rollover occurring (even if none actual-
depending on the strength, speed or ly occurs) or in other situations, inclu-
angles of impact resulting from a iding when the vehicle is tilted while
side impact collision. being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
Also, the side impact and curtain air
impact protection in a rollover, howev-
bags are designed to inflate when a
er, they will deploy to prevent ejection
rollover is detected by the rollover
OVQ036018N of occupants, especially those who
sensor.
are restrained with seat belts.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
front, knee and front passenger’s air
bumps or objects on unimproved
bags) are designed to inflate in frontal
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
collisions, they also may inflate in
carefully on unimproved roads or on
other types of collisions if the front
surfaces not designed for vehicle traf-
impact sensors detect a sufficient
fic to prevent unintended air bag
frontal force in another type of impact.
deployment.
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in certain side
OHM032072 impact collisions. They may inflate in
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif- other type of collisions where a side
fer from the illustration. force is detected by the sensors.
3 72
Air bag non-inflation conditions
OUN036087 OVQ036018N
1VQA2086 • Air bags are not designed to inflate • Front air bags may not inflate in
in rear collisions, because occu- side impact collisions, because
• In certain low-speed collisions the pants are moved backward by the occupants move to the direction of
air bags may not deploy. The air force of the impact. In this case, the collision, and thus in side
bags are designed not to deploy in inflated air bags would not be able impacts, frontal air bag deployment
such cases because they may not to provide any additional benefit. would not provide additional occu-
provide benefits beyond the pro- pant protection.
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions. However, side impact and curtain
air bags may inflate depending on
the intensity, vehicle speed and
angles of impact.
3 73
1VQA2089 1VQA2090 1VQA2091

• In an angled collision, the force of • Just before impact, drivers often • Front air bags may not inflate in
impact may direct the occupants in brake heavily. Such heavy braking rollover accidents where the SRSCM
a direction where the air bags would lowers the front portion of the vehi- indicates that the SRSCM indicates
not be able to provide any addition- cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi- that the front air bag deployment
al benefit, and thus the SRS may cle with a higher ground clearance. would not provide additional occu-
not deploy any air bags. Air bags may not inflate in this pant protection.
"under-ride" situation because
forces that are detected by sensors
may be reduced by such “under-
ride” collisions.
3 74
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
WARNING
free and so there are no parts you can • Modification to SRS compo-
safely service by yourself. If the SRS nents or wiring, including the
air bag warning light " " does not addition of any kind of badges
illuminate, when you turn the ignition to the pad covers or modifica-
on, or continuously remains on, or tions to the body structure,
continuously blinks have your vehicle can adversely affect SRS per-
immediately inspected by an author- formance and lead to possible
ized HYUNDAI dealer. injury.
• Not only the modification of
1VQA2092 the parts where the SRS sen-
Any work on the SRS system, such
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi- sors are but also the modifica-
as removing, installing, repairing, or
cle collides with objects such as util- tion of other parts of the vehi-
any work on the steering wheel, the
ity poles or trees. cle may affect the SRS per-
front passenger's panel, front seats
formance and lead to possible
and roof rails must be performed by
injury.
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system • No objects should be placed
may result in serious personal injury. over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the
To clean the air bag pad covers, use front passenger's panel above
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has the glove box, because any
been moistened with plain water. such object could cause harm
Solvents or cleaners could adversely if the vehicle is in a crash
affect the air bag covers and proper severe enough to cause the
deployment of the system. air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
3 75
Additional safety precautions • Passengers should not place

(Continued) hard or sharp objects between
• If the air bags inflate, they • Never let passengers ride in the themselves and the air bags.
must be replaced by an cargo area or on top of a folded- Carrying hard or sharp objects on
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. down back seat. All occupants your lap or in your mouth can result
should sit upright, fully back in their in injuries if an air bag inflates.
• Do not tamper with or discon- seats with their seat belts on and
nect SRS wiring, or other their feet on the floor. • Keep occupants away from the air
components of the SRS sys- bag covers. All occupants should sit
tem. Doing so could result in • Passengers should not move upright, fully back in their seats with
injury, due to accidental infla- out of or change seats while the their seat belts on and their feet on
tion of the air bags or by ren- vehicle is moving. A passenger the floor. If occupants are too close
dering the SRS inoperative. who is not wearing a seat belt dur- to the air bag covers, they could be
ing a crash or emergency stop can injured if the air bags inflate.
• If your car was flooded and be thrown against the inside of the
has soaked carpeting or water • Do not attach or place objects
vehicle, against other occupants, on or near the air bag covers.
on the flooring, you shouldn't or out of the vehicle.
try to start the engine; have Any object attached to or placed
the car towed to an authorized • Each seat belt is designed to on the front or side air bag covers
HYUNDAI dealer. restrain one occupant. If more could interfere with the proper
than one person uses the same operation of the air bags.
seat belt, they could be seriously • Do not modify the front seats.
If components of the air bag system injured or killed in a collision. Modification of the front seats could
must be discarded, or if the vehicle • Do not use any accessories on interfere with the operation of the
must be scrapped, certain safety seat belts. Devices claiming to supplemental restraint system sens-
precautions must be observed. An improve occupant comfort or repo- ing components or side air bags.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer knows sition the seat belt can reduce the • Do not place items under the
these precautions and can give you protection provided by the seat belt front seats. Placing items under
the necessary information. Failure to and increase the chance of serious the front seats could interfere with
follow these precautions and proce- injury in a crash. the operation of the supplemental
dures could increase the risk of per- restraint system sensing compo-
sonal injury. nents and wiring harnesses.
3 76
• Never hold an infant or child on Air bag warning label

(Continued)
your lap. The infant or child could
be seriously injured or killed in the • Always have the ignition OFF
event of a crash. All infants and chil- when the vehicle is being
dren should be properly restrained towed or where it may other-
in appropriate child safety seats or wise be tilted, since the side
seat belts in the rear seat. and/or curtain air bags may
inflate if the sensors interpret
those tilt angles as a potential
WARNING rollover.
• Sitting improperly or out of • Be careful not to cause impact OANNSA2006
position can cause occupants to the doors when the ignition
to be shifted too close to a is ON.The air bags may inflate.
deploying air bag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle resulting in
serious injury or death.
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
• Always sit upright with the vehicle
seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat If you modify your vehicle by chang-
cushion with your seat belt ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys- ODM032057
on, legs comfortably extended tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the oper- Air bag warning labels, some required
and your feet on the floor. by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
(Continued) tem. Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to alert the driver and pas-
sengers of potential risks of the air
bag system.
3 77
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Smart tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 • Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 • Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 • Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 • Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 • Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 • Emergency fuel filler lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 4
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 • Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 • Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 • Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 • Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 • Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 • Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• From outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
• From inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 • Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 • Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 • Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 • Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Non-Powered tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 • Driver selectable steering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 • Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Blue Link® center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 • Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 • Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Blind zone mirror (BZM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 • Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 • Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 • Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
4 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 • Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 • High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 • Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 • Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Turn By Turn Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 • Windshield wipers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 • Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 • Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 • Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 • Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Warning and indicator sights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 • Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 • Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 • Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 • Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 • Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 • Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 • Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 • AC inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 • Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125 • Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126 • Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• 3rd row climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131 • Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132 • Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157 4
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134 • Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135 Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-137 • Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• 3rd row climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143 • Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-144 • Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Multi box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
FOLDING KEY
Record your key number Key operations
The key code number
WARNING
is stamped on the key Use only HYUNDAI original
code tag attached to parts for the ignition key in your
the key set. Should vehicle. If an aftermarket key is
you lose your keys, used, the ignition switch may
this number will not return to ON after START. If
enable an authorized HYUNDAI deal- this happens, the starter will
er to duplicate the keys easily. continue to operate causing
Remove the key code tag and store it damage to the starter motor
in a safe place. Also, record the key and possible fire due to exces-
code number and keep it in a safe and sive current in the wiring.
handy place, but not in the vehicle. OVF041001
• Used to start the engine.

• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
4 4
Door Lock (1) Door Unlock (2)

WARNING - Ignition key 1. Press the unlock button(2).
Leaving children unattended in 2. The driver's door will unlock. The
a vehicle with the ignition key hazard warning lights will blink two
is dangerous even if the key is times.
not in the ignition switch is ACC
or ON position. Children copy 3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
adults and they could place the within 4 seconds and all doors and
key in the ignition switch. tailgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
The ignition key would enable
children to operate power win-
dows or other controls, or even ✽ NOTICE
make the vehicle move, which OVF041003 You can activate or deactivate the
could result in serious bodily Two Turn Unlock and Horn
injury or even death. Never 1. Close all doors, engine hood and Feedback function. Refer to "User
leave the keys in your vehicle tailgate. settings" in this section.
with unsupervised children, 2. Press the lock button(1).
when the engine is running. 3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once (Horn
Feedback function).
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
4 5
Tailgate unlock (3) Transmitter precautions (Continued)

The tailgate is unlocked if the button ✽ NOTICE • If the transmitter is in close prox-
is pressed for more than 1 second. imity to your mobile phone, the
The transmitter will not work if any signal could be blocked by your
Also, once the tailgate is opened and of following occur: mobile phones normal operational
then closed, the tailgate will be • The ignition key is in the ignition signals. This is especially impor-
locked automatically. switch. tant when the phone is active such
• You exceed the operating distance as making and receiving calls, text
Panic (4) limit (about 90 feet [30 m]). messaging, and/or sending/receiv-
• The battery in the transmitter is ing emails. Avoid placing the
The horn sounds and hazard warn- weak.
ing lights flash for about 30 seconds transmitter and your mobile
• Other vehicles or objects may be phone in the same pants or jacket
if this button is pressed for more than blocking the signal.
1 second. To stop the horn and lights, pocket and always try to maintain
• The weather is extremely cold. an adequate distance between the
press any button on the transmitter. • The transmitter is close to a radio two devices.
transmitter such as a radio substa-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the CAUTION
transmitter. Keep the transmitter away from
When the transmitter does not work water or any liquid. If the key-
correctly, open and close the door less entry system is inoperative
with the ignition key. If you have a due to exposure to water or liq-
problem with the transmitter, contact uids, it will not be covered by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. your manufacturer’s vehicle
(Continued) warranty.
4 6
Battery replacement For replacement transmitters, see an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for CAUTION - Transmitter
transmitter reprogramming. damage
• The transmitter is designed to give Do not drop, wet or expose the
you years of trouble-free use, how- keyless entry system transmit-
ever it can malfunction if exposed to ter to heat or sunlight.
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
OLM042302
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
battery which will normally last for to heat or sunlight.
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce- • An inappropriately dis-
dure. posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and may cause human health.
gently pry open the transmitter Dispose the battery accord-
center cover. ing to your local law(s) or
2. Replace the battery with a new regulation.
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
4 7
Immobilizer system To activate the immobilizer sys- ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) tem: When starting the engine, do not use
Your vehicle is equipped with an Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- the key with other immobilizer keys
electronic engine immobilizer system tion. The immobilizer system acti- around. Otherwise the engine may
to reduce the risk of unauthorized vates automatically. Without a valid not start or may stop soon after it
vehicle use. ignition key for your vehicle, the starts. Keep each key separate in
Your immobilizer system is com- engine will not start. order to avoid a starting malfunction.
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices To deactivate the immobilizer CAUTION
inside the vehicle. system: Do not put metal accessories
With the immobilizer system, when- Insert the ignition key into the key near the ignition switch.
ever you insert your ignition key into cylinder and turn it to the ON position. Metal accessories may interrupt
the ignition switch and turn it to ON, the transponder signal and may
it checks and determines and verifies prevent the engine from being
if the ignition key is valid. WARNING started.
If the key is determined to be valid, In order to prevent theft of your
the engine will start. vehicle, do not leave spare keys
If the key is determined to be invalid, anywhere in your vehicle. Your ✽ NOTICE
the engine will not start. Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and If you need additional keys or lose
should be kept confidential. Do your keys, contact an authorized
not leave this number anywhere HYUNDAI dealer.
in your vehicle.
4 8
This device complies with Part 15

CAUTION of the FCC rules.
The transponder in your ignition Operation is subject to the following
key is an important part of the two conditions:
immobilizer system. It is 1. This device may not cause harm-
designed to give years of trou- ful interference, and
ble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois- 2. This device must accept any inter-
ture, static electricity and rough ference received, including inter-
handling. Immobilizer system ference that may cause undesired
malfunction could occur. operation.
CAUTION
CAUTION Changes or modifications not
Do not change, alter or adjust expressly approved by the party
the immobilizer system because responsible for compliance
it could cause the immobilizer could void the user’s authority
system to malfunction and to operate the equipment. If the
should only be serviced by an keyless entry system is inopera-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. tive due to changes or modifica-
Malfunctions caused by improp- tions not approved by the party
er alterations, adjustments or responsible for compliance, it
modifications to the immobilizer will not be covered by your man-
system are not covered by your ufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
4 9
SMART KEY
Record your key number Smart key function With a smart key, you can lock or
The key code number unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start
is stamped on the key the engine.
code tag attached to Refer to the following for more details.
the key set. Should
you lose your keys, WARNING - Smart key
this number will Leaving children unattended in
enable an authorized HYUNDAI deal- a vehicle with the smart key is
er to duplicate the keys easily. dangerous even if the Engine
Remove the key code tag and store it Start/Stop Button is in the ACC
in a safe place. Also, record the key or ON position. Children copy
code number and keep it in a safe and adults and they could press the
handy place, but not in the vehicle. ODM042002 Engine Start/Stop Button.
To remove the mechanical key, press The smart key would enable
and hold the release button(1) and children to operate power win-
remove the mechanical key (2). dows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
To reinstall the mechanical key, put could result in serious bodily
the key into the hole and push it until injury or even death. Never
a click sound is heard. leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children,
when the Engine is running.
4 10
Door Lock 3. Press the button of the outside Using the button on the smart key
door handle. 1 Close all doors, engine hood and
4. The hazard warning lights will blink tailgate.
and the chime will sound once. 2. Press the lock button(1).
5. Make sure that doors are locked 3. The hazard warning lights will blink
by pulling the outside door handle. and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
✽ NOTICE by pulling the outside door handle.
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
OVF041004 (0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door is open.
ODM042006
Using the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
4 11
Unlocking ✽ NOTICE Using the button on the smart key

Using the door handle button • The button will only operate when 1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
1. Carry the smart key. the smart key is within 28~40in. smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's (0.7~1m) from the outside door 2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
outside door handle. handle. hazard warning lights will blink and
• When the smart key is recognized the chime will sound two times.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The in the area of 28~40in. (0.7~1m)
hazard warning lights will blink and 3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
from the front outside door han- within 4 seconds and all doors and
the chime will sound two times. dle, other people can also unlock the tailgate will unlock. The hazard
4. Press the button twice within 4 the doors by pressing the button of warning lights will blink and the
seconds and all doors and the tail- the front outside door handle. chime will sound two times.
gate will unlock and the hazard • After unlocking the driver’s door
warning lights will blink and the or all doors, the door(s) will lock
chime will sound two times. automatically unless the door is ✽ NOTICE
opened. After pressing the button, the doors
❈ If you press the button of the front will lock automatically unless any
passenger’s outside door handle door is opened within 30 seconds.
while carrying the smart key, all
doors will unlock. ✽ NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this section.
4 12
Tailgate unlocking Panic Loss of the smart key

Using the tailgate handle button 1. Press the panic button(4) for more A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
1. Carry the smart key. than 1 second. registered to a single vehicle.
2. Press the tailgate handle button. 2. The horn sounds and hazard If you happen to lose your smart key,
3. When all doors are locked, the warning light flash for about 30 you will not be able to start the
hazard warning lights will blink two seconds. engine. You should immediately take
times. the vehicle and remaining key to your
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
✽ NOTICE authorized HYUNDAI dealer(tow the
vehicle, if necessary) to protect it
automatically. To stop the horn and lights, press from potential theft.
any button on the smart key.
✽ NOTICE
Start-up
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in. You can start the engine without
(0.7~1m) from the tailgate handle. inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the “Engine start/stop
Using the button on the smart key button” in section 5.
1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
4 13
Smart key precautions • If the smart key is in close proximi- Smart key immobilizer system
• The smart key will not work if any ty to your cell phone or smart Your vehicle is equipped with an
of the following occur: phone, the signal from the smart electronic engine immobilizer system
key could be blocked by normal to reduce the risk of unauthorized
- The smart key is close to a radio operation of your cell phone or
transmitter such as a radio sta- vehicle use.
smart phone. This is especially
tion or an airport which can inter- important when the phone is active Your immobilizer system is com-
fere with normal operation of the such as making a call, receiving prised of a small transponder in the
smart key. calls, text messaging, and/or send- smart key and electronic devices
- The smart key is near a mobile ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing inside the vehicle.
two way radio system or a cellu- the smart key and your cell phone With the immobilizer system, when-
lar phone. or smart phone in the same pants ever you turn the engine start/stop
- Another vehicle’s smart key is or jacket pocket and maintain ade- button to the ON position by pressing
being operated close to your quate distance between the two the button while carrying the smart
vehicle. devices. key, it checks and determines and
verifies if the smart key is valid or not.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door CAUTION If the key is determined to be valid,
with the mechanical key and contact Keep the smart key away from the engine will start.
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. water or any liquid. If the key- If the key is determined to be invalid,
less entry system is inoperative the engine will not start.
due to exposure to water or
other liquids, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
4 14
To deactivate the immobilizer ✽ NOTICE

system: CAUTION
When starting the engine, do not use
Turn the engine start/stop button to the key with other immobilizer keys The transponder in your smart
the ON position by pressing the but- around. Otherwise the engine may key is an important part of the
ton while carrying the smart key. not start or may stop soon after it immobilizer system. It is
starts. Keep each key separate in designed to give years of trou-
order to avoid a starting malfunction. ble-free service, however you
To activate the immobilizer system: should avoid exposure to mois-
Turn the engine start/stop button to ture, static electricity and rough
the OFF position. The immobilizer CAUTION handling. Immobilizer system
system activates automatically. Do not put metal accessories malfunction could occur.
Without a valid smart key for your near the smart key.
vehicle, the engine will not start. The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may inter- CAUTION
CAUTION rupt the transponder signal from Do not change, alter or adjust
In order to prevent theft of your transmitting normally. the immobilizer system because
vehicle, do not leave spare keys it could cause the immobilizer
anywhere in your vehicle. Your ✽ NOTICE system to malfunction and
Immobilizer password is a cus- should only be serviced by an
tomer unique password and If you need additional keys or lose authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
should be kept confidential. Do your keys, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Malfunctions caused by improp-
not leave this number anywhere er alterations, adjustments or
in your vehicle. modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
4 15
This device complies with Part 15 Battery replacement 4. Install the battery in the reverse
of the FCC rules. order of removal.
Operation is subject to the following • The smart key is designed to give
two conditions: you years of trouble-free use, how-
1. This device may not cause harm- ever it can malfunction if exposed
ful interference, and to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
2. This device must accept any inter- replace the battery, contact an
ference received, including inter- authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ference that may cause undesired
operation. • Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
WARNING • To avoid damaging the smart key,
OHG040009
Changes or modifications not don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
expressly approved by the party A smart key battery should last for to heat or sunlight.
responsible for compliance several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing • An inappropriately dis-
could void the user’s authority posed battery can be harm-
to operate the equipment. If the the battery with a new one. If you are
ful to the environment and
keyless entry system is inoper- unsure how to use your smart key or human health. Dispose the
ative due to changes or modifi- replace the battery, contact an battery according to your
cations not expressly approved authorized HYUNDAI dealer. local law(s) or regulation.
by the party responsible for 1. Remove the mechanical key.
compliance, it will not be cov- 2. Pry open the rear cover.
ered by your manufacturer’s CAUTION - Smart key
vehicle warranty. 3. Replace the battery with a new damage
battery (CR2032). When replacing Do not drop, get wet or expose
the battery, make sure the battery the smart key to heat or sun-
position. light, or it will be damaged.
4 16
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed stage • Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
Using the smart key (if equipped)
After completion of the steps above,
Armed Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
stage the hazard warning lights and chime
Arm the system as described below.
will operate once to indicate that the
1. Turn off the engine. system is armed.
2. Make sure that all doors, the If any door, tailgate or engine hood
Disarmed Theft-alarm
engine hood and tailgate lid are remains open, the hazard warning
stage stage closed and latched. lights and chime won't operate and
3. • Lock the doors by pressing the the theft-alarm will not arm. After you
button of the front outside door close the tailgate and engine hood,
handle with the smart key in your the hazard warning lights blink once.
This system is designed to provide possession.
protection from unauthorized entry After completion of the steps above,
into the vehicle. This system is oper- the hazard warning lights and chime
ated in three stages: the first is the will operate once to indicate that the
"Armed" stage, the second is the system is armed.
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
If any door remains open, the doors
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
won't lock and the chime will sound
the system provides an audible
for 3 seconds. Close the door and try
alarm with blinking of the hazard
again to lock the doors.
warning lights.
If the tailgate hatch or the engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights and the chime won't
operate, and the theft alarm will not
arm. After you close the tailgate and
engine hood, the hazard warning
lights blink once.
4 17
Using the transmitter (if equipped) Using the mechanical key Do not arm the system until all
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Park the vehicle and stop the engine. passengers have left the vehicle. If
Arm the system as described below. Arm the system as described below. the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
1. Turn off the engine and remove 1. Turn off the engine and remove the alarm may be activated when
the ignition key from the ignition the key from the ignition switch(if the remaining passenger(s) leave
switch. equipped). the vehicle. If any door (or trunk)
2. Make sure that all doors, the 2. Make sure that all doors, the or engine hood is opened within
engine hood and tailgate are engine hood and tailgate are 30 seconds after the system
closed and latched. closed and latched. enters the armed stage, the sys-
3. Lock the doors by pressing the 3. Lock the doors by inserting the key tem is disarmed to prevent an
lock button on the transmitter. into the key hole on the front out- unnecessary alarm.
After completion of the steps above, side door handle and turning the
the hazard warning lights will blink key toward the rear of the vehicle.
once to indicate that the system is If any door, tailgate or engine hood
armed. remains open, the theft-alarm will not
If any door, tailgate or engine hood arm.
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won't operate and theft-alarm ✽ NOTICE
will not arm. After you close all doors,
tailgate and engine hood, the hazard If you lock or unlock the doors by
warning lights blink once. using the mechanical key, the haz-
ard warning light won't operate.
4 18
Theft-alarm stage Disarmed stage Using the transmitter (if equipped)

The alarm will be activated if any of Using the smart key (if equipped) The system will be disarmed when
the following occurs while the system the doors are unlocked by pressing
The system will be disarmed when
is armed. the unlock button on the transmitter.
the doors are unlocked by pressing
• A door is opened without using the the unlock button on the smart key or After unlocking the doors, the hazard
transmitter, smart key or mechanical pressing the lock/unlock button of the warning lights will blink twice to indi-
key. front outside door handle with the cate that the system is disarmed.
• The tailgate is opened without smart key in your possession. After unlocking the doors, if any door
using the transmitter or smart key. After unlocking the doors, the hazard is not opened within 30 seconds, the
• The engine hood is opened. warning lights and chime will operate system will be rearmed.
twice to indicate that the system is
The horn will sound and the hazard
disarmed. Using the mechanical key
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 30 seconds. The After unlocking the doors, if any door The system will be disarmed when
alarm will repeat once more unless is not opened within 30 seconds, the the doors are unlocked with the
the system is disarmed. To turn off system will be rearmed. mechanical key.
the system, unlock the doors with the
mechanical key or transmitter or
smart key. ✽ NOTICE
If you lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key, the haz-
ard warning light and chime sound
won't operate.
4 19
✽ NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
• If you lose your keys, contact your
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
4 20
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from Using the smart key (if equipped)
outside the vehicle
Using the folding key (if equipped)
OVF041004
ODM042006 • Doors can be locked and unlocked

by pressing the lock button(1) and
• Doors can be locked and unlocked unlock button(2) on the smart key.
OVF041003 pressing the button of the outside
door handle with the smart key in Once the doors are unlocked, they
• Doors can be locked and unlocked your possession. may be opened by pulling the door
by pressing the lock button(1) and handle. When closing the door, push
unlock button(2) on the folding key. the door by hand. Make sure that
Once the doors are unlocked, they doors are closed securely.
may be opened by pulling the door For more detailed information, refer
handle. When closing the door, push to “Smart key” in this section.
the door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Folding key" in this section.
4 21
Using the mechanical key in an 1. Unfold the folding key or remove the ✽ NOTICE
emergency situation mechanical key from the smart key. You can activate or deactivate the
■ Type A 2. Insert the key into the hole of the Tow Turn Unlock function. Refer to
outside door handle. Turn the key "User Settings" in this section.
toward the front of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock. WARNING
Lock • If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
✽ NOTICE
Unlock
again.
• In cold and wet climates, door • Be careful that someone's
locks and door mechanisms may body and hands are not
ODM042011
not work properly due to freezing trapped when closing the door.
■ Type B conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
Lock
lock switch, the system may stop
Unlock operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
ODMECO2035
If the smart key or folding key does

not operate normally, you can lock or
unlock the doors as follows:
4 22
Operating door locks from • If the inner door handle on either Central door lock switch
inside the vehicle front door is pulled when the door
■ Driver’s door
With the door lock button lock button is in the locked position,
the door will unlock and open.
• The front door cannot be locked if
the ignition key is in the ignition
switch and the door is open.
• The door cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
ODM042014
If a power door lock ever fails to func- ■ Passenger’s door
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following:
ODM042013 • Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
• To unlock a door, push the door
manual) while simultaneously
lock button(1) to the “Unlock” posi-
pulling on the door handle.
tion. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible. • Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button(1) to the “Lock” position. If • Lower a front window and use the
OANNCO43001
the door is locked properly, the red key to unlock the door from out-
mark (2) on the button will not be side. Operate by depressing the central
visible. door lock switch.
• To open a door, pull the door han- • When pushing down the lock switch
dle (3) outward. (1), all vehicle doors will lock.
4 23
• When pushing down the lock

release switch (2), all vehicle doors WARNING - Doors WARNING - Unlocked
will unlock. • The doors should always be vehicles
• If the key is in the ignition switch fully closed and locked while Leaving your vehicle unlocked
and front door is open, the doors the vehicle is in motion to pre- can invite theft or possible harm
will not lock even though the cen- vent accidental opening of the to you or others from someone
tral door lock switch (1) is pressed. door. Locked doors will also hiding in your vehicle while you
• If the smart key is in the vehicle discourage potential intruders are gone. Always remove the
and any door is open, the doors when the vehicle stops or ignition key, engage the parking
will not lock even though the cen- slows. brake, close all windows and
tral door lock switch (1) is pressed. • Be careful when opening lock all doors when leaving
doors and watch for vehicles, your vehicle unattended.
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door. WARNING - Unattended
Opening a door when some- children
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury. An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Furthermore,
children might operate features
of the vehicle that could injure
them, or they could encounter
other harm, possibly from some-
one gaining entry to the vehicle.
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
4 24
Impact sensing door unlock Child-protector rear door lock 3. Close the rear door.
system To open the rear door, pull the out-
All doors will be automatically side door handle (2).
unlocked if an impact or collision is Even though the doors are unlocked,
detected by the impact sensors while the rear door will not open by pulling
the ignition switch is ON. the inner door handle until the rear
However, the doors may not be door child safety lock is unlocked.
unlocked if mechanical problems
occur with the door lock system or
battery. WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
✽ NOTICE rear doors while the vehicle is
ONCNCO2015
You can select some auto door in motion, they could fall out of
lock/unlock features in “User The child safety lock is provided to the vehicle, resulting in severe
Settings” as follows; help prevent children from acciden- injury or death. To prevent chil-
• Speed sensing auto door lock tally opening the rear doors from dren from opening the rear
• Auto door unlock when the igni- inside the vehicle. The rear door doors from the inside, the rear
tion key is removed from the igni- safety locks should be used whenev- door safety locks should be
tion switch or engine is turned off. er children are in the vehicle. used whenever children are in
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting 1. Open the rear door. the vehicle.
the shift lever out of P(Park) or 2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
into P(Park). the hole (1) and turn it to the lock
For more information, refer to ( ) position. When the child safe-
“User Settings” in this section. ty lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
4 25
TAILGATE
Non-Powered tailgate ✽ NOTICE Closing the tailgate
Opening the tailgate In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward.
Make sure no objects or people
are near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the tailgate.
ONCNCO2003
ONCNCO2002
CAUTION
To close the tailgate, lower and push
Make certain that you close the
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked tailgate before driving your
that the tailgate is securely latched.
when all doors are locked or vehicle. Possible damage may
unlocked with the key, transmitter, occur to the tailgate lift cylin-
smart key or central door lock switch. ders and attached hardware if
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be the tailgate is not closed prior to
opened by pressing the handle driving.
switch and pulling the handle up.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the
tailgate unlock button on the trans-
mitter or smart key is pressed for
about 1 second, or the tailgate
handle button is pressed when the
smart key is detected.
4 26
Power tailgate (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE

WARNING - Exhaust The power tailgate operates when
fumes the automatic shift lever is in P
If you drive with the tailgate (Park).
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury WARNING
or death to vehicle occupants. Never leave children or animals
If you must drive with the tail- unattended in your vehicle.
gate opened, keep the air vents Children or animals might oper-
and all windows open so that ate the power tailgate that could
additional outside air comes ONCNCO2005
result in injury to themselves or
into the vehicle. others, or damage the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo WARNING

area Make sure there are no people
Occupants should never ride in or objects around the tailgate
the rear cargo area where no before operating the power tail-
restraints are available. To avoid gate. Wait until the tailgate is
injury in the event of an acci- opened fully and stopped before
dent or sudden stops, occu- ONCNCO2006
loading or unloading cargo or
pants should always be proper- passengers from the vehicle.
ly restrained. (1) Power tailgate handle switch
(2) Power tailgate close button
4 27
Opening the tailgate Closing the tailgate

CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
tailgate manually. This may
cause damage to the power tail-
gate. If it is necessary to close
or open the power tailgate man-
ually when the battery is dis-
charged or disconnected, do
not apply excessive force.
ONCNCO2005 ONCNCO2006
The power tailgate will open automat- 1. Press the power tailgate close but-
ically by doing one of the following: ton (approximately 1 second).
• Press the tailgate unlock button on 2. The tailgate will close and lock
the transmitter or smart key. automatically.
• Press the tailgate handle switch
carrying the smart key with you.
WARNING
The chime will sound and the
hazard warning flasher will blink
10 times if you drive with the
tailgate closed but not locked.
Stop your vehicle immediately
at a safe place and check if your
tailgate is securely locked.
4 28
Power tailgate non-opening con- ✽ NOTICE Automatic reversal

ditions • The power tailgate can be operat-
The power tailgate will not open or ed when the engine is not running.
close automatically, when the vehicle However the power tailgate opera-
is moving more than 2 mph (3 km/h). tion consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
WARNING do not operate it excessively e.g.:
The chime will sound continuous- more than approximately 10 times
ly if you drive over 2 mph (3 km/h) repeatedly.
with the tailgate opened. Stop • To prevent the battery from being
your vehicle immediately at a safe discharged, do not leave the power
place and check if your tailgate is tailgate in the open position for a
opened. ONCNCO2007
long lime.
• Do not modify or repair any part During power opening and closing if
of the power tailgate by yourself. the power tailgate is blocked by an
This must be done by an author- object or part of the body, the power
ized HYUNDAI dealer. tailgate will detect the resistance.
• When jacking up the vehicle to • If the resistance is detected while
change a tire or repair the vehicle, opening the tailgate, it will stop and
do not operate the power tailgate. move in the opposite direction.
This could cause the power tail- • If the resistance is detected while
gate to operate improperly. closing the tailgate, it will stop and
• In cold and wet climates, the move in the opposite direction.
power tailgate may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions. However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the tailgate is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and rever-
sal may not detect the resistance.
4 29
If the automatic reversal feature How to reset the power tailgate Power tailgate opening height
operates continuously more than If the battery has been discharged or user setting
twice during opening or closing disconnected, or if the related fuse has
operation, the power tailgate may been replaced or disconnected, for the
stop at that position. At this time, power tailgate to operate normally,
close the tailgate manually and oper- reset the power tailgate as follow:
ate the tailgate automatically again.
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Press the tailgate handle switch
WARNING and tailgate close button at the
Never intentionally place any same time for more than 3 sec-
object or part of your body in onds. (the chime will sound)
the path of the power tailgate to 3. Close the tailgate manually.
make sure the automatic rever-
sal operates. ONCNCO2006
If the power tailgate does not work
properly after the above procedure, The driver may set the height of a
have the system checked by an fully opened tailgate by following the
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. below instruction.
1. Position the tailgate manually to
✽ NOTICE the height you prefer.
If the power tailgate does not oper- 2. Press the tailgate close button for
ate normally, first check the follow- more than 3 seconds.
ing condition before using the power 3. Close the tailgate manually after
tailgate. hearing the buzzer sound.
Check if the shift lever is in:
• P (Park) for automatic transaxle
vehicles The tailgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
4 30
Smart tailgate (if equipped) How to use the Smart Tailgate

WARNING - Exhaust The tailgate can be opened with no-
fumes touch activation satisfying all the
If you drive with the tailgate conditions below.
open, you will draw dangerous • After 15 seconds when all doors
exhaust fumes into your vehicle are closed and locked
which can cause serious injury • Positioned in the detecting area for
or death to vehicle occupants. If more than 3 seconds.
you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all
windows open so that addition- ✽ NOTICE
al outside air comes into the • The Smart Tailgate does not oper-
vehicle. ate when:
ONC045077 - The smart key is detected within
On the vehicle equipped with a smart 15 seconds after the doors are
key, the tailgate can be opened with closed and locked, and is contin-
WARNING - Rear cargo uously detected.
area no-touch activation using the Smart
tailgate system. - The smart key is detected within
Occupants should never ride in 15 seconds after the doors are
the rear cargo area where no closed and locked, and 1.5 m
restraints are available. To avoid from the front door handles. (for
injury in the event of an acci- vehicles equipped with Welcome
dent or sudden stops, occu- Light)
pants should always be proper- - A door is not locked or closed.
ly restrained. - The smart key is in the vehicle.
4 31
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Tailgate, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Tailgate on the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.
ONC045078 ONC045079
2. Detect and Alert 3. Automatic opening
If you are positioned in the detecting The hazard warning lights will blink
area (50 ~100 cm behind the vehi- and chime will sound 2 times and
cle) carrying a smart key, the hazard then the tailgate will slowly open.
warning lights will blink and chime
will sound for about 3 seconds to
alert you the smart key has been
detected and the tailgate will open.
✽ NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the tailgate to
open. If you have unintentionally
entered the detecting area and the
hazard warning lights and chime
starts to operate, leave the detecting
area with the smart key. The tailgate
will stay closed.
4 32
How to deactivate the Smart ✽ NOTICE

WARNING Tailgate function using the smart • If you press the door unlock but-
• Make certain that you close key ton (2), the Smart Tailgate func-
the tailgate before driving ■ Smart key tion will be deactivated temporar-
your vehicle. ily. But, if you do not open any
• Make sure there are no people door for 30 seconds, the Smart
or objects around the tailgate Tailgate function will be activated
before opening or closing the again.
tailgate. • If you press the tailgate open but-
• Make sure objects in the rear ton (3) for more than 1 second, the
cargo area do not come out tailgate opens.
when opening the tailgate on • If you press the door lock button
the slope way. It may cause (1) or tailgate open button (3)
serious injury. when the Smart Tailgate function
is not in the Detect and Alert stage,
• Make sure to deactivate the OVF041004 the Smart Tailgate function will
Smart tailgate function when 1. Door lock not be deactivated.
washing your vehicle. • In case you have deactivated the
2. Door unlock
Otherwise, the tailgate may Smart Tailgate function by press-
open inadvertently. 3. Tailgate open ing the smart key button and
• The key should be kept out of 4. Panic opened a door, the Smart Tailgate
reach of children. Children function can be activated again by
may inadvertently open the If you press any button of the smart closing and locking all doors.
Smart Tailgate while playing key during the Detect and Alert
around the rear area of the stage, the Smart Tailgate function
vehicle. will be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Tailgate func-
tion for emergency situations.
4 33
Detecting area ✽ NOTICE Emergency tailgate safety

• The Smart Tailgate function will release
not work if any of the following
20~40 inches occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
ODM044510K
being operated close to your
• The Smart Tailgate operates with a ONCNCO2004
vehicle.
welcome alert if the smart key is • The detecting range may decrease Your vehicle is equipped with the
detected within 20~40 inches or increase when : emergency tailgate safety release
(50~100 cm) from the tailgate. - One side of the tire is raised to lever located on the bottom of the
• The alert stops at once if the smart replace a tire or to inspect the tailgate. When someone is inadver-
key is positioned outside the vehicle. tently locked in the luggage compart-
detecting area during the Detect - The vehicle is slantingly parked ment, the tailgate can be opened by
and Alert stage. on a slope or unpaved road, etc. doing as follows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
4 34
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency tailgate safety
release lever in this vehicle
and how to open the tailgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compart-
ment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
4 35
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down (if equipped)
(7) Power window lock switch
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OANNCO43005
4 36
Power windows ✽ NOTICE Window opening and closing

The ignition switch must be in the ON While driving with the rear windows
position for power windows to operate. down or with the sunroof (if
Each door has a power window equipped) in an open (or partially
switch that controls that door's win- open) position, your vehicle may
dow. The driver has a power window demonstrate a wind buffeting or
lock switch which can block the oper- pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
ation of passenger windows. The dri- mal occurrence and can be reduced
ver’s door has a master power win- or eliminated by taking the follow-
dow switch that controls all the win- ing actions. If the noise occurs with
dows in the vehicle. The power win- one or both of the rear windows
dows can be operated for approxi- down, partially lower both front
mately 30 seconds after the ignition windows approximately one inch. If
ODM042020
key is removed or turned to the ACC you experience the noise with the
or LOCK position. However, if the sunroof open, slightly reduce the To open or close a window, press
front doors open, the power windows size of the sunroof opening. down or pull up the front portion of
cannot be operated within the 30 the corresponding switch to the first
second period. detent position (5).
4 37
Auto up/down window 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(driver’s window) position.
2. Close driver’s windows and contin-
ue pulling up on the power window
switch for at least 1 second after
the window is completely closed.
OUN026013
Automatic reversal
ODM042021 If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
Pressing down or pulling up the power the body, the window will detect the
window switch momentarily to the sec- resistance and will stop upward
ond detent position (6) completely movement. The window will then
lowers or lifts the window even when lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
the switch is released. To stop the win- to allow the object to be cleared.
dow at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull or push the switch in the direction
opposite of the window’s movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
4 38
If the window detects the resistance ✽ NOTICE

while the power window switch is The automatic reverse feature for WARNING
pulled up continuously, the window the driver’s window is only active Always check for obstructions
will stop upward movement then when the “auto up” feature is used before raising any window to
lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). If by fully pulling up the switch. The avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
the power window switch is pulled up automatic reverse feature will not If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
continuously again within 5 seconds operate if the window is raised using mm) in diameter is caught
after the window is lowered by the the halfway position on the power between the window glass and
automatic window reversal feature, window switch. the upper window channel, the
the automatic window reversal will automatic reverse window may
not operate. not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
4 39
Power window lock button

CAUTION WARNING - Windows
• To prevent possible damage • NEVER leave the ignition key
to the power window system, (or smart key) in the vehicle.
do not open or close two win- • NEVER leave any child unat-
dows or more at the same tended in the vehicle. Even
time. This will also ensure the very young children may inad-
longevity of the fuse. vertently cause the vehicle to
• Never try to operate the main move, entangle themselves in
switch on the driver's door the windows, or otherwise
and the individual door win- injure themselves or others.
dow switch in opposing direc- • Always double check to make
tions at the same time. If this is sure all arms, hands, head
ODM042022
done, the window will stop and and other obstructions are
The driver can disable the power cannot be opened or closed. safely out of the way before
window switches on the rear passen-
closing a window.
gers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch to the lock posi- • Do not allow children to play
tion (pressed). with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
When the power window lock switch
dow lock switch in the LOCK
is pressed:
position (depressed). Serious
• The driver's master control can injury can result from uninten-
operate all the power windows. tional window operation by
• The front passenger's control can the child.
operate the front passenger's • Do not extend any head or
power window. arms outside through the win-
• The rear passenger's control can- dow opening while driving.
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
4 40
HOOD
Opening the hood
WARNING
ONCNCO2036
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise ODMNMC2034
ODM042023
the hood slightly, pull the second-
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch ary latch (1) inside of the hood up When you check the engine
the hood. The hood should pop and lift the hood (2). compartment, please make sure
open slightly. your head is not injured by the
3. Raise the hood. It will raise com- hood safety hook which is
pletely by itself after it has been located inside of the hood.
WARNING raised about halfway.
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the
P(Park) position, and setting the
parking brake.
4 41
Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the
WARNING
following: • Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
• All filler caps in engine compart-
are removed from the hood
ment must be correctly installed.
opening. Closing the hood
• Gloves, rags or any other com- with an obstruction present in
bustible material must be removed the hood opening may result
from the engine compartment. in property damage or severe
2. Lower the hood halfway and push personal injury.
down to securely lock in place. • Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed
and the hood could fall or be
damaged.
4 42
FUEL FILLER LID

Opening the fuel filler lid Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks one time. This indi-
cates that the cap is securely tight-
ened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
ODM044026
ODM042025 1. Stop the engine.

2. Pull the fuel filler lid opener lever,
The fuel filler lid must be opened then the fuel filler lid will pop up.
from inside the vehicle by pulling the
fuel filler lid opener lever located on 3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
the driver’s door. open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap (2) counterclockwise.
✽ NOTICE
5. Refuel as needed.
If the fuel filler lid will not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
4 43
WARNING - Refueling WARNING - Refueling (Continued)

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, dangers • Do not get back into a vehicle
it can cover your clothes or Automotive fuels are flammable once you have begun refuel-
skin and thus subject you to materials. When refueling, please ing since you can generate
the risk of fire and burns. note the following guidelines static electricity by touching,
Always remove the fuel cap carefully. Failure to follow these rubbing or sliding against any
carefully and slowly. If the cap guidelines may result in severe item or fabric (polyester, satin,
is venting fuel or if you hear a personal injury, severe burns or nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
hissing sound, wait until the death by fire or explosion. ing static electricity. Static
condition stops before com- electricity discharge can
• Read and follow all warnings ignite fuel vapors resulting in
pletely removing the cap. posted at the gas station facility. rapid burning. If you must re-
• Do not "top off" after the noz- • Before refueling, note the enter the vehicle, you should
zle automatically shuts off location of the Emergency once again eliminate poten-
when refueling. Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, tially dangerous static elec-
• Tighten the cap until it clicks at the gas station facility. tricity discharge by touching a
one time, otherwise the • Before touching the fuel noz- metal part of the vehicle, away
Malfunction Indicator Light zle, you should eliminate from the fuel filler neck, noz-
will illuminate. potentially dangerous static zle or other gasoline source.
• Always check that the fuel cap electricity discharge by touch- (Continued)
is installed securely to pre- ing another metal part of the
vent fuel spillage in the event vehicle, a safe distance away
of an accident. from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
4 44
(Continued) (Continued) CAUTION

• When using an approved • When refueling, always shut • Make sure to refuel your vehi-
portable fuel container, be sure the engine off. Sparks pro- cle according to the "Fuel
to place the container on the duced by electrical compo- requirements" suggested in
ground prior to refueling. Static nents related to the engine section 1.
electricity discharge from the can ignite fuel vapors causing
container can ignite fuel vapors a fire. Once refueling is com- • If the fuel filler cap requires
causing a fire. Once refueling plete, check to make sure the replacement, use only a gen-
has begun, contact with the filler cap and filler door are uine HYUNDAI cap or the
vehicle should be maintained securely closed, before start- equivalent specified for your
until the filling is complete. ing the engine. vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler
cap can result in a serious
Use only approved portable • DO NOT use matches or a malfunction of the fuel system
plastic fuel containers designed lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or or emission control system.
to carry and store gasoline. leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station • Do not spill fuel on the exterior
• Do not use cellular phones surfaces of the vehicle. Any
while refueling. Electric cur- especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly type of fuel spilled on painted
rent and/or electronic interfer- surfaces may damage the paint.
ence from cellular phones can flammable and can, when
potentially ignite fuel vapors ignited, result in fire. • After refueling, make sure the
causing a fire. • If a fire breaks out during refu- fuel cap is installed securely
eling, leave the vicinity of the to prevent fuel spillage in the
(Continued) event of an accident.
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department or 911.
Follow any safety instructions
they provide.
4 45
Emergency fuel filer door

release
ODM042027
If the fuel filler door does not open

using the remote fuel filler door
release, you can open it manually.
Unsnap and remove the panel in the
cargo area. Pull the handle outward
slightly.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
4 46
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

Type A • In cold and wet climates, the sun-
The sunroof can only be opened, roof may not work properly due to
closed, or tilted when the ignition freezing conditions.
switch is in the ON position. • After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
Type B operating it.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to CAUTION - Sunroof
the ACC or LOCK position. However, control lever
ODM042028 if the front doors are opened, the Do not continue to move the sun-
sunroof cannot be opened even with- roof control lever after the sun-
If your vehicle is equipped with a
in the 30 seconds period. roof is fully opened, closed, or
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever tilted. Damage to the motor or
located on the overhead console. system components could occur.
CAUTION
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehi-
cle. If the sunroof is opened, rain
or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
4 47
Sunroof open warning The warning chime will sound for a few Sunshade
(if equipped) seconds and a message "Sunroof
Open" will appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
ODM042029
property damage.
ODMECO2002
• If you would like to carry items To open the sunshade
Type A on the roof using a cross bar, Press the sunshade open button (1).
do not operate the sunroof.
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and • When carrying cargo on the
opens the driver-side door when the roof, do not load heavy items
sunroof is not fully closed. above the sunroof or glass roof.
• Do not allow children to oper-
ate the sunroof.
Type B
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) CAUTION
when the sunroof is not fully closed. Do not extend any luggage out
side the sunroof while driving.
4 48
To close the sunshade when the Sliding the sunroof

sunroof glass is closed CAUTION
Type A • Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand. It could cause
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
sunshade failure.
❈ When you press the sunshade
• Close the sunroof when driv-
close button (2) with the sunroof
ing through dusty roads. Dust
glass opened, the sunshade will
may cause a malfunction of
be closed halfway.
the vehicle system.
- Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down.
Type B ODM042030
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
When the sunshade is closed
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button (2) with the sunroof If you pull the sunroof control lever
glass opened, the sunshade will backward, the sunshade and sunroof
be closed halfway, then sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To
glass will be closed and then sun- stop the sunroof movement at any
shade will be fully closed finally. point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽ NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
4 49
When the sunshade is opened Tilting the sunroof Closing the sunroof
If you pull the sunroof control lever To close (or tilt down) the sunroof
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
- Pull the sunroof glass control lever
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
downward (or forward).
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily. Type A
❈ When you pull the sunroof glass
control lever downward (or for-
✽ NOTICE ward) with the sunshade opened,
Only the front glass of the panora- the sunshade will be closed
ma sunroof opens and closes. halfway and then glass will be
closed (or tilt down) and then sun-
shade will be fully closed finally.
ODM042033
When the sunshade is closed Type B

If you push the sunroof control lever ❈ When you pull the sunroof glass
upward, the sunshade will slide halfway control lever downward (or for-
open then the sunroof glass will tilt. ward) with the sunshade opened,
To stop the sunroof movement at any the glass will be closed (or tilt
point, pull or push the sunroof control down).
lever momentarily.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
When the sunshade is opened lever momentarily.
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
4 50
Automatic reversal
WARNING - Sunroof CAUTION
• Be careful that someone’s • Periodically remove any dirt
head, hands and body are not that may accumulate on the
trapped by a closing sunroof. guide rail.
• Do not extend the face, neck, • If you drive with the sunroof
arms or body outside through opened right after a car wash
an opened sunroof while driv- or rain, water may get inside
ing. the vehicle.
• Make sure your hands and
face are safely out of the way
before closing a sunroof. CAUTION - Sunroof motor
OYF049215 • A panoramic sunroof is made damage
If an object or part of the body is of glass, therefore it may break If you try to open the sunroof
detected while the sunroof glass or in an accident. If you do not when the temperature is below
sunshade is closing automatically, it have your seat belt on, you freezing or when the sunroof is
will reverse the direction, and then may contact the broken glass covered with snow or ice, the
stop. and get injured or killed. For all glass or the motor could be
passengers safety, have the damaged.
The auto reverse function does not
seat belts on. (ex. seat belt,
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
CRS, etc.)
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Do not extend the face, neck, arms or
body outside the sunroof while driving.
4 51
Resetting the sunroof 5.Push the sunroof control lever for-

Whenever the vehicle battery is dis- ward in the direction of close, until
connected or discharged, you must the sunroof operates as follows
reset your sunroof system as follows: again:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON The sunshade and sunroof glass
position. slide open → The sunroof glass
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof slide close → The sunshade close
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever. Then, release the lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close When this is complete, the sunroof
(about 10 seconds) until the sun- system has been reset.
roof moves a little. Then, release
the lever.
✽ NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
4 52
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS) ✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
The power steering uses a motor to The following symptoms may occur
assist you in steering the vehicle. If • If the Electric Power Steering during normal vehicle operation:
the engine is off or if the power steer- System does not operate nor- • The EPS warning light does not
ing system becomes inoperative, the mally, the warning light will illuminate.
vehicle may still be steered, but it will illuminate on the instrument • The steering gets heavy immedi-
require increased steering effort. cluster. The steering wheel ately after turning the ignition
may become difficult to con- switch on. This happens as the sys-
The motor driven power steering is trol or operate abnormally.
controlled by a power steering con- tem performs the EPS system
Take your vehicle to an diagnostics. When the diagnostics
trol unit which senses the steering authorized HYUNDAI dealer
wheel torque and vehicle speed to is completed, the steering wheel
and have the vehicle checked will return to its normal condition.
command the motor. as soon as possible. • A click noise may be heard from
The steering becomes heavier as • When you operate the steer- the EPS relay after the ignition
the vehicle’s speed increases and ing wheel in low temperature, switch is turned to the ON or
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s abnormal noise could occur. If LOCK (OFF) position.
speed decreases for optimum steer- temperature rises, the noise • A motor noise may be heard when
ing control. will disappear.This is a normal the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
Should you notice any change in the condition. driving speed.
effort required to steer during normal • If the Electric Power Steering
vehicle operation, have the power System does not operate normally,
steering checked by an authorized the warning light will illuminate on
HYUNDAI dealer. the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
4 53
(Continued) Tilt & telescopic steering

• Some noises may be heard when A tilt steering wheel allows you to
operating the steering in low tem- adjust the steering wheel before you
peratures. When the temperature drive. You can also raise it to give
rises, the noise will disappear. This your legs more room when you exit
is a normal condition. and enter the vehicle (if equipped).
• The steering effort may become
heavy when the charging system
warning light comes on. The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning ODM042036
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
WARNING - Steering adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (if
• Never adjust the angle and
equipped) (3), then pull up the lock-
height of steering wheel while
release lever to lock the steering
driving. You may lose your
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering control and cause
steering wheel to the desired posi-
severe personal injury or acci-
tion before driving.
dents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
4 54
Heated steering wheel ✽ NOTICE Horn

(if equipped) • The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
• If you turn on the ignition again
after turning off your engine in half
an hour (after operating heater
button), the heating system will be
maintained in its 'on' condition.
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to oper- ODM042038
OANNCO43006 ate the steering wheel. This To sound the horn, press the area
With the ignition switch in the ON causes damage to the heated indicated by the horn symbol on your
position, pressing the heated steer- steering wheel system. steering wheel (see illustration). The
ing wheel button warms the steering • When cleaning the heated horn will operate only when this area
wheel. The indicator on the button steering wheel, do not use an is pressed.
will illuminate and notify you on the organic solvent such as paint Check the horn regularly to be sure it
LCD display. thinner, benzene, alcohol and operates properly.
To turn the heated steering wheel off, gasoline. Doing so may dam-
press the button once again. The age the surface of the steering
indicator on the button will turn off wheel.
and notify you on the LCD display. • If the surface of the steering
wheel is damaged by a sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
4 55
Driver selectable steering ■ Type A

CAUTION mode (if equipped)
• Do not strike the horn severe-
ly to operate it, or hit it with
your fist. Do not press on the
horn with a sharp-pointed
object.
• When cleaning the steering
wheel, do not use an organic
solvent such as thinner, ben-
ODM042040
zene, alcohol or gasoline. ■ Type B
Doing so may damage the
steering wheel.
ODM042039
The driver selectable steering mode

controls steering effort as driver's
preference or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the driver selec-
table steering mode button. ODM042044
The driver selectable steering mode When the steering mode button is
stays in the last mode selected when pressed, the selected steering mode
turning the engine on. will appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as above pictures.
4 56
If the steering wheel mode button is Normal mode Comfort mode

not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
■ Type A ■ Type A
LCD display will change to the previ-
ous screen.
ODM042041 ODM042042
■ Type B ■ Type B
ODM042045 ODM042046
The normal mode offers medium The steering effort becomes lighter
steering effort. in comfort mode.
4 57
Sport mode
CAUTION
■ Type A
• For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button to
change the mode while turning
the steering wheel, the LCD
display will change as you
selected, but the steering effort
will not change. After that, if
you leave the steering wheel
centered, the steering effort will
ODM042043
change to the selected mode.
■ Type B • Be careful when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power
steering is not working prop-
erly, the driver selectable
steering mode will not work.
ODM042047
The steering effort becomes heavier.
4 58
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror Day/night rearview mirror Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the with HomeLink® system, compass
■ Type A
center view through the rear window and Blue Link® (if equipped)
is seen. Make this adjustment before Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Night
you start driving. Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated
WARNING - Rear visibility HomeLink® Wireless Control System.
Do not place objects in the rear During nighttime driving, this feature
seat or cargo area which would Day
will automatically detect and reduce
ONCNCO2008 rearview mirror glare while the com-
interfere with your vision ■ Type B
through the rear window. pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink®
Night Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
WARNING gate, home lighting, etc.
Do not modify the inside mirror
and do not install a wide mirror.
It could result in injury, during Day
an accident or deployment of ONCNCO2010
the air bag. Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
4 59
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Automatic-dimming function

Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror Your mirror will automatically dim
The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is upon detecting glare from the vehi-
the most advanced way to reduce cles traveling behind you. The auto-
annoying glare in the rearview mirror dimming function can be controlled
during any driving situation. For more by the Dimming ON/OFF Button:
information regarding NVS® mirrors
and other applications, please refer 1. Pressing and hold the button for
to the Gentex website: 3 seconds turns the autodimming
www.gentex.com function OFF which is indicated by
the green Status Indicator LED
OYF042250N
✽ NOTICE turning off.
(1) Telematics button The NVS® Mirror automatically 2. Pressing and hold the button for
(2) Telematics button reduces glare during driving condi- 3 seconds again turns the auto-
(3) Telematics button tions based upon light levels moni- dimming function ON which is indi-
tored in front of the vehicle and cated by the green Status
(4) Compass control button & Indicator LED turning on.
Dimming ON/OFF button from the rear of the vehicle. These
light sensors are visible through The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
(5) Status indicator LED openings in the front and rear of the tion each time the vehicle is started.
(6) Channel 1 button mirror case. Any object that
(7) Channel 2 button obstructs either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming Z-Nav™ Compass Display
(8) Channel 3 button The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
control feature.
(9) Compass display also equipped with a Z-Nav™
(10) Rear light sensor Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
4 60
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-

netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
4 61
To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Press and hold the button for Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
1. Determine the desired Zone more than 9 seconds. When the Control System
Number based upon your current compass memory is cleared a "C" The HomeLink® Wireless Control
location on the Zone Map. will appear in the display. System provides a convenient way to
2. Press and hold the button for 6 2. To calibrate the compass, drive replace up to three hand-held radio-
seconds, the current Zone the vehicle in 2 complete circles at frequency (RF) transmitters with a
Number will appear on the display. less than 5 mph (8 km/h). single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
3. Pressing and holding the button codes of most current transmitters to
again will cause the numbers to operate devices such as gate opera-
increment (Note: they will repeat tors, garage door openers, entry
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing door locks, security systems, even
the button when the desired Zone home lighting. Both standard and
Number appears on the display rolling code-equipped transmitters
will set the new Zone. can be programmed by following the
4. Within about 5 seconds the com- outlined procedures. Additional
pass will start displaying a com- HomeLink® information can be found
pass heading again. at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes. To re-cali-
brate the compass:
4 62
Retain the original transmitter of the Programming HomeLink®

WARNING RF device you are programming for ✽ NOTICE
Before programming HomeLink® use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink® programming. It is • When programming a garage
to a garage door opener or gate door opener, it is advised to park
operator, make sure that people also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed the vehicle outside of the garage.
and objects are out of the way of • It is recommended that a new bat-
the device to prevent potential HomeLink® buttons be erased for
security purposes. tery be placed in the hand-held
harm or damage. Do not use transmitter of the device being pro-
HomeLink® with any garage grammed to HomeLink® for quick-
door opener that lacks the safe- er training and accurate transmis-
ty stop and reverse features sion of the radio-frequency signal.
required by U.S. federal safety • Some vehicles may require the
standards (this includes any ignition switch to be turned to the
garage door opener model man- second (or "accessories") position
ufactured before April 1, 1982). for programming and/or opera-
A garage door that cannot tion of HomeLink.
detect an object - signaling the • In the event that there are still pro-
door to stop and reverse - does gramming difficulties or questions
not meet current U.S. federal after following the programming
safety standards. Using a steps listed below, contact
garage door opener without HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
these features increases the or 1-800-355-3515.
risk of serious injury or death.
4 63
Programming Flashing ✽ NOTICE

Some devices may require you to
Flashing replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
section. If the HomeLink® indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com.
OYF042251N
OYF042252N 2. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
To train most devices, follow these away from the HomeLink® button
instructions: you wish to program while keeping
1. For first-time programming, press the indicator light in view.
and hold the two outside buttons 3. Simultaneously press and hold
( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1 both the HomeLink® and hand-
and Channel 3, until the indicator held transmitter buttons until the
light begins to flash (after 10 sec- HomeLink® indicator light changes
onds). Release both buttons. Do from a slow to a rapid blinking
not hold the buttons for longer light. Now you may release both
than 20 seconds. the HomeLink® and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
4 64
4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds 6. Firmly press and release the Gate operator & Canadian pro-
and release the programmed "leam" or "smart" button. (The gramming
HomeLink® button up to two sepa- name and color of the button vary During programming, your handheld
rate times to activate the door. If the by manufacturer). There are 30 transmitter may automatically stop
door does not activate, press and seconds to initiate step 7. transmitting. Continue to press the
hold the just-trained HomeLink® but- 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
ton and observe the indicator light. press, hold for 2 seconds and Control System button (note steps 2
• If the indicator light stays on con- release the programmed through 3 in the Programming portion
stantly, programming is complete HomeLink® button. Repeat the of this document) while you press
and your device should activate "press/hold/release" sequence a and re-press ("cycle") your handheld
when the HomeLink® button is second time, and, depending on transmitter every two seconds until
pressed and released. the brand of the garage door the frequency signal has been
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly opener (or other rolling code learned. The indicator light will flash
for 2 seconds and then turns to a equipped device), repeat this slowly and then rapidly after several
constant light, continue with sequence a third time to complete seconds upon successful training.
"Programming" steps 5-7 to com- the programming process.
plete the programming of a rolling Operating HomeLink®
code equipped device (most com- HomeLink® should now activate your To operate, simply press and release
monly a garage door opener). rolling code equipped device. the programmed HomeLink® button.
5. At the garage door opener receiv- Activation will now occur for the
er (motor-head unit) in the garage, trained device (i.e. garage door
locate the "leam" or "smart" but- opener, gate operator, security sys-
ton. This can usually be found tem, entry door lock, home/office
where the hanging antenna wire is lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
attached to the motor-head unit. hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
4 65
Reprogramming a single Erasing HomeLink® buttons FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4

HomeLink® button Individual buttons cannot be erased. IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
To program a device to HomeLink® However, to erase all three pro-
using a HomeLink® button previously grammed buttons: This device complies with Part 15
trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the two outer of the FCC Rules.
1.Press and hold the desired HomeLink® buttons until the indi- Operation is subject to the following
HomeLink® button. DO NOT cator light begins to flash after 10 two conditions:
release the button. seconds.
1. This device may not cause harm-
2.The indicator light will begin to flash 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold ful interference, and
after 20 seconds. Without releasing for longer than 20 seconds.
the HomeLink® button, proceed 2. This device must accept any inter-
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless ference received, including inter-
with "Programming" step 2. Control System is now in the training ference that may cause undesired
(learn) mode and can be pro- operation.
For questions or comments, contact grammed at any time following the
HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or appropriate steps in the
Programming sections above. CAUTION
1-800-355-3515.
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
4 66
NVS® is a registered trademark and Blue Link® center Outside rearview mirror
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Be sure to adjust mirror angles
■ Type A
Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, before driving.
Michigan. HomeLink® is a registered
trademark owned by Johnson Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, hand and right-hand outside rearview
Wisconsin. mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The
mirror heads can be folded back to
prevent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing in a narrow
street.
ONCNCO2009
■ Type B
CAUTION - Outside
rearview
mirrors
• The right outside rearview
mirror is convex. Objects seen
in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mir-
OYF042250N
ror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
For the details, refer to the Blue Link® of following vehicles when
Owner’s Guide, navigation manual or changing lanes.
audio manual. The audio manual is in
this section.
4 67
Remote control To adjust the position of the mirrors:

CAUTION 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
Do not scrape ice off the mirror position.
face; this may damage the sur- 2. Move the lever(1) to R (right) or L
face of the glass. If ice should (left) to select the right side mirror
restrict movement of the mirror, or the left side mirror.
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use 3. Press a corresponding point on
a deicer spray, or a sponge or the mirror adjustment control to
soft cloth with warm water. position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
4. After the adjustment, position the
CAUTION lever in the center to prevent inad-
OANNCO2076 vertent movement.
If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by force. The electric remote control mirror
Use an approved spray de-icer switch allows you to adjust the posi- CAUTION
(not radiator antifreeze) to tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. • The mirrors stop moving when
release the frozen mechanism or they reach the maximum
move the vehicle to a warm adjusting angles, but the
place and allow the ice to melt. motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
WARNING than necessary, the motor
Do not adjust or fold the outside may be damaged.
rearview mirrors while the vehi- • Do not attempt to adjust the
cle is moving.This could result in outside rearview mirror by
loss of control, and an accident hand. Doing so may damage
which could cause death, seri- the mirror.
ous injury or property damage.
4 68
Reverse parking aid function Left or Right : When the outside Folding the outside rearview mir-
(if equipped) rearview mirror con- ror
trol switch is in the L
(Left) or R (Right)
position, both outside
rearview mirrors will
move downward.
Neutral : When the outside rearview
mirror control switch is in
the neutral (center) posi-
tion, the outside rearview
mirrors will not operate.
ODM042035 ✽ NOTICE ODM072031

The outside rearview mirrors will
When you shift the shift lever to the R automatically revert to their original To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
(Reverse) position, the outside positions under the following condi- the housing of mirror and then fold it
rearview mirror(s) will move down- tions: toward the rear of the vehicle.
ward to aid reverse parking. • When the ignition switch or engine
According to the position of the out- start/stop button is set to the ACC
side rearview mirror control switch or OFF position.
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will • When the shift lever is moved to
operate as follows: any position except the R
(Reverse) position.
4 69
Blind zone mirror (BZM)

(if equipped) WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind zone mirror.
• The blind zone mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mir-
ror but always pay attention to
drive safely.
OFS043249
CAUTION
Do not clean the glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel
or other petroleum-based on
cleaning products.
OFS053068
The blind zone mirror (BZM) is sup-

plemental mirror to reduce a driver's
blind zone that will show the rear
side territory of your vehicle. The
blind zone mirror is equipped with
the driver's outside rearview mirror.
4 70
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
■ Type B 7. Turn signal indicator lights
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
ODMNMM2054/ODMNMM2055
4 71
Instrument Cluster Control LCD Display Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
■ Type A ■ Type B
ODM042224
The LCD display modes can be

ODM042056 ODMEDI2001/ODMEDI2029
changed by using the control buttons
The brightness of the instrument • The brightness has 20 levels : 1 on the steering wheel.
panel illumination is changed by (MIN) ~ 20 (MAX)
moving the illumination control knob • If you hold the illumination control (1) : MODE button for changing
right or left when the ignition switch knob on the right end (+) or left end modes
or Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or (-), the brightness will be changed (2) : MOVE button for changing
the tale lights are turned on. continuously. items
• If the brightness reaches to the (3) : SELECT/RESET button for
maximum or minimum level, an setting or resetting the
alarm will sound. selected item
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.
4 72
Gauges
Speedometer Tachometer
■ Type A ■ Type A Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
ODMNMM2057 ODMNMM2059
ODMNMM2058 ODMNMM2221
The speedometer indicates the The tachometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated approximate number of engine revo-
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo- lutions per minute (rpm).
meters per hour (km/h).
4 73
Engine Coolant Temperature Fuel Gauge

Gauge
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6. ODMNMM2223/ODMNMM2352
ODMNMM2222/ODMNMM2352 This gauge indicates the approxi-
This gauge indicates the tempera- mate amount of fuel remaining in the
ture of the engine coolant when the WARNING fuel tank.
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Never remove the radiator cap
button is ON. when the engine is hot. The
✽ NOTICE
engine coolant is under pressure • The fuel tank capacity is given in
and could severely burn. Wait chapter 8.
until the engine is cool before • The fuel gauge is supplemented by
adding coolant to the reservoir. a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
4 74
Odometer Outside Temperature Gauge

WARNING - Fuel Gauge
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.
CAUTION ODMEDI2902/ODMEDI2904 OANNDI2901/OANNDI2902

Avoid driving with a extremely The odometer Indicates the total dis- This gauge indicates the current out-
low fuel level. Running out of tance that the vehicle has been driv- side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
fuel could cause the engine to en and should be used to determine - Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
misfire damaging the catalytic when periodic maintenance should (-40°C ~ 60°C)
converter. be performed.
The outside temperature on the dis-
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles play may not change immediately
or kilometers. like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °F to °C
or from °C to °F) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.
4 75
Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
ODMEDI2907/OVF041049
This indicator displays which auto-

matic transaxle shift lever is select-
ed.
• Park : P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive : D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
4 76
LCD DISPLAY
LCD Modes
Symbol
Modes Explanation
Type A Type B
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter,
Trip Computer fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
This mode informs of the tire pressure information

(if equipped), service interval (mileage or days) and warning
Service or or messages related to TPMS, washer fluid, or active hood lift
system.
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps,

User Settings
and so on.
A/V
- This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
(if equipped)
Turn By Turn
- This mode displays the state of the navigation.
(if equipped)
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
❈ For "Trip Computer" mode, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
4 77
Service Mode
Service Interval
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
OANNDI2066/OANNDI2070 ODMEDI2067/ODMEDI2071 ODMEDI2068/ODMEDI2072
Service in Service required Service in OFF

It calculates and displays when you If you do not have your vehicle serv- If the service interval is not set,
need a scheduled maintenance iced according to the already inputted “Service in OFF” message is dis-
service (mileage or days). service interval, “Service required” played on the LCD display.
message is displayed for several sec-
If the remaining mileage or time
onds each time you set the ignition
reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to ✽ NOTICE
days, "Service in" message is dis- If any of the following conditions
the ON position (The mileage and
played for several seconds each time occurs, the mileage and days may be
time changes to "---").
you set the ignition switch or Engine incorrect.
Start/Stop Button to the ON position. To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before: - The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- Press the SELECT/RESET button - The battery is discharged.
for more than 1 second.
4 78
User Settings Mode

Description Door
■ Type A ■ Type B Auto Door Lock (if equipped) Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off: • Off:
The auto door lock operation will The auto door unlock operation will
be deactivated. be canceled.
• Speed: • Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed unlocked when the ignition key is
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph). removed from ignition switch or
• Shift Lever: Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
All doors will be automatically
ODMEDI2025/ODMEDI2054 locked if the automatic transaxle • Shift Lever:
On this mode, you can change set- shift lever is shifted from the P All doors will be automatically
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on. (Park) position to the R (Reverse), unlocked if the automatic transaxle
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position. shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
4 79
Two Press Unlock (if equipped) Power Tailgate (if equipped) - Type A Lamp
• Off (not checked) : • Off (not checked) : Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
The two press unlock function will The power tailgate function will be If this item is checked, the headlamp
be deactivated. Therefore, all doors deactivated. delay and headlamp welcome func-
will unlock if the door is unlocked. • On (checked) : tion will be activated.
• On (checked) : The power tailgate function will be
The driver’s door will unlock if the activated. Welcome Light (if equipped)
door is unlocked. When the door is If this item is checked, the welcome
unlocked again within 4 seconds, light function of the puddle lamp will
all doors will unlock. Power Tailgate (if equipped) - Type B
be activated.
If this item is checked, the power tail-
gate function will be activated.
Horn Feedback (if equipped) Auto Triple Turn
• Off (not checked) : (One-touch triple turn signal)
Smart Tailgate (if equipped) (if equipped)
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated. If this item is checked, the smart tail- If this item is checked, the lane
gate system function will be activated. change signals will blink 3 times when
• On (checked) : the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if For more details, refer to "Tailgate" in
you press the lock button again this chapter. One Touch Turn Signal (if equipped)
within 4 seconds, the warning • Off:
sound will operate once to indicate The one touch turn signal function
that all doors are locked. will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashing :
The lane change signals will blink
3, 5, or 7 times when the turn sig-
nal lever is moved slightly.
For more details, refer to ''Light'' in
this chapter.
4 80
Settings Tire Pressure Unit (if equipped) Service Interval

Temperature Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. ■ Type A ■ Type B
Convert the temperature unit from °C (psi, kPa, Bar)
to °F or from °F to °C.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
Welcome Sound • Auto Reset:
If this item is checked, the welcome The average fuel economy will
sound function will be activated. reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
Shift Indicator (if equipped) The average fuel economy will not
If this item is checked, the shift indi- reset automatically whenever refu-
cator function will be activated. eling. OANNDI2065/OANNDI2069
For more details, refer to “Instrument For more details, refer to “Trip On this mode, you can activate the
Cluster” in this chapter. Computer” in this chapter. service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
Seat Easy Access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
4 81
A/V Mode (if equipped) Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped) Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position
(for smart key system)
ODMEDI2909 ODMEDI2910
This mode displays the state of the This mode displays the state of the
ODMEDI2002/ODMEDI2030
A/V system. navigation.
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
4 82
Low Key Battery Press start button while turn Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system) steering (for smart key system) (for smart key system)
ODMEDI2003/ODMEDI2031 ODMEDI2004/ODMEDI2032 ODMEDI2005/ODMEDI2033
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is if the steering wheel does not if the steering wheel does not lock
discharged when the Engine unlock normally when the Engine when the Engine Start/Stop Button
Start/Stop Button changes to the Start/Stop Button is pressed. changes to the OFF position.
OFF position. • It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
4 83
Check steering wheel lock Press brake pedal to start engine Key not in vehicle
system (for smart key system) (for smart key system) (for smart key system)

if the steering wheel does not lock if the Engine Start/Stop Button if the smart key is not in the vehicle
normally when the Engine changes to the ACC position twice when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the by pressing the button repeatedly Start/Stop Button.
OFF position. without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should always
• It means that you should depress have the smart key with you.
the brake pedal to start the engine.
4 84
Key not detected Press start button again Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system) (for smart key system) (for smart key system)
if the smart key is not detected if you can not operate the Engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop
when you press the Engine Start/Stop Button when there is a Button while the warning message
Start/Stop Button. problem with the Engine Start/Stop “Key not detected” is illuminating.
Button system.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
• It means that you could start the tor light blinks.
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 85
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH" Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine Door Open
(for smart key system) (for smart key system) ■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
ODMEDI2013/ODMEDI2041 ODMEDI2014/ODMEDI2042 • It means that any door is open.
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon- if you try to start the engine with
nected. the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
• It means that you should replace N (Neutral) position.
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the ✽ NOTICE
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in You can start the engine with the
the ACC position. shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
4 86
Tailgate Open Sunroof Open (if equipped) Align steering wheel


• It means that the tailgate is open. • The warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine (and then if you start the engine when the
open the driver's door, if equipped) steering wheel is turned to more
when the sunroof is open. than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
4 87
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped) Low Tire Pressure (if equipped) Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
■ Type A ■ Type A
(if equipped)
ODMEDI2021/ODMEDI2050 ODM064023L/ODM064020L
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if if the tire pressure is low with the • This warning message illuminates
the washer fluid level in the reser- ignition switch or the Engine/Start if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
voir is nearly empty. Button in ON position. OFF.
• It means that you should refill the • It means that you should turn the
washer fluid. For more information, refer to "Tire fuse switch on.
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6. For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
4 88
TRIP COMPUTER
Overview
Description Trip Modes
The trip computer is a microcomput- TRIP A
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related • Tripmeter [A]
to driving. • Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example TRIP B
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected. • Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
FUEL ECONOMY
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
To change the trip mode, press the

MOVE button .
4 89
Trip A/B Tripmeter (1) ✽ NOTICE

■ Type A • The tripmeter is the total driving dis- • The average vehicle speed is not dis-
- Trip A - Trip B tance since the last tripmeter reset. played if the driving distance is less
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the
or km driving time is less than 10 seconds
• To reset the tripmeter, press the since the ignition switch or Engine
SELECT/RESET button on the Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
steering wheel for more than 1 • Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
second when the tripmeter is dis- the average vehicle speed keeps
played. going while the engine is running.
Elapsed Time (3)

Average Vehicle Speed (2) • The elapsed time is the total driv-
OANNDI2062/OANNDI2063
■ Type B • The average vehicle speed is cal- ing time since the last elapsed time
- Trip A - Trip B culated by the total driving dis- reset.
tance and driving time since the - Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
last average vehicle speed reset.
• To reset the elapsed time, press
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h the SELECT/RESET button on
• To reset the average vehicle speed, the steering wheel for more than 1
press the SELECT/RESET button second when the elapsed time is
on the steering wheel for more displayed.
than 1 second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
OANNDI2058/OANNDI2060 the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
4 90
Fuel Economy ✽ NOTICE Manual reset

■ Type A • If the vehicle is not on level ground To clear the average fuel economy
■ Type B
or the battery power has been manually, press the SELECT/RESET
interrupted, the distance to empty button on the steering wheel for
function may not operate correctly. more than 1 second when the aver-
• The distance to empty may differ age fuel economy is displayed.
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available Automatic reset
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register To make the average fuel economy
additional fuel if less than 6 liters be reset automatically whenever refu-
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
vehicle. User Setting menu of the LCD display
OANNDI2061/OANNDI2056
• The fuel economy and distance to (Refer to “LCD Display”).
empty may vary significantly based Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
Distance To Empty (1) on driving conditions, driving age fuel economy will be cleared to
• The distance to empty is the esti- habits, and condition of the vehicle. zero (---) when the vehicle speed
mated distance the vehicle can be exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
driven with the remaining fuel. Average Fuel Economy (2) than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
- Distance range : 30 ~ 9999 mi or • The average fuel economy is calcu-
50 ~ 9999 km. lated by the total driving distance ✽ NOTICE
• If the estimated distance is below and fuel consumption since the last The average fuel economy is not dis-
30 mi. (50 km), the trip computer will average fuel economy reset. played for more accurate calculation
display “---” as distance to empty. - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9 if the vehicle does not drive more
MPG or L/100km than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50
• The average fuel economy can be meters) since the ignition switch or
reset both manually and automati- Engine Start/Stop button is turned
cally. to ON.
4 91
Instant Fuel Economy (3) One time driving information ✽ NOTICE

• This mode displays the instant fuel mode (if equipped) If "Window Open" or "Sunroof
economy during the last few sec- ■ Type A ■ Type B Open" warning message are dis-
onds when the vehicle speed is played in the cluster, this display
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h). may not be displayed in the cluster.
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG
or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
OAN064002/OAN064001
This display shows trip distance (1),

average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1km), the distance to empty (3)
will display as "---" and a refuel mes-
sage will appear (4).
4 92
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning lights Air bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights This warning light illuminates: This warning light informs the driver
are OFF after starting the engine. If • Once you set the ignition switch or that the seat belt is not fastened.
any light is still ON, this indicates a Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON For more details, refer to the “Seat
situation that needs attention. position. Belts” in chapter 3.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 93
Parking Brake & Brake Then check all brake components

Fluid Warning Light for fluid leaks. If any leak on the WARNING - Parking
brake system is still found, the Brake & Brake Fluid
warning light remains on, or the Warning Light
This warning light illuminates: brakes do not operate properly, do Driving the vehicle with a warn-
• Once you set the ignition switch or not drive the vehicle. ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON In this case, have your vehicle Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
position. towed to an authorized HYUNDAI Warning Light illuminates with
- It illuminates for approximately 3 dealer and inspected. the parking brake released, it
seconds indicates that the brake fluid
- It remains on if the parking brake Dual-diagonal braking system level is low.
is applied. In this case, have your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
• When the parking brake is applied. diagonal braking systems. This inspected by an authorized
• When the brake fluid level in the means you still have braking on two HYUNDAI dealer.
reservoir is low. wheels even if one of the dual sys-
- If the warning light illuminates tems should fail.
with the parking brake released, it With only one of the dual systems
indicates the brake fluid level in working, more than normal pedal
reservoir is low. travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
is low: short a distance with only a portion
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe of the brake system working.
location and stop your vehicle. If the brakes fail while you are driv-
2. With the engine stopped, check the ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
brake fluid level immediately and add al engine braking and stop the vehi-
fluid as required (For more details, cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
4 94
Anti-lock Brake System Electronic ✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake

(ABS) Warning Light Brake force force Distribution
Distribution (EBD) System
This warning light illuminates: (EBD) System Warning Light
Warning Light When the ABS Warning Light is on
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON These two warning lights illuminate at or both ABS and Parking Brake &
position. the same time while driving: Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
• When the ABS and regular brake the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
- It illuminates for approximately 3 meter may not work. Also, the EPS
seconds and then goes off. system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle Warning Light may illuminate and
• When there is a malfunction with the steering effort may increase or
the ABS (The normal braking sys- inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. decrease.
tem will still be operational without In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
the assistance of the anti-lock ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
brake system). WARNING - Electronic er as soon as possible.
In this case, have your vehicle Brake force Distribution
inspected by an authorized (EBD) System Warning Light
HYUNDAI dealer. When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
4 95
Electronic Power Malfunction Indicator

Steering (EPS) Warning Lamp (MIL) CAUTION - Gasoline
Light (if equipped) Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates:
tial catalytic converter damage
• Once you set the ignition switch or • Once you set the ignition switch or is possible which could result in
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON loss of engine power.
position. position.
- It remains on until the engine is - It remains on until the engine is inspected by an authorized
started. started. HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
• When there is a malfunction with • When there is a malfunction with possible.
the EPS. the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
4 96
Charging System If there is a malfunction with either Engine Coolant

Warning Light the alternator or electrical charging Temperature Warning
system: Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle. This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON 2. Turn the engine off and check the • When the engine coolant tempera-
position. alternator drive belt for looseness ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
or breakage. means that the engine is overheat-
- It remains on until the engine is
started. If the belt is adjusted properly, ed and may be damaged.
there may be a problem in the If your vehicle is overheated, refer
• When there is a malfunction with electrical charging system.
either the alternator or electrical to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
charging system. In this case, have your vehicle
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos- CAUTION - Engine
sible. Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
4 97
Engine Oil Pressure Low Fuel Level Warning

Warning Light CAUTION - Engine Oil Light
Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• If the engine does not stop
• Once you set the ignition switch or immediately after the Engine This warning light illuminates:
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON Oil Pressure Warning Light is When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
position. illuminated, severe damage
- It remains on until the engine is could result.
started. If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
• If the warning light stays on
• When the engine oil pressure is low. Add fuel as soon as possible.
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
If the engine oil pressure is low:
serious engine damage or CAUTION - Low Fuel
malfunction. In this case, Level
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as Driving with the Low Fuel Level
location and stop your vehicle.
it is safe to do so. warning light on or with the fuel
2. Turn the engine off and check the level below “0 or E” can cause
2. Turn off the engine and
engine oil level (For more details, the engine to misfire and dam-
check the oil level. If the oil
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If age the catalytic converter (if
level is low, fill the engine
the level is low, add oil as required. equipped).
oil to the proper level.
If the warning light remains on
3. Start the engine again. If the
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
warning light stays on after
able, have your vehicle inspected
the engine is started, turn
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
the engine off immediately.
as soon as possible.
In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 98
Low Tire Pressure This warning light remains on after

Warning Light blinking for approximately 60 seconds WARNING - Low tire
or repeats blinking and off at the pressure
intervals of approximately 3 seconds: • Significantly low tire pressure
This warning light illuminates: • When there is a malfunction with makes the vehicle unstable
the TPMS. and can contribute to loss of
• Once you set the ignition switch or vehicle control and increased
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized braking distances.
position.
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- • Continued driving or low pres-
- It illuminates for approximately 3 ble. sure tires will cause the tires to
seconds and then goes off. overheat and fail.
For more details, refer to “Tire
• When one or more of your tires are Pressure Monitoring System
significantly underinflated. (TPMS)” in chapter 6.
For more details, refer to “Tire WARNING - Safe Stopping
Pressure Monitoring System • The TPMS cannot alert you to
(TPMS)” in chapter 6. severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
4 99
Door Ajar Warning Light All Wheel Drive (AWD)

Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates:

When a door is not closed securely. • Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
Tailgate Open Warning
Light - It illuminates for approximately 3
the AWD system.
This warning light illuminates:
When the tailgate is not closed inspected by an authorized
securely. HYUNDAI dealer.
4 100
Indicator Lights Electronic Stability ECO Indicator Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF ECO
Control (ESC) Indicator Indicator Light
Light This indicator light illuminates:
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates:
When you activate the active ECO
• Once you set the ignition switch or • Once you set the ignition switch or
system by pressing the ACTIVE
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
ECO button.
position. position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 - It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. For more details, refer to “Active
seconds and then goes off. ECO System” in chapter 5.
• When there is a malfunction with • When you deactivate the ESC sys-
the ESC system. tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
HYUNDAI dealer. For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
4 101
Immobilizer Indicator Immobilizer Indicator This indicator light illuminates for 2

Light (Without Smart Key) Light (With Smart Key) seconds and goes off:
(if equipped) (if equipped) • When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates for up cle while the Engine Start/Stop
to 30 seconds: Button is ON.
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly • When the vehicle detects the In this case, have your vehicle
while the ignition switch is ON. smart key in the vehicle properly inspected by an authorized
while the Engine Start/Stop Button HYUNDAI dealer.
- At this time, you can start the
engine. is ACC or ON.
- The indicator light goes off after - At this time, you can start the This indicator light blinks:
starting the engine. engine. • When the battery of the smart key
- The indicator light goes off after is weak.
starting the engine. - At this time, you can not start the
This indicator light blinks:
engine. However, you can start
• When there is a malfunction with the engine if you press the Engine
the immobilizer system. This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds: Start/Stop Button with the smart
In this case, have your vehicle key. (For more details, refer to
inspected by an authorized • When the smart key is not in the “Starting the Engine” in section 5).
HYUNDAI dealer. vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the the immobilizer system.
engine.
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 102
Turn Signal Indicator High Beam Indicator All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Light Light LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light blinks: This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates:
• When you turn the turn signal light • When the headlights are on and in • Once you set the ignition switch or
on. the high beam position Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your • When you select AWD Lock mode
Light ON Indicator Light by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. - The AWD LOCK mode is to
- The indicator light does not blink increase the drive power when
but illuminates. This indicator light illuminates: driving on wet pavement, snow
• When the tail lights or headlights covered roads and/or off-road.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly. are on.
- The indicator light does not illumi- CAUTION - AWD Lock
nate at all. Front Fog Indicator Mode
Light (if equipped) Do not use AWD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
This indicator light illuminates: damage of AWD related parts.
• When the front fog lights are on.
4 103
Cruise Indicator Light Downhill Brake Control

(if equipped) CRUISE (DBC) Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates: This warning light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is • Once you set the ignition switch or
enabled. Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
For more details, refer to “Cruise - It illuminates for approximately 3
Control System” in section 5. seconds and then goes off.
• When you activate the DBC sys-
tem by pressing the DBC button.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped) SET
This warning light blinks:
• When the DBC is operating.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set. This warning light illuminates yellow:
the DBC system.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5. In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
For more details, refer to “Downhill

Brake Control (DBC) System” in
chapter 5.
4 104
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Operation of the rear parking
WARNING assist system
The rear parking assist system Operating condition
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the rear
parking assist system can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental condi-
tions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before
Sensors and while backing up.
ONCNCO2040
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming
OANNDR2100
if any object is sensed within a dis-
tance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the • This system will activate when the
vehicle. This system is a supplemen- indicator on the rear parking assist
tal system and it is not intended to OFF button is not illuminated.
nor does it replace the need for
If you desire to deactivate the rear
extreme care and attention by the
parking assist system, press the
driver. The sensing range and
rear parking assist OFF button
objects detectable by the back sen-
again. (The indicator on the button
sors are limited. Whenever backing-
will illuminate.) To turn the system
up, pay as much attention to what is
on, press the button again. (The
behind you as you would in a vehicle
indicator on the button will go off.)
without a rear parking assist system.
4 105
• This system will activate when Types of warning sound Non-operational conditions of
backing up with the ignition switch • When an object is 47 in. to 24 in. rear parking assist system
ON. (120 cm to 61 cm) from the rear The rear parking assist system
If the vehicle is moving at a speed bumper: Buzzer beeps intermit- may not operate properly when:
over 10 km/h (6 mph), the system tently.
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will be deactivated. • When an object is 23 in. to 12 in. will operate normally when the
• The sensing distance while the (60 cm to 31 cm) from the rear moisture has been cleared.)
rear parking assist system is in bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
operation is approximately 47 in. quently.
matter, such as snow or water, or
(120 cm). • When an object is within 11.8 in. the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
• When more than two objects are (30 cm) of the rear bumper: operate normally when the materi-
sensed at the same time, the clos- Buzzer sounds continuously. al is removed or the sensor is no
est object will be recognized first. longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. Trailer towing.
4 106
The detecting range may decrease Rear parking assist system ✽ NOTICE
when: precautions This system can only sense objects
1. The sensor is covered with foreign • The rear parking assist system within the range and location of the
matter such as snow or water. may not sound sequentially sensors; it can not detect objects in
(The sensing range will return to depending on the speed and other areas where sensors are not
normal when removed.) shapes of the objects detected. installed. Also, small or slim objects,
2. Outside air temperature is • The rear parking assist system may such as poles or objects located
extremely hot or cold. malfunction if the vehicle bumper between sensors may not be detected
height or sensor installation has by the sensors.
The following objects may not be been modified or damaged. Any Always visually check behind the
recognized by the sensor: non-factory installed equipment or vehicle when backing up.
accessories may also interfere with Be sure to inform any drivers of the
1. Sharp or slim objects such as vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
ropes, chains or small poles. the sensor performance.
the system regarding the systems
2. Objects which tend to absorb the • The sensor may not recognize capabilities and limitations.
sensor frequency such as clothes, objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)
spongy material or snow. from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
40 in. (1 m) and narrower than 6 • When the sensor is frozen or cov-
in. (14 cm) in diameter. ered with snow, dirt, or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until the
items are removed and the sen-
sors are cleaned using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
4 107
Self-diagnosis (if equipped)

WARNING When you shift the gear to the R
Pay close attention when the (Reverse) position and if one or more
vehicle is driven close to of the below occurs you may have a
objects on the road, particularly malfunction in the rear parking assist
pedestrians, and especially system.
children. Be aware that some
• You don't hear an audible warning
objects may not be detected by
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
the sensors, due to the object’s
mittently.
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective- If this occurs, have your vehicle
ness of the sensor. Always per- checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
form a visual inspection to dealer as soon as possible.
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving WARNING
the vehicle in any direction. Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants due to a rear
parking assist system malfunc-
tion. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
4 108
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• This system is a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the inside/out-
side rearview mirror and the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
ONCNCO2037
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered
with foreign matter, the cam-
era may not operate normally.
✽ NOTICE
The rearview camera may not oper-
ate normally, in extremely high or
low temperatures (operating temper-
ature : -13°F~149°F (-20°C~65°C)).
ODM042239
The rearview camera will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
ignition switch ON and the shift lever
in the R position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the monitor while backing-up.
4 109
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

■ Type A This causes all turn signal lights to
blink. The hazard warning lights will
operate even though the key is not in
the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
ODM042242
■ Type B
ODM042243
The hazard warning flasher should
be used whenever you find it neces-
sary to stop the car in a hazardous
location. When you must make such
an emergency stop, always pull off
the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
4 110
LIGHTING
Battery saver function Headlamp delay (if equipped)
CAUTION
• The purpose of this feature is to If you turn the ignition switch to the
prevent the battery from being dis- ACC or OFF position with the head- If the driver gets out of the vehi-
charged. The system automatically lights ON, the headlights remain on cle through other doors (other
turns off the parking lights when for about 5 minutes. However, if the than the driver's door), the bat-
the driver removes the ignition key driver’s door is opened and closed, tery saver function does not
(smart key : turns off the engine) the headlights are turned off after 15 operate and the headlamp delay
and opens the driver-side door. seconds. does not turn off automatically.
This will cause the battery to be
• With this feature, the parking lights The headlights can be turned off by discharged. In this case, make
will be turned off automatically if pressing the lock button on the trans- sure to turn off the lamp before
the driver parks on the side of the mitter (or smart key) twice or turning getting out of the vehicle.
road at night. the light switch to the OFF or Auto
If necessary, to keep the lights on position.
when the ignition key is removed However, if you turn the light switch
(smart key : turns off the engine), to the Auto position when it is dark
perform the following: outside, the headlights will not be
1) Open the driver-side door. turned off.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch You can activate or deactivate this
on the steering column. feature. Refer to “User Settings” in
this section.
4 111
Daytime running light Lighting control (1) OFF position

(if equipped) ■ Type A (2) Auto light position (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can (3) Parking light position
make it easier for others to see the (4) Headlight position
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn OFF when:
• The headlights are ON.
• Engine stops. ODMCCO2006
• The parking brake is applied. ■ Type B
ODMCCO2007
The light switch has a Headlight and

a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
4 112
Parking light position ( ) Headlight position ( ) ✽ NOTICE

■ Type A ■ Type A The ignition switch must be in the
ON position to turn on the head-
lights.
When the light switch is in the park- When the light switch is in the head-
ing light position, the tail, position, light position, the head, tail, license
license plate lights and the tail light and instrument panel lights will turn
indicator will turn on. on.
4 113
Auto light position (if equipped) High beam operation

CAUTION
• Never place anything over
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel. This will
ensure better auto-light sys-
tem control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
ONCNCO2020 • If your vehicle has window tint ODMCCO2013
or other types of metallic coat-
When the light switch is in the AUTO ing on the front windshield, To turn on the high beam headlights,
light position, the taillights and head- the Auto light system may not push the lever away from you. Pull it
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto- work properly. back for low beams.
matically depending on the amount The high beam indicator will light
of light outside the vehicle. when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
4 114
Turn signals and lane change

WARNING signals
Do not use the high beams
when there are other vehicles.
Using high beam could obstruct
the other driver's vision.
ONCNCO2022
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor- ONCNCO2023
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does The ignition switch must be on for the
not need to be on to use this flashing turn signals to function. To turn on
feature. the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). Green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which
turn signal is operating. They will
self-cancel after a turn is completed.
If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever
to the OFF position.
4 115
To signal a lane change, move the Front fog light

turn signal lever slightly and hold it in CAUTION
position (B). The lever will return to When in operation, the fog
the OFF position when released. lights consume large amounts
If an indicator stays on and does not of vehicle electrical power. Only
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of use the fog lights when visibility
the turn signal bulbs may be burned is poor or unnecessary battery
out and will require replacement. and generator drain could
occur.
One-touch triple turn signal
(One Touch Turn Signal)
To activate the one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig- ODMECO2015
nal lever slightly and then release it. Fog lights are used to provide illumi-
The lane change signals will blink 3 nation close to the road surface when
(5 or 7, if equipped) times. visibility is poor due to fog, rain or
snow, etc. The fog lights will turn on
You can activate/deactivate the One when the fog light switch (1) is turned
Touch Turn Signal function or choose to the on position after the headlight is
the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7) turned on.
from the User Settings Mode on the To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
LCD display (if equipped). light switch (1) to the OFF position.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
4 116
WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer A : Wiper speed control Windshield wipers
· MIST – Single wipe Operates as follows when the igni-
· OFF – Off tion switch is turned ON.
· INT – Intermittent wipe MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
· LO – Low wiper speed move the lever to this (MIST)
position and release it. The
· HI – High wiper speed wipers will operate continu-
ously if the lever is held in this
B : Intermittent wipe time adjust- position.
ment
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
OANNCO43007 C : Wash with brief wipes (front)* INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
Rear window wiper/washer the same wiping intervals. Use
D : Rear wiper/washer control* this mode in a light rain or mist.
· HI – High wiper speed To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
· LO – Low wiper speed
LO : Normal wiper speed
· OFF – Off
HI : Fast wiper speed
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
OANNCO43008
4 117
✽ NOTICE Windshield washers The reservoir filler neck is located in

If there is heavy accumulation of the front of the engine compartment
snow or ice on the windshield, on the passenger side.
defrost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice CAUTION
is removed before using the wind- To prevent possible damage to
shield wipers to ensure proper oper- the washer pump, do not oper-
ation. ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
✽ NOTICE
• When you operate the wipers, if
your vehicle has a problem in any WARNING
part of the wiper operation sys- OANNCO43009
Do not use the washer in freez-
tem, the wiper may operate in the In the OFF position, pull the lever ing temperatures without first
LO mode regardless of the wiper gently toward you to spray washer warming the windshield with
switch position. In this case, have fluid on the windshield and to run the the defrosters; the washer solu-
your vehicle checked by an wipers 1-3 cycles. tion could freeze on the wind-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
Use this function when the windshield and obscure your vision.
soon as possible.
• When the ignition key is removed, shield is dirty.
the wiper blade sometimes may The spray and wiper operation will
move slightly for reducing the continue until you release the lever.
deterioration of the windshield If the washer does not work, check
wipers. the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
4 118
Rear window wiper and wash-

CAUTION er switch
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo- OANNCO43011
nents, do not attempt to move Push the lever away from you to
the wipers manually. OANNCO43010
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
The rear window wiper and washer and wiper operation will continue
switch is located at the end of the until you release the lever.
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : High wiper speed
LO : Low wiper speed
OFF : Off
4 119
INTERIOR LIGHT
Map lamp • OFF (3): The lamps are off even if a
CAUTION door is opened.
■ Type A
Do not use the interior lights for • ROOM (4): The map lamp and
extended periods when the room lamp stays on at
engine is not running. all times.
It may cause battery discharge. • DOOR (5):
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
WARNING seconds when doors are unlocked
Do not use the interior lights with a transmitter or smart key as
when driving in the dark. long as the doors are not opened.
ODM042258
Accidents could happen ■ Type B - When the ignition switch is in the
because the view may be ACC or LOCK/OFF position, if
obscured by interior lights. any door is opened, the map
lamp and room lamp will stay on
for approximately 20 minutes. If
Automatic turn off function the door is closed, the lamps will
(if equipped) go out in 30 seconds.
The interior lights automatically turn - The map lamp and room lamp will
off approximately 20 minutes after go out immediately if the ignition
the ignition switch is turned off. switch is changed to the ON posi-
ODM042259 tion with all doors closed.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights Press the lens (1) to turn the map - When the ignition switch is in the
automatically turn off approximately lamp on or off ON position, if any door is opened,
5 seconds after the system is in the the map lamp and room lamp will
• ON (2): The map lamp and room stay on continuously. If the door is
armed stage. lamp stays on at all times. closed, the lamps will go out
immediately.
4 120
✽ NOTICE Room lamp

CAUTION
When the lamp is turned on by ■ Type A
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does Do not leave the lamp switches
not turn off even if the switch is in on for an extended period of
the OFF position (3). time when the vehicle is not run-
ning because the battery may
drain.
ODM042260
■ Type B
ODM042341
Press the button to turn the light on

or off.
4 121
Luggage room lamp Vanity mirror lamp Glove box lamp
OXM049136 OEN046081 ODM042262
• ON : The luggage room lamp stays Opening the lid of the vanity mirror The glove box lamp comes on when
on at all times. will automatically turn on the mirror the light switch is in the parking light
• DOOR : The luggage room lamp light. position or headlight position and the
comes on when the tail- glove box is opened.
gate is opened. CAUTION
• OFF : The luggage room lamp is off. To prevent unnecessary charg-
ing system drain, close the van-
ity mirror cover after using the
mirror.
4 122
WELCOME SYSTEM
Headlamp welcome Interior light Pocket lamp
When the headlight(light switch in When the interior light switch is in the When all doors are locked and
the headlight or AUTO position) is on DOOR position and all doors (and closed, the pocket lamp will come on
and all doors (and tailgate) are tailgate) are locked and closed, the for 15 seconds if any of the below is
locked and closed, the headlight, room lamp will come on for 30 sec- performed.
position light and tail light will come onds if any of the below is per- • Without smart key system
on for 15 seconds if any of the below formed.
is performed. - When the door unlock button is
• Without smart key system pressed on the transmitter.
• Without smart key system - When the door unlock button is • With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is pressed on the transmitter.
pressed on the transmitter. - When the door unlock button is
• With the smart key system pressed on the smart key.
• With the smart key system - When the door unlock button is - When the button of the outside
- When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key. door handle is pressed.
pressed on the smart key. - When the button of the outside - When the vehicle is approached
door handle is pressed. with the smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button (on the transmitter or smart At this time, if you press the door lock
key), the lights will turn off immedi- At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme- button, the lamps will turn off imme-
ately. diately. diately.
4 123
DEFROSTER
Rear window defroster To activate the rear window
CAUTION defroster, press the rear window
■ Manual climate control
To prevent damage to the con- defroster button located in the center
ductors bonded to the inside facia switch panel.
surface of the rear window, The indicator on the rear window
never use sharp instruments or defroster button illuminates when the
window cleaners containing defroster is ON.
abrasives to clean the window. If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
✽ NOTICE before operating the rear defroster.
If you want to defrost and defog the The rear window defroster automati-
ODM042271 cally turns off after approximately 20
front windshield, refer to ■ Automatic climate control
“Windshield defrosting and defog- minutes or when the ignition switch is
ging” in this section. turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
ODM042272 they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
the rear window, while the engine is
running. If your vehicle is equipped with the
front wiper deicer, it will be operating
at the same time you operate the
front windshield defroster.
4 124
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Front climate control (Type A) ■ Front climate control (Type B)
1. Front windshield defrost button
2. Temperature control button
3. Air conditioning button
4. MAX A/C (Max airconditioning) button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
7. Mode selection button
8. Fan speed control knob
9. 3rd row climate control ON/OFF

button
■ 3rd row air climate control (for Type A)
10. 3rd row fan speed control knob
11. 3rd row blower ON/OFF button
12. 3rd row mode selection button
13. 3rd row temperature control knob
* if equipped
ONCNCL2001/ODM042273/ONCNCL2002
4 125
Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. (if
equipped)
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on. ONCNCL2003
❈ 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, G, H) (G, H : if equipped)

• The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents is controlled by the front climate
control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor (E, F, H).
• The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, H) may be weaker
than the instrument panel vents for the long air duct.
• Close the air vents (F) in cold weather. The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row
outlet vents may not be as warm during heating operation. (Use the 2nd
and 3rd row outlet vents (F, G) during cooling operation.)
4 126
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D, F) Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the
body and face. Additionally, each floor and the windshield with a small
outlet can be controlled to direct the amount directed to the side window
air discharged from the outlet. defrosters, and side vents.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F) Defrost-Level (A, D)
ODMECL2002 Air flow is directed towards the face Most of the air flow is directed to the
The mode selection button controls and the floor. windshield with a small amount of air
the direction of the air flow through directed to the side vents.
the ventilation system.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.
4 127
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) Temperature control
ODM042279
ODM042277
Instrument panel vents ODM042280
To operate the MAX A/C, turn the fan The outlet vents can be opened or The temperature control switch
speed control knob to the right to closed separately using the thumb- allows you to control the temperature
maximum fan speed, then press the wheel. of the airflow in the vehicle.
MAX A/C button. Air flow is directed Also, you can adjust the direction of To change the temperature:
toward the upper body and face. air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown. • Press the (red) switch to
In this mode, the air conditioning, the increase temperature.
recirculated air position and max
cool temperature will be selected • Press the (blue) switch to
automatically. decrease temperature.
The temperature status will be dis-
played at the above switch panel as
an indicator.
4 128
Air intake control Recirculated air position ✽ NOTICE

■ Type A
The indicator light on the Prolonged operation of the heater in
button illuminates when the recirculated air position (with-
the recirculated air posi- out air conditioning selected) may
■ Type A, B tion is selected. cause fogging of the windshield and
With the recirculated air side windows and the air within the
position selected, air passenger compartment may
from the passenger become stale.
compartment will be In addition, prolonged operation of
recirculated and heated the air conditioning with the recir-
or cooled according to culated air position selected will
ONCNCL2004 the function selected. result in excessively dry air in the
■ Type B passenger compartment.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
■ Type A outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
ODM042281
■ Type B
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
4 129
Fan speed control To turn off the blowers

WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in the
recirculated air position with-
out A/C selected may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. This may cause
serious harm or death due to ODM042282 ODM042283
a drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature. The ignition switch must be in the ON To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
position for fan operation. speed control knob to the “0” position.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in The fan speed control knob allows
the recirculated air position you to control the fan speed of the air
may cause drowsiness or flowing from the ventilation system.
sleepiness and loss of vehicle To change the fan speed, turn the
control. Set the air intake con- knob to the right for higher speed or
trol to the outside (fresh) air left for lower speed.
position as much as possible Setting the fan speed control knob to
while driving. the “0” position turns off the fan.
4 130
Air conditioning 3rd row climate control 2. Set the fan speed control knob (2)
(if equipped) to the desired position.
■ Front 3. Set the temperature control knob
(3) to the desired position.
4. Select the desired direction of the
air flow by pressing the mode
selecting button (4).
ONCNCL2005
ODM042284
■ 3rd row
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
ONCNCL2002
1. To turn the 3rd row climate control

on or off, press the 3rd row climate
control ON/OFF button (1 or 5).
4 131
System operation Operation Tips Air conditioning

Ventilation • To prevent dust or unpleasant HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
fumes from entering the vehicle are filled with environmentally friend-
1. Set the mode to the position. through the ventilation system, ly R-134a refrigerant.
2. Set the air intake control to the temporarily set the air intake con- 1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
outside (fresh) air position. trol to the recirculated air position. ditioning button.
3. Set the temperature control to the Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation 2. Set the mode to the position.
desired position.
has passed to keep fresh air in the 3. Set the air intake control to the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv- recirculated air position. However,
desired speed.
er alert and comfortable. prolonged operation of the recircu-
• Air for the heating/cooling system lated air position will excessively
Heating is drawn in through the grilles just dry the air. In this case, change the
1. Set the mode to the position. ahead of the windshield. Care air position.
2. Set the air intake control to the should be taken that these are not 4. Adjust the fan speed control and
outside (fresh) air position. blocked by leaves, snow, ice or temperature control to maintain
other obstructions. maximum comfort.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. • To prevent interior fog on the wind- • When maximum cooling is desired,
shield, set the air intake control to set the temperature control to the
4. Set the fan speed control to the extreme left position then set the
the fresh air position and fan speed
desired speed. fan speed control to the highest
to the desired position, turn on the
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, air conditioning system, and adjust speed.
turn the air conditioning system (if the temperature control to desired
equipped) on. temperature.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
4 132
✽ NOTICE Air conditioning system operation tips • Operating the air conditioning sys-
• While using the air conditioning • If the vehicle has been parked in tem in the recirculated air position
system, monitor the engine tem- direct sunlight during hot weather, provides maximum cooling, how-
perature gauge closely while driv- open the windows for a short time ever, continual operation in this
ing up hills or in heavy traffic to let the hot air inside the vehicle mode may cause the air inside the
when outside temperatures are escape. vehicle to become stale.
high. Air conditioning system • To help reduce moisture inside of • During cooling operation, you may
operation may cause engine over- the windows on rainy or humid occasionally notice a misty air flow
heating. Continue to use the blow- days, decrease the humidity inside because of rapid cooling and
er fan but turn the air condition- the vehicle by operating the air humid air intake. This is a normal
ing system off if the engine tem- conditioning system. system operation characteristic.
perature gauge indicates engine • During air conditioning system • If you operate air conditioner
overheating. operation, you may occasionally excessively, the difference
• Opening the windows in humid notice a slight change in engine between the temperature of the
weather while operating the air speed as the air conditioning com- outside air and that of the wind-
conditioning system may create pressor cycles. This is a normal shield could cause the outer sur-
water droplets inside the vehicle. system operation characteristic. face of the windshield to fog up,
Since excessive water droplets causing loss of visibility. In this
may cause damage to electrical • During the winter months, use the
case, set the mode selection knob
equipment, air conditioning air conditioning system every
or button to the position and
should only be used with the win- month for a few minutes to ensure
fan speed control to the lower
dows closed. maximum system performance.
speed.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This condensation is
a normal system operation charac-
teristic.
4 133
Climate control air filter ✽ NOTICE Checking the amount of air

• Replace the filter according to the conditioner refrigerant and
Outside air Maintenance Schedule. compressor lubricant
If the vehicle is being driven in When the amount of refrigerant is
Recirculated severe conditions such as dusty, low, the performance of the air con-
air rough roads, more frequent cli- ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
mate control air filter inspections has a negative influence on the air
and changes are required. conditioning system.
• When the air flow rate suddenly Therefore, if abnormal operation is
decreases, the system should be found, have the system inspected by
Blower checked at an authorized an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Climate control Heater core HYUNDAI dealer.
Evaporator
air filter core 1LDA5047
WARNING
The climate control air filter installed Because the refriger-
behind the glove box filters the dust ant is at very high
or other pollutants that come into the pressure, the air con-
vehicle from the outside through the ditioning system
heating and air conditioning system. should only be serv-
If dust or other pollutants accumulate iced by trained and certified
in the filter over a period of time, the technicians. It is important that
air flow from the air vents may the correct type and amount of
decrease, resulting in moisture accu- oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
mulation on the inside of the wind- erwise damage to the vehicle
shield even when the outside (fresh) and personal injury may occur.
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 134
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Front climate control (Type A) ■ Front climate control (Type B)
1. Front windshield defrost button
2. Rear window defrost button
3. Display
4. Air conditioning button*
6. Dual temperature control selection button
7. Driver's temperature control button
8. Front fan speed control knob
9. AUTO (automatic control) button
10. Front blower OFF button
11. Air intake control button* or recirculated
air position button*
■ 3rd row climate control (for Type A and B) 12. 3rd row climate control ON/OFF button
(controlled from the front)
13. Passenger's temperature control button
14. 3rd row fan speed control knob
15. 3rd row blower ON/OFF button
16. 3rd row mode selection button
17. 3rd row temperature control knob
18. Climate control information screen
selection button
* if equipped
ONCNCL2006/ONCNCL2009/ONCNCL2002
4 135
■ Front climate control (Type C)
1. Front windshield defroster button

2. Rear window defrost button
3. A/C display
4. Air conditioning button*
6. Dual temperature control selection button
7. Driver's temperature control button
8. Front fan speed control knob
■ Front climate control (Type D) 9. AUTO (automatic control) button
10. Blower OFF button
11. Air intake control button* or recirculated
air position button*
12. Passenger's temperature control button
13. Climate control information screen
selection button
* if equipped
ODMECL2010/OANNMM2002
4 136
Automatic heating and air con- ✽ NOTICE

ditioning • To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or knob of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
ODM042290 improve the effectiveness of the
2. Set the driver’s temperature con- climate control, use the AUTO
trol button to set the desired tem- button and set the temperature to
ODM042287
perature. 73°F (23°C).
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
4 137
Manual heating and air condi- Mode selection

tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
ODM042336 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
✽ NOTICE ODM042288
For improving the effectiveness of
Never place anything over the sen- heating and cooling; The mode selection button controls
sor located on the instrument panel the direction of the air flow through
to ensure better control of the heat- - Heating:
the ventilation system.
ing and cooling system. - Cooling:
The air flow outlet port is converted
3. Set the temperature control to the as follows:
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
desired speed. Refer to the illustration in the
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn “Manual climate control system”.
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
4 138
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
ODM042289 ODM042279
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor. Defrost-Level Instrument panel vents
Most of the air flow is directed to the The outlet vents can be opened or
windshield with a small amount of air closed separately using the thumb-
Floor-Level directed to the side window defrosters. wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
Most of the air flow is directed to the air delivered from these vents using
floor, with a small amount of the air the vent control lever as shown.
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor & Defrost
Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
4 139
Temperature control ■ Type A ■ Type B Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature equally
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The pas-
senger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
2. Press the left temperature control
button. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
ODM042291
ODMECL2003
Adjusting the driver and passenger Temperature conversion
side temperature individually
The temperature will increase by If the battery has been discharged or
pushing the up button. Each push of 1. Press the DUAL button to operate disconnected, the temperature mode
the button will cause the temperature the driver and passenger side display will reset to Fahrenheit.
to increase by 1°F/0.5°C. temperature individually. Pressing
the right temperature control but- This is a normal condition. You can
The temperature will decrease by ton will automatically switch to the switch the temperature mode between
pushing the down button. Each push DUAL mode as well. Fahrenheit to Celsius as follows;
of the button will cause the tempera- While pressing the OFF button,
ture to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. When 2. Press the left temperature control
button to adjust the driver side depress the AUTO button for 3 sec-
set to the lowest temperature setting, onds or more. The display will
the air conditioning will operate con- temperature. Press the right tem-
perature control button to adjust change from Fahrenheit to Celsius,
tinuously. or from Celsius to Fahrenheit.
the passenger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest or lowest tempera-
ture setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-
vated for maximum heating or cooling.
4 140
Air intake control Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) WARNING
air position selected, air • Continued use of the climate
enters the vehicle from control system operation in
■ Type A outside and is heated or the recirculated air position
cooled according to the may allow humidity to
function selected. increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
■ Type B
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
✽ NOTICE system on. This may cause
Prolonged operation of the heater in serious harm or death due to
OANNMM2003
the recirculated air position (with- a drop in the oxygen level
This is used to select the outside out air conditioning selected) may and/or body temperature.
(fresh) air position or recirculated air cause fogging of the windshield and • Continued use of the climate
position. side windows and the air within the control system operation in
To change the air intake control posi- passenger compartment may the recirculated air position
tion, push the control button. become stale. may cause drowsiness or
In addition, prolonged use of the air sleepiness and loss of vehicle
Recirculated air position conditioning with the recirculated control. Set the air intake con-
air position selected will result in trol to the outside (fresh) air
The indicator light on the excessively dry air in the passenger position as much as possible
button illuminates when compartment. while driving.
the recirculated air posi-
■ Type A, B ition is selected.
With the recirculated air position
selected, air from the passenger com-
partment will be drawn through the
heating system and heated or cooled
according to the function selected.
4 141
Fan speed control Air conditioning OFF mode

■ Type A ■ Type C
■ Type B
ODM042293 ONCNCL3012 ODM042295

The fan speed can be set to the Push the A/C button to turn the air Push the OFF button to turn off the
desired speed by turning the fan conditioning system on (indicator air climate control system. However,
speed control knob. light will illuminate). you can still operate the mode and
The higher the fan speed is, the Push the button again to turn the air air intake buttons as long as the igni-
more air is delivered. conditioning system off. tion switch is in the ON position.
To turn off the fan speed, press the
OFF button.
4 142
Climate information screen selec- 3rd row climate control 2. Set the fan speed control knob (2)
tion (if equipped) (if equipped) to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control knob
■ Front
(3) to the desired position.
Type A Type B
4. Select the desired direction of the
air flow by pressing the mode
selecting button (4).
ONCNCL2007/ONCNCL3013
ODM042297 ■ 3rd row
Press the climate information screen

selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
ONCNCL2002
1. To turn the3rd row climate control

on or off, press the 3rd row climate
control ON/OFF button (1 or 5).
4 143
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

• For maximum defrosting, set the Manual climate control system
WARNING - Windshield temperature control to the extreme To defog inside windshield
heating right/hot position and the fan speed
Do not use the or posi- control to the highest speed.
tion during cooling operation in • If warm air to the floor is desired
extremely humid weather. The while defrosting or defogging, set
difference between the temper- the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
ature of the outside air and that tion.
of the windshield could cause • Before driving, clear all snow and
the outer surface of the wind- ice from the windshield, rear win-
shield to fog up, causing loss of dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
visibility. In this case, set the all side windows.
mode selection knob or button
• Clear all snow and ice from the
to the position and fan
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to ODM042298
speed control knob or button to
improve heater and defroster effi-
a lower speed.
ciency and to reduce the probabili- 1. Select desired temperature.
ty of fogging up the inside of the 2. Select any fan speed except “0”
windshield. position.
3. Select the or position.
✽ NOTICE 4. The outside (fresh) air will be
Be sure to keep the interior surface selected automatically.
of the windshield clean by wiping it If the outside (fresh) air position is
with a clean cloth and glass cleaner. not selected automatically, press the
This will help reduce the tendency of corresponding button manually.
the glass fogging and also improve
visibility.
4 144
To defrost outside windshield Automatic climate control sys- To defrost outside windshield
tem
To defog inside windshield
ODM042299 OANNMM2006
1. Set the temperature to the 1. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position. OANNMM2005 extreme hot (HI) position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest 1. Select desired temperature. 2. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position. (extreme right) position.
2. Select desired fan speed.
3. Select the position. 3. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air will be 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
selected automatically. 4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
If the outside (fresh) air position is fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
not selected automatically, adjust the speed.
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
4 145
Auto defogging system If more moisture is in the vehicle, the ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) automated steps operate as follows: When the air conditioning is turned
If auto defogging does not defog the on and the outside air position is
window at step 1, outside air position, selected by the auto defogging sys-
step 2, blowing air toward the wind- tem, if you try to turn off the air con-
shield occurs. ditioning and select the recirculated
air position, the indicator will blink
Step 1 : Outside air position 3 times and the air conditioning will
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the wind- not be turned off and recirculated
shield air position will not be selected.
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
CAUTION
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Do not remove the sensor cover
ONCNCO2038 Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning located on the upper end of the
The auto defogging system is auto- driver side windshield glass.
Auto defogging reduces the probabil- Damage to system parts could
ity of fogging up the inside of the matically activated when the condi-
tions are met. However, if you would occur and may not be covered
windshield by automatically sensing by your vehicle warranty.
the moisture of inside the windshield. like to cancel the auto defogging sys-
tem, press the front defroster button
The auto defogging system operates 4 times within 2 seconds while press-
when the heater or air conditioning is ing the AUTO button. The indicator of
on. the front defroster button will blink 3
times to notify you that the system is
This indicator illuminates cancelled. To use the auto defogging
when the auto defogging system again, follow the procedures
system senses the mois- mentioned above.
ture of inside the wind- If the battery has been disconnected
shield and operates. or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
4 146
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
Center console storage Glove box
CAUTION
■ Type A
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
cannot close securely. ODMECO2033
■ Type B
ODM042304
WARNING - Flammable To open the center console storage,

materials pull up the lever.
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
ODMECO2032
peratures for extended periods.
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key (1).
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (2) and the glove box will auto-
matically open (3). Close the glove
box after use.
4 147
Multi box (if equipped) Sunglass holder

WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
ODM042307 ODM042308
To open the cover, push the lever (1) To open the sunglass holder, press
and the multi box will open automati- the cover and the holder will slowly
cally. open. Place your sunglasses in the
It can be used for storing small items. compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the multi box
open.
4 148
Luggage tray
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked ONCNCO2024
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-
into a sunglass holder to pre- tor triangle, tools, etc. in the luggage
vent breakage or deformation tray for easy access.
of glasses. It may cause per- Grasp the handle on the top of the
sonal injury if you try to open cover and lift it.
it forcibly when the glasses
are jammed in holder.
4 149
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) If it is necessary to replace the ciga- Cup holder
rette lighter, use only a genuine
■ Front
HYUNDAI replacement or its
approved equivalent.
WARNING
• Holding the lighter in after it is
heated will cause it to over-
heat.
• If the lighter does not pop out OANNCO43014
within 30 seconds, remove it ■ Center
to prevent overheating.
ONCDCO3055
For the cigarette lighter to work, the

ignition switch must be in the ACC CAUTION
position or the ON position.
The use of plug-in accessories
To use the cigarette lighter: (shavers, hand-held vacuums,
1. Open the cover by pressing the and coffee pots, for example)
switch. may damage the socket or ODM042316
■ Rear
2. Push the lighter all the way into the cause electrical failure.
socket.
When the element has heated, the
lighter will pop out to the "ready"
position.
ONCNCO2026
4 150
Cups or small beverage cans may be Sunvisor

placed in the cup holders. WARNING
To use the center cup holder, pull Keep cans or bottles out of
down the armrest and press the direct sun light and do not put
open button. them in a vehicle that is hot up.
It may explode.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder CAUTION
while the vehicle is in motion. When cleaning spilled liquids,
If the hot liquid spills, you may do not dry the cup holder at
OYF049145
burn yourself. Such a burn to high temperatures. This may
the driver could lead to loss of damage the chrome trim of the
control of the vehicle. cup holder.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place CAUTION
uncovered or unsecured bot- Do not place uncovered cups in
tles, glasses, cans, etc., in the the cup holder while the vehicle
cup holder while the vehicle is is in motion. If the liquid spills,
in motion. electric systems may malfunc-
tion. HTG2174
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
4 151
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the Power outlet The power outlet is designed to pro-
visor and slide the mirror cover (3). vide power for mobile telephones or
■ Front
Adjust the sunvisor extension (if other devices designed to operate
equipped) forward or backward (4). with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
CAUTION
• Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity CAUTION
mirror lamp is not in use. If the • Use the power outlet only
sunvisor is closed without the ODMECO2037
when the engine is running
lamp off, it may discharge the ■ Center and remove the accessory
battery or damage the sunvisor. plug after use. Using the
• Always use the sunvisor accessory plug for prolonged
extension, after swinging the periods of time with the
sunvisor to the side. engine off could cause the
battery to discharge.
• Only use 10V electric acces-
sories which are less than 10A
in electric capacity. If not, it
ODM042318
could lead to an overheated
■ Rear (if equipped)
power outlet or electric wiring
in the vehicle and electric sys-
tems may malfunction.
(Continued)
ONCNCO2039
4 152
(Continued) AC inverter (if equipped)

WARNING
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
Do not put fingers or foreign
heater to the lowest operating
elements (pin, etc.) into a power
level when using the power
outlet and do not touch with a
outlet.
wet hand. You may get an elec-
• Close the cover when not in tric shock.
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices ONCNCO2027
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
• Make sure that the electric
devices are plugged in secure-
ly. If not, it could cause a mal-
function of electric systems.
• If you use an electric device
with a battery, electric current
ONCNCO2028
may flow from the electric
device into the vehicle and The AC inverter supplies 115V/150W
may cause a malfunction of electric power to operate electric
electric systems. Only use accessories or equipments.
electric devices which could
prevent inverse current.
4 153
If you wish to use the AC inverter,press

CAUTION (Continued)
the AC inverter button while the engine
is running. The light on the AC inverter • To prevent the battery from • Some electronic accessories
button will illuminate. being discharged, do not use or equipments can cause elec-
the AC inverter while the tronic interference. It may
If you press the AC inverter button
engine is not running. cause excessive audio noise
again, the AC inverter will be deacti- and malfunctions in other
vated and the light on the AC invert- • When not using the AC invert- electronic systems or devices
er button will turn off. er,make sure to turn off the AC in the vehicle.
inverter (the indicator on the
button does not illuminate) and • Do not use broken electronic
✽ NOTICE close the AC inverter cover. accessories or equipments,
When turning on the AC inverter, the which may damage the AC
• After using an electronic inverter and electrical sys-
indicator on the AC inverter button accessory or equipment, pull
is delayed while the system conducts tems of the vehicle.
the plug out. Leaving the
a self-check. accessory or equipment • Do not use two or more elec-
plugged in for a long time may tronic accessories or equip-
cause battery discharge. ments at the same time. It may
WARNING cause damage to the electrical
To reduce a risk of serious or • Do not use an electronic acces- systems of the vehicle.
fatal injuries: sory or equipment with the
power consumption greater • When the input voltage is under
• Do not use a heated electric than 150W(115V). 11V, the outlet LED will blink
device such as a coffeepot, and the AC inverter will turn off
toaster, heater, iron, etc. (Continued) automatically. If the input volt-
• Do not insert foreign objects age goes up to normal, the AC
into the outlet and do not inverter will turn on again.
touch the outlet as you may • Do not use extensions or power
get shocked. strips.
• Do not let children touch the
AC inverter.
4 154
Clothes hanger (if equipped) Floor mat anchor(s)

WARNING
The floor mat must be properly
anchored so that it will not
interfere with the operation of
the accelerator pedal. Any inter-
ference with the accelerator
pedal could cause the accelera-
tor pedal not to return to the
idle position. A pedal that can-
not return to the idle position
could lead to an accident which
may result in severe personal
ODMECO2038 ODMECO2034 injury or death.
To use the hanger, pull down the When using a floor mat on the front
upper portion of hanger. floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
CAUTION cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
Do not hang heavy clothes,
because it may damage the hook.
4 155
Aux, USB and iPod® port ✽ NOTICE

WARNING When using a portable audio device
The following must be observed connected to the power outlet, noise
when installing ANY floor mat may occur during playback. If this
to the vehicle, so that it will not happens, use the power source of the
interfere with the pedal. portable audio device.
• Ensure that the floor mats are ❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
securely attached to the vehi-
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors. ONCDCO3053
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath- If your vehicle has an aux and/or
er rubber mat on top of a car- USB(universal serial bus) port or
peted floor mat). Only a single iPod® port, you can use an aux port
floor mat should be installed to connect audio devices and a USB
in each position. port to plug in a USB and also in an
iPod®.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that only the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
4 156
Luggage net (holder) If necessary, contact your authorized Cargo security screen
(if equipped) HYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage (if equipped)
net.
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
Vehicles equipped with a luggage
rail system may use the shackles to
hook the luggage net.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
ONCNCO2029 or the vehicle, care should be
■ Type B
taken when carrying fragile or ONCNCO3031
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment. Use the cargo security screen to
hide items stored in the cargo area.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
ONCNCO3030 body out of the luggage net’s
To keep items from shifting in the recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
cargo area, you can use the four gage net when the strap has vis-
holders located in the cargo area to ible signs of wear or damage.
attach the luggage net.
4 157
To use the cargo security screen When the cargo security screen is not To remove the cargo security
in use: screen (if equipped)
1. Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from
the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will
automatically slide back in.
✽ NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not
automatically slide back in if the
cargo security screen is not fully ONCNCO3033
ONCNCO3032
pulled out. Fully pull it out and then
1. Pull the cargo security screen carefully slide back in.
towards the rear of the vehicle by
the handle (1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide
(2).
✽ NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen
with the handle in the center to pre- ONCNCO2034
vent the guide pin from falling out of 1. Push in the guide pin.
the guide.
2. While pushing the lever, pull out
the cargo security screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the
cargo security screen in the tray.
4 158
To remove the cargo security Side curtain (if equipped)

screen from the luggage tray WARNING
• Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possi-
bly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
ODM042343
ONCNCO2035
CAUTION To use the side curtain:
1. Push in the guide pin. 1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
Since the cargo security screen
2. While pushing the guide pin, pull may be damaged or deformed, 2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
out the cargo security screen. do not put luggage on it when it the hook.
is used.
4 159
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped) (Continued)
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the • The vehicle center of gravity will
roof rack, take the necessary be higher when items are
precautions to make sure the loaded onto the roof rack. Avoid
cargo does not damage the sudden starts, braking, sharp
roof of the vehicle. turns, abrupt maneuvers or
high speeds that may result in
• When carrying large objects loss of vehicle control or
on the roof rack, make sure rollover resulting in an accident.
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width. • Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
ODM042345 wind updrafts, caused by pass-
WARNING ing vehicles or natural causes,
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can • The following specification is
load cargo on top of your vehicle. can cause sudden upward pres-
the maximum weight that can sure on items loaded on the
be loaded onto the roof rack. roof rack. This is especially true
✽ NOTICE Distribute the load as evenly when carrying large, flat items
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun- as possible onto the roof rack such as wood panels or mat-
roof, be sure not to position cargo and secure the load firmly. tresses. This could cause the
onto the roof rack in such a way that items to fall off the roof rack and
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.) cause damage to your vehicle
it could interfere with sunroof oper- RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
ation. or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
Loading cargo or luggage in cargo while driving, check fre-
excess of the specified weight quently before or while driving
limit on the roof rack may to make sure the items on the
damage your vehicle. roof rack are securely fastened.
(Continued)
4 160
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE Antenna Steering wheel audio control
• If you install an aftermarket HID Roof antenna
headlamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
• Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
ODM042327
OANNMM2901
The steering wheel incorporates
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to audio control buttons on the left hand
receive both AM and FM broadcast side of the steering wheel.
signals.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
4 161
MODE (1) RADIO mode MUTE (4)

Press the button to change audio It will function as the PRESET STA- • Press the button to mute the sound.
source. TION buttons. • Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone call.
PRESET/SEEK ( / ) (2) CD/USB/iPod® mode
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif- It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN Detailed information for audio control
ferent functions based on the system button. buttons are described in the following
mode. pages in this section.
For the following functions the button VOLUME (VOL+/-) (3)
should be pressed for 0.8 second or
• Push the lever upward (+) to
more.
increase the volume.
• Push the lever downward (-) to
RADIO mode decrease the volume.
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for less than 0.8 second, it
will work as follows in each mode.
4 162
How vehicle audio works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception
the distance from the radio station,
FM reception closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
JBM002
JBM001
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
AM and FM radio signals are broadcasts. This is because AM radio
cast from transmitter towers located waves are transmitted at low fre-
around your city. They are intercept- quencies. These long distance, low
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- frequency radio waves can follow the
cle. This signal is then processed by curvature of the earth rather than
the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they
speakers. curve around obstructions resulting
When a strong radio signal has in better signal coverage.
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
4 163
FM radio station
JBM003 JBM004 JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the nal weakens, another more power-
follow the earth's surface. Because signal will weaken and sound will ful signal near the same frequency
of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, may begin to play. This is because
begin to fade within short distances we suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto
from the station. Also, FM signals are stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs,
easily affected by buildings, moun- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a
tains, and obstructions. This can lead large obstructions between the stronger signal.
to undesirable or unpleasant listen- transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
ing conditions which might lead you turb the signal causing static or signals being received from sever-
to believe a problem exists with your fluttering noises to occur. Reducing al directions can cause distortion
radio. The following conditions are the treble level may lessen this or fluttering. This can be caused by
normal and do not indicate radio effect until the disturbance clears. a direct and reflected signal from
trouble: the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 164
Using a cellular phone or a two- Caring for CDs • Depending on the type of CD-
way radio R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
• If the temperature inside the car is too
When a cellular phone is used inside not operate normally according to
high, open the car windows to venti- the manufacturing companies. In
the vehicle, noise may be produced late before using the system.
from the audio system. This does not such circumstances, continued
• It is illegal to copy and use use may cause malfunctions to
mean that something is wrong with MP3/WMA files without permission.
the audio equipment. In such a case, your audio system.
Use CDs that are created only by
try to operate mobile devices as far lawful means.
from the audio equipment as possible.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such ✽ NOTICE
as benzene and thinner, normal - Playing an Incompatible
CAUTION cleaners and magnetic sprays Copy Protected Audio CD
When using a communication made for analogue disc onto CDs. Some copy protected CDs, which do
system such as a cellular phone • To prevent the disc surface from not comply with international audio
or a radio set inside the vehicle, getting damaged, hold CDs by the CD standards (Red Book), may not
a separate external antenna edges or the center hole only. play on your car audio. Please note
must be fitted. When a cellular • Clean the disc surface with a piece that inabilities to properly play a
phone or a radio set is used of soft cloth before playback (wipe copy protected CD may indicate
with an internal antenna alone, it from the center to the outside that the CD is defective, not the CD
it may interfere with the vehi- edge). player.
cle's electrical system and • Do not damage the disc surface or
adversely affect safe operation attach pieces of sticky tape or
of the vehicle. paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
WARNING more than one CD at a time).
Do not use a cellular phone • Keep CDs in their cases after use to
while driving. Stop at a safe protect them from scratches or dirt.
location to use a cellular phone.
4 165
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) : WARNING
1. Song playing order : to • Do not stare at the screen
sequentially. while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
2. Folder playing order : of time could lead to traffic
❋ If no song file is contained in the accidents.
folder, that folder is not displayed. • Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents.
Use the phone feature after
parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
4 166
(Continued) CAUTION (Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the • Operating the device while • Turn on the car ignition before
screen is blank or no sound driving could lead to accidents using this device. Do not oper-
can be heard as these signs due to a lack of attention to ate the audio system for long
may indicate product malfunc- external surroundings. First periods of time with the ignition
tion. Continued use in such park the vehicle before operat- turned off as such operations
conditions could lead to acci- ing the device. may lead to battery discharge.
dents(fires, electric shock) or • Do not subject the device to
product malfunctions. • Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds severe shock or impact. Direct
• Do not touch the antenna dur- from outside of the vehicle. pressure onto the front side of
ing thunder or lightening as Driving in a state where exter- the monitor may cause dam-
such acts may lead to light- nal sounds cannot be heard age to the LCD or touch
ning induced electric shock. may lead to accidents. screen.
• Do not stop or park in park- • Pay attention to the volume set- • When cleaning the device,
ing-restricted areas to operate ting when turning the device make sure to turn off the
the product. Such acts could on. A sudden output of extreme device and use a dry and
lead to traffic accidents. volume upon turning the smooth cloth. Never use
• Use the system with the vehi- device on could lead to hearing tough materials, chemical
cle ignition turned on. impairment. (Adjust the volume cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
Prolonged use with the igni- to a suitable levels before turn- benzene, thinners, etc.) as
tion turned off could result in ing off the device.) such materials may damage
battery discharge. the device panel or cause
(Continued) color/quality deterioration.
(Continued)
4 167
(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmet-
ic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discol-
oration.
4 168
✽ NOTICE - USING THE (Continued) (Continued)

USB DEVICE • An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is • If you disconnect the external
• To use an external USB device, not recognizable. USB device during playback in
make sure the device is not con- • Depending on the condition of USB mode, the external USB
nected when starting up the the external USB device, the device can be damaged or may
vehicle. Connect the device after connected external USB device malfunction. Therefore, discon-
starting up. can be unrecognizable. nect the external USB device
• If you start the engine when the • When the formatted byte/sector when the audio is turned off or
USB device is connected, it may setting of External USB device in another mode. (e.g, Radio,
damage the USB device. (USB is not either 512BYTE or CD)
flashdrives are very sensitive to 2048BYTE, then the device will • Depending on the type and
electric shock.) not be recognized. capacity of the external USB
• If the engine is started up or • Use only a USB device format- device or the type of the files
turned off while the external USB ted to FAT 12/16/32. stored in the device, there is a
device is connected, the external • USB devices without USB I/F difference in the time taken for
USB device may not work. authentication may not be rec- recognition of the device.
• The System may not play unau- ognizable. • Do not use the USB device for
thenticated MP3 or WMA files. • Make sure the USB connection purposes other than playing
1) It can only play MP3 files with terminal does not come in con- music files.
the compression rate between tact with the human body or • Playing videos through the USB
8Kbps~320Kbps. other objects. is not supported.
2) It can only play WMA music • If you repeatedly connect or dis- • Use of USB accessories such as
files with the compression rate connect the USB device in a rechargers or heaters using USB
between 8Kbps~320Kbps. short period of time, it may I/F may lower performance or
• Take precautions for static elec- break the device. cause trouble.
tricity when connecting or dis- • You may hear a strange noise (Continued)
connecting the external USB when connecting or disconnect-
device. ing a USB device.
(Continued) (Continued)
4 169
(Continued) (Continued) ✽ NOTICE - USING THE

• If you use devices such as a USB • Some USB flash memory read-
hub purchased separately, the iPod® DEVICE
ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD, • Some iPod® models may not
vehicle’s audio system may not etc.) or external-HDD type
recognize the USB device. In that support communication proto-
devices can be unrecognizable. col and files may not properly
case, connect the USB device • Music files protected by DRM
directly to the multimedia termi- play.
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE- Supported iPod® models:
nal of the vehicle. MENT) are not recognizable.
• If the USB device is divided by - iPhone® 3GS/4
• The data in the USB memory - iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
logical drives, only the music files may be lost while using this
on the highest-priority drive are - iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
audio. Always back up impor- - iPod® classic
recognized by car audio. tant data on a personal storage
• Devices such as MP3 Player/ • The order of search or playback
device. of songs in the iPod® can be dif-
Cellular phone/Digital camera can • Please avoid using
be unrecognizable by standard ferent from the order searched
USB memory prod- in the audio system.
USB I/F can be unrecognizable. ucts which can be
• Charging through the USB may • If the iPod® is disabled due to its
used as key chains or own malfunction, reset the
not be supported in some mobile cellular phone acces-
devices. iPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®
sories as they could cause dam- manual)
• USB HDD or USB types liable to age to the USB jack. Please
connection failures due to vehicle • An iPod® may not operate nor-
make certain only to use plug mally on low battery.
vibrations are not supported. type connector products.
(i-stick type) (Continued)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
4 170
(Continued) (Continued) ✽ NOTICE - Bluetooth®

• Some iPod® devices, such as the • When connecting iPod® with the Wireless Technology
iPhone® , can be connected iPod® Power Cable, insert the
through the Bluetooth® Wireless connector to the multimedia
Technology interface. The socket completely. If not insert- • The Bluetooth® word mark and
device must have audio ed completely, communications logos are registered trademarks
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology between iPod® and audio may owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc.
capability (such as for stereo be interrupted. and any use of such marks is
headphone Bluetooth® Wireless • When adjusting the sound under license.
Technology). effects of the iPod® and the A Bluetooth® enabled call phone
The device can play, but it will audio system, the sound effects is required to use Bluetooth®
not be controlled by the audio of both devices will overlap and wireless technology.
system. might reduce or distort the • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
• To use iPod® features within the quality of the sound. phone compatibility can be
audio, use the cable provided • Deactivate (turn off) the equal- checked by visiting www.
upon purchasing an iPod® izer function of an iPod® when hyundaiusa.com and under the
device. adjusting the audio system’s CARING FOR YOUR CAR -
• Skipping or improper operation volume, and turn off the equal- BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILI-
may occur depending on the izer of the audio system when TY menu.
characteristics of your iPod®/ using the equalizer of an iPod®.
iPhone® device. • When not using iPod® with car
• If your iPhone® is connected to audio, detach the iPod® cable
both the Bluetooth® Wireless from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®
Technology and USB, the sound may remain in accessory mode,
may not be properly played. In and may not work properly.
your iPhone®, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)
4 171
✽ NOTICE - BEFORE USING ✽ NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS ✽ NOTICE -WHEN CON-

THE Bluetooth® FOR SAFE DRIVING NECTING A Bluetooth®
HANDSFREE PHONE
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
What is Bluetooth® ? that enables drivers to practice • Before connecting the head unit
safe driving. Connecting the head with the mobile phone, check to
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis- see that the mobile phone supports
tance wireless networking technol- unit with a Bluetooth® phone
allows the user to conveniently Bluetooth® features.
ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~ • Even if the phone supports
2.48GHz frequency to connect make and receive calls and use
contacts. Before using Bluetooth®, Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
various devices within a certain found during device searches if the
distance. carefully read the contents of this
user’s manual. phone has been set to hidden state
• Supported within PCs, external or the Bluetooth® power is turned
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, • Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv- off. Disable the hidden state or
various electronic devices, and turn on the Bluetooth® power
automotive environments, ing practices and result in acci-
dents. Refrain from excessive prior to searching/connecting with
Bluetooth® allows data to be trans- the Head unit.
mitted at high speeds without hav- operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged • After a Bluetooth phone has been
ing to use a connector cable. successfully paired, the phone will
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv- automatically connect when the
device which allows the user to ignition is turned on.
conveniently make phone calls ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time. • If you do not want automatic con-
with Bluetooth® mobile phones nection with your Bluetooth®
through the audio system. device, turn off the Bluetooth® fea-
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be sup- ture within your mobile phone.
ported in some mobile phones. To • The Handsfree call volume and
learn more about mobile device com- quality may differ depending on
patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com. the mobile phone.
(Continued)
4 172
(Continued) ✽ NOTICE - USING THE (Continued)

• Park the vehicle when connecting Voice Recognition - When driving on rugged and
the head unit with the mobile uneven roads
phone. • When using the voice recognition - During severe rain (heavy rains,
• Bluetooth® connection may feature, only commands listed windstorms)
become intermittently disconnect- within the user's manual are sup- • Phone related voice commands
ed in some mobile phones. Follow ported. can be used only when a
these steps to try again. • Be aware that during the opera- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
1. Within the mobile phone, turn tion of the voice recognition sys- device is connected.
the Bluetooth® function off/on tem, pressing any key other than • When making calls by stating a
and try again. the key terminate voice recog- name, the corresponding contact
2. Turn the mobile phone power nition mode. must be downloaded and stored
Off/On and try again. • For superior voice recognition within the audio system.
3. Completely remove the mobile performance, position the micro- • After downloading the Bluetooth®
phone battery, reboot, and then phone used for voice recognition Wireless Technology phone book,
again. above the head of the driver’s seat it takes some times to convert the
4. Reboot the Audio System and and maintain a proper position phone book data into voice infor-
try again. when saying commands. mation. During this time, voice
5. Delete all paired devices, pair • Within the following situations, recognition may not properly
and try again. voice recognition may not function operate.
• Handsfree call quality and volume properly due to background noises • Pronounce the voice commands
may differ depending on the which may be picked up by the naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
model of your mobile phone. overhead microphone. mal conversation.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the heating and air condi-
tioning fan blower speed is high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
4 173
The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
■ DOT LCD type audio ■ Color LCD type audio

Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Press the SETUP key Select [Phone]
1. If you CAN find “Audio Streaming” menu, 1. If you CAN find “Streaming Audio” menu,
(Go to 175 page) (Go to 244 page)
2. If you CANNOT find “Audio Streaming” menu,

(Go to 347 page)
2. If you CANNOT find “Streaming Audio” menu,
(Go to 395 page)
4 174
■ CD Player : AM1B2DMKN, AM1B3DMAN
4 175
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS • Each time the key is pressed, the 4. PHONE

mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
AND FUNCTIONS FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up the connection screen is displayed.
❈ Display and settings may differ screen will be displayed when
depending on the selected audio. [Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is dis- 5. PWR/VOL knob
played, use the TUNE knob or • Power : Turns power On/Off by
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the pressing the knob
desired mode. • Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
3. MEDIA
SEEK
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, 6. TRACK
My Music, BT Audio mode. • Radio Mode : Automatically search-
• Each time the key is pressed, the es for broadcast frequencies.
mode is changed in order of CD, • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
Audio.
onds): Moves to next or previous song
Audio Head Unit ❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop (file)
up screen will be displayed when
1. (EJECT) - Press and hold the key (over 0.8
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
• Ejects the disc. seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards
When the pop up screen is dis-
the current song.
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the • BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
2. RADIO
desired mode. previous song(file)
• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.
❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
4 176
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and • CD, USB, My Music mode

Menu pop up screen, the number - Shortly press the key (under 0.8
menu is selected. seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
9. DISP ❈ Press the SCAN key again to
• Each time the button is shortly continue listening to the current
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it song (file).
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off 11. SETUP
CLOCK
❈ Audio operation is maintained and • Shortly press the key (under 0.8
only the screen will be turned Off. seconds) : Moves to the Display,
In the screen Off state, press any Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-
CAT
key to turn the screen On again. ting modes.
7. FOLDER • Press and hold the key (over 0.8
• Radio Mode 10. SCAN seconds) : Move to the Time set-
- XM RADIO™ : Category Search • Radio Mode ting screen.
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder - Shortly press the key (under 0.8
Search seconds): Previews each broad- 12. MENU
cast for 5 seconds each. • Displays menus for the current mode.
8. 1 ~ 6 (Preset) - Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts 13. TUNE knob
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5 • Radio mode : Changes frequency
(channels) or receives saved fre-
seconds each. by turning the knob left/right.
quencies (channels)
❈ Press the SCAN key again to • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
continue listening to the current Searches songs (files) by turning
- 1 : Repeat frequency. the knob left/right.
- 2 : Random ❈ XM Radio™ does not support the
Preset scan feature.
4 177
❈ When the desired song is dis-

played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
14. DISC-IN LED

• LED that indicates whether a disc is
inserted
4 178
SETUP Mode Pop up Sound Settings

[Mode Pop up] Changes /
On Off
selection mode
Display Settings Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
• During On state, press the RADIO through TUNE knob or 2 key
or MEDIA key to display the mode Select menu through TUNE knob
Press the SETUP key Select [Display] change pop up screen.
through TUNE knob or 1 key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll] Set On / Off
• On : Maintains scroll
• Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4 179
Sound Settings Virtual Sound Speed Dependent Volume Control

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass, The PoewrBass, PowerTreble, and This feature is used to automatically
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and Surround can be set. control the volume level according to
Balance. the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Virtual Sound] Set menu
Select [Sound Settings] Select through TUNE knob Set On / Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
menu through TUNE knob Turn Off through TUNE knob in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob left/right to set TUNE knob
• PowerBass : This is a sound sys-
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the tem feature that provides live bass.
sound tone.
• PowerTreble : This is a sound system
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound feature that provides live tremble.
fader and balance.
• Surround : This is a sound system
• Default : Restores default settings. feature that provides surround
❈ Back : While adjusting values, re- sound.
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu. Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of TUNE knob
❈ May differ depending on the selected

audio.
4 180
Blue Link® Voice Volume Clock Settings Clock Settings

(for Blue Link equipped model)
® This menu is used to set the time.
SETUP
Press the CLOCK key Select [Clock] Select [Clock Settings] Set through
Sets the Blue Link® voice recognition through TUNE knob or 3 key TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
volume. Select menu through TUNE knob
❈ While using Blue Link® voice
recognition, turning the tune knob
will display the volume control
popup screen.
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
4 181
Calendar Settings Clock Display when Power is

This menu is used to set the date OFF
(MM/DD/YYYY). Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set
On / Off through TUNE knob
Select [Calendar Settings]] Set
through TUNE knob Press • On : Displays time/date on screen
TUNE knob • Off : Turn off.

focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through TUNE knob
4 182
SYSTEM SETTINGS Memory Information • Off : This mode is for expert users
Displays currently used memory and and omits some information during
total system memory. voice command operation. (When
Press the SETUP key Select using Expert mode, guidance
[System] through tune knob or 5 Select [Memory Information] OK instructions can be heard through
key Select menu through TUNE The currently used memory is dis- the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
knob played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side. Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through TUNE knob
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes. ❈ The system will reboot after the
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set language is changed.
through TUNE knob ❈ Language support by region
• On : This mode is for beginner - English, Francais, Espanol
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
4 183
RADIO : FM, AM OR XM Preset SEEK SCAN

Press the 1 ~ 6 key Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 • Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency seconds): The broadcast frequency
saved in the corresponding key. increases and previews each
• Pressing and holding the key (over broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding scanning all frequencies, returns
the desired key from 1 ~ 6 and plays the current broadcast fre-
will save the currently playing quency.
SEEK broadcast to the selected key and • Pressing and holding the key (over
SEEK
Press the TRACK key sound a BEEP. 0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 for 5 seconds each.
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically search- Selecting through manual
es for the next frequency. search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10MHz
4 184
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or 1 key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
4 185
XM RADIO ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, • The display will indicate the catego-
channels are changed within the ry menus, highlight the category
current category. that the current channel belongs to.
Using XM satellite™ Radio • In the Category List Mode, press
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3 CAT
SCAN the FOLDER key to navigate cat-
month complimentary period of XM egory list.
Satellite™ Radio. XM provides Press the SCAN key
• Press the tune knob to select the
access to over 130 channels of • Shortly pressing the key: Previews
lowest channel in the highlighted
music, information, and entertain- each broadcast for 5 seconds
category.
ment programming. each
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
category, then the “CATEGORY”
continue listening to the current
icon is displayed at the top of the
frequency
screen.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category. Preset
Press the 1 ~ 6 key
Category • Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
SEEK CAT
Press the FOLDER key Set through frequency saved in the correspon-
Press the SEEK
TRACK key the TUNE knob ding key.
• Shortly pressing the key: select • Pressing and holding the key (over
previous or next channel. 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
• Pressing and holding the key (over will save the current broadcast to
0.8 seconds): continuously move to the selected key and sound a
previous or next channel. BEEP.
4 186
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the
channel number or scrolls category
list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the MENU key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or 1 key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the

current song.
4 187
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Repeat

Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / While song (file) is playing 1 RPT
(RPT) key
iPod® / My Music
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
Press the MEDIA key to change the • To repeat one song (Press the key):
<USB>
mod mode in order of CD ➟ Repeats the current song.
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
Audio. screen
The folder/file name is displayed on • To repeat folder (pressing twice):
the screen. repeats all files within the current
folder.
<My Music> ❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn
off repeat.
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted. Random
<Audio CD> ❈ The USB music is automatically While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
played when a USB is connected. (RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Press the key): Plays all
songs in random order.
<CD MP3>
4 188
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on • Pressing and holding the key (over Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
screen 0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song. Mode
CAT
• Folder Random (Press the key) : While song (file) is playing While file is playing FOLDER
SEEK
Plays all files within the current fold- TRACK key (Folder Up) key
er in random order. • Shortly pressing the key : Plays the • Searches the next folder.
iPod® mode: ALB RDM on screen next song. While file is playing CAT
FOLDER
• Album Random (Press the key) : • Pressing and holding the key (over (Folder Down) key
Plays all files within albums of the 0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song. • Searches the parent folder.
current category in random order.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
MP3 CD, USB, iPod® mode: ALL the TUNE knob, the first file
RDM on screen Scan
within the selected folder will be
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays While song (file) is playing SCAN played.
all files in random order. key ❈ In iPod® mode, moves to the
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn • Shortly pressing the key : Scans all Parent Folder.
off repeat. songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
Searching Songs (File)
Changing Song/File ❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off. • Turning TUNE knob : Searches
SEEK
While song (file) is playing for songs (files)
key
TRACK
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod® mode. • Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the selected song (file).
current song from the beginning.
SEEK
❈ If the TRACK key is pressed
again within 3 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
4 189
MENU : Audio CD Information MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Random, through the TUNE knob or 3 to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Information features. key to display information of the cur- Folder Repeat, All Random,
rent song. Information, and Copy features.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT Repeat
key to repeat the current song. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
❈ Press RPT again to turn off. through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
Random ❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
4 190
Folder Random ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off MENU : iPod®
info display. In iPod® mode, press the MENU key
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM to set the Repeat, Album Random, All
key to randomly play songs within the Copy Random, Information and Search fea-
tures.
current folder. Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off. through the TUNE knob or 6
key.
Folder Repeat • This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT] the copied Music in My Music
through the TUNE knob or 3 mode.
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder. ❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off. asking you whether to cancel Repeat
copying is displayed.
All Random ❈ If another media is connected or through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM] inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) key to repeat the current song.
through the TUNE knob or 4 key while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled. ❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
to randomly play all songs within the
CD. ❈ Music will not be played while
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off. copying is in progress. Album Random
Press the MENU key Set [ Alb.RDM]
Information through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM key.
Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Plays albums within the currently
through the TUNE knob or 5 playing category in random order.
key to display information of the cur- ❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.
rent song.
4 191
All Random
Press the MENU key Set [
A.RDM] through the TUNE knob
or 3 key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or 4
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
info display.
Search
Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
key.
Displays iPod® category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is
MENU key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
4 192
MENU : My Music Mode Random Delete

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
In My Music mode, press the MENU through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or 4
key to set the Repeat, Random, key. key.
Information, Delete, Delete All, and Plays all songs in random order. • Deletes currently playing file
Delete Selection features. ❈ Press RDM again to turn random off. In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
Information
key.
Repeat song.
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT info display. ➀ Select the file you wish to delete
key. by using the TUNE knob.
Repeats the currently playing song. ➁ Press the MENU key and select
the delete menu to delete the
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat selected file.
off.
4 193
Delete All ✽ NOTICE - USING THE My AUX

Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All] Music Feature AUX is used to play external MEDIA
through the TUNE knob or 5 key. • Even if memory is available, a currently connected with the AUX
Deletes all songs of My Music. maximum of 6,000 songs can be terminal.
stored. AUX mode will automatically start
• The same song can be copied up to when an external device is connect-
Delete Selection 1,000 times. ed with the AUX terminal.
• Memory info can be checked in
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel] the System menu of Setup. If an external device is connected,
through the TUNE knob or 6 you can also press the MEDIA key to
key. change to AUX mode.
Songs within My Music are selected ❈ AUX mode cannot be started
and deleted. unless there is an external device
➀ Select the songs you wish to connected to the AUX terminal.
delete from the list.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE AUX

➁ After selecting, press the key and Fully insert the AUX cable into the
select the delete menu. AUX terminal for use.
4 194
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
AUDIO Technology Audio Streaming : Press Technology audio features
the SETUP key Select [Phone] • Play / Stop
through the tune knob or 4 key
What is Bluetooth® Wireless Select [Audio Streaming] through Press the TUNE knob to play and
Technology? the TUNE knob Set On / Off pause the current song.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows ■ Type A
devices to be connected in a short dis- Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
tance, including hands-free devices, Technology Audio
stereo headsets, wireless remote con-
trollers, etc. For more information, visit • Press the MEDIA key to change the
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
website at www.Bluetooth.com ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start ■ Type B
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless playing.
Technology audio features
❈ Audio may not automatically start
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology playing in some mobile phones.
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first ❈ The play / pause functions may
pair and connect the Bluetooth® not be supported in some mobile
Wireless Technology mobile phone. phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On .
4 195
PHONE PHONE • Check call history and making call

➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless Making a call using the remote controller .
Technology phone features Steering-wheel mount controls
➁ The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless ➂ Press the key again to con-
Technology phone, you must first nect a call to the selected number.
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• Redialing the most recently called
• If the mobile phone is not paired or number
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone ➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
is paired or connected, the guid- the key on the steering
ance screen will be displayed. remote controller.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- ➁ The most recently called number
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® 1) button : Activates voice recog- is redialed.
Wireless Technology phone will be nition.
automatically connected. Even if 2) button : Places and transfers ❈ If call history does not exist, a
you are outside, the first Bluetooth® calls. screen asking whether to down-
Wireless Technology phone will be 3) button : Ends calls or cancels load call history is displayed. (The
automatically connected once you functions. download feature may not be sup-
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If ported in some mobile phones)
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the
power to OFF.
4 196
✽ NOTICE - PAIRING • If you entered the Passkey within

THROUGH [PHONE] the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
SETUP device
• The Bluetooth® and Voice (Go to page 4-200)
Recognition Manual is provided in • If the following screen is displayed
two versions due to software ver- and a 6-digit passkey is checked and
sion differences. confirmed within the Bluetooth®
• Before reading the manual, check Wireless Technology device
the following. (Go to page 4-220)
• Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
• From your Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4 197
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology Device WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
What is Bluetooth® Wireless that may lead to an accident,
Technology Pairing? severe personal injury, and
Pairing refers to the process of syn- death. The driver’s primary
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless responsibility is in the safe and
Technology phone or device with the legal operation of a vehicle, and
car audio system for connection. use of any handheld devices,
Pairing is necessary to connect and other equipment, or vehicle sys-
use the Bluetooth® Wireless tems which take the driver’s
Technology feature. eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
4 198
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing PHONE Key / Key

Technology Device on the Steering Remote
Controller
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing? When No Devices have been
Pairing refers to the process of syn- Paired
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless 1. Press the PHONE key or the
Technology phone or device with the 1) Car Name : Name of device as
key on the steering remote con- shown when searching from your
car audio system for connection. troller. The following screen is dis-
Pairing is necessary to connect and Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
played. device
use the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature. 2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless

Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen. 4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Here, enter the
passkey “0000” to pair your
device with the car audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
4 199
✽ NOTICE Pairing through [PHONE] ✽ NOTICE

Setup • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehi-
cle are as follows. Some features
Press the SETUP key Select may not be supported depending
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] on your Bluetooth® Wireless
Select TUNE knob Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology calls
devices are paired but none are cur- - Operations during a call (Switch to
rently connected, pressing the Private, Switch to call waiting,
PHONE key or the key on the MIC on/off)
steering wheel displays the following - Downloading Call History
screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a - Downloading Mobile Contacts
new device or select [Connect] to 1. The following steps are the same - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connect a previously paired device. as those described in the section device auto connection
"When No Devices have been - Bluetooth Audio Streaming
Paired" on the previous page. • Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
4 200
• Bluetooth related operations are • After pairing is complete, a con- From the paired phone list, select the
possible only with devices that sup- tacts download request is sent once device you want to connect and
port Handsfree or audio features, to the mobile phone. Some mobile select [Connect].
such as a Bluetooth® Wireless phones may require confirmation
Technology mobile phone or a upon receiving a download
Bluetooth audio device. request, ensure your mobile phone
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless accepts the connection. Refer to
Technology device becomes discon- your phones user’s manual for
nected due to being out of commu- additional information regarding
nication range, turning the device phone pairing and connections.
OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices are automati- Connecting a Device
cally searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due Press the SETUP key Select
to communication errors between [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
the car Handsfree and the
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
4 201
Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select ✽ NOTICE

the phone you want to switch to the Priority icon will be displayed when
highest priority, then select [Change the selected phone is set as a priority
What is Priority? Priority] button from the Menu. The phone.
It is possible to pair up to five selected device will be changed to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the highest priority.
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
4 202
Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device ✽ NOTICE

• When deleting the currently con-
Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select nected device, the device will auto-
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
From the paired phone list, select the From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and device you want to delete and select
select [Disconnect] button. [Delete] button.
4 203
USING Bluetooth® Wireless ✽ NOTICE Answering Calls

Technology • If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which Answering a Call
Phone Menu Screen asks to download call history data. Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
• If you select the [Contacts] button Wireless Technology device connect-
but there is no contacts data ed will display the following screen.
Phone Menus stored, a prompt is displayed To accept the call, press key on
With a Bluetooth® Wireless which asks to download contacts the steering wheel while the call is
Technology device connected, press data. incoming.
the PHONE key to display the Phone • This feature may not be supported
menu screen. in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s

name when the incoming caller is
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used saved within your contacts
contacts saved for easy access 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
2) Call History : Device the call histo- incoming number
ry list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
4 204
✽ NOTICE Favorites Call History

• When an incoming call pop-up is Press the PHONE key Select
displayed, most Audio and [Favorites]
Press the PHONE key Select [Call
SETUP mode features are dis-
History]
abled. Only the call volume will
operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private 1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
mode. call upon selection
A list of incoming, outgoing and
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con- missed calls is displayed.
tacts be saved as favorite.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile phones.
✽ NOTICE
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
• To save Favorite, contacts should will not be saved in the call history list.
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not • Calling through the call history is
be automatically updated if the not possible when there is no call
contact has been updated in the history stored or a Bluetooth®
phone. To update Favorites, delete Wireless Technology phone is not
the Favorite and create a new connected.
Favorite. • Up to 20 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not saved.
4 205
Contacts ✽ NOTICE • It is not possible to begin down-

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your loading a contact list when the con-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology tact download feature has been
Press the PHONE key Select turned off within the Bluetooth®
phone can be downloaded into the
[Contacts] Wireless Technology device. In
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot addition, some devices may require
be edited or deleted on the phone. device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
• Mobile phone contacts are man- If downloading does not normally
aged separately for each paired occur, check the Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Wireless Technology device set-
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- tings or the screen state.
tacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the • The contacts download feature
The list of saved phone book entries Bluetooth® Wireless Technology may not be supported in some
is displayed. device has been disconnected. mobile phones. For more informa-
(However, the contacts and call tion of supported Bluetooth®
history saved to the phone will be devices and function support, refer
NOTE: deleted if a paired phone is delet- to your phone’s user manual.
Find a contact in an alphabetical ed.)
order, press the MENU key. • It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
4 206
Bluetooth® Wireless Viewing Paired Phone List 1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :

Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select Connect/ disconnects currently
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
Pairing a New Device selected phone to highest connec-
Press the SETUP key Select tion priority
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] 3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen

devices can be paired with the audio
system.
This feature is used to view mobile
For more information, refer to the phones that have been paired with
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- the audio system. Upon selecting a
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
Technology. played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Connection” section
within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
4 207
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Audio Streaming

LOADING CONTACTS Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect- As the contacts are downloaded When Audio Streaming is turned on,
ed phone can be downloaded. from the mobile phone, a download you can play music files saved in your
progress bar is displayed. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device through the audio system.
✽ NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 208
Outgoing Volume Turning Bluetooth System Off ✽ NOTICE

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Technology back on, go to SETUP
Off] [Phone] and select “Yes”.
Once Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology is turned off, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-

going volume level.
✽ NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the TRACK key.
4 209
VOICE RECOGNITION If prompt feedback is in [ON], then 4) Do not use special characters
the system will say “Please say a (e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
Using Voice Recognition command after the beep (BEEP)” “ampersand &”).
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] 5) If a name is not recognized from
mode, then the system will only say the contact list, change it to a
Starting Voice Recognition “(BEEP)” more descriptive name (e.g., use
Shortly press the key on the • To change Prompt Feedback “Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
steering wheel. Say a command. [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] Joe”).
[Prompt Feedback]
Skipping Prompt Messages
✽ NOTICE While prompt message is being stat-
For proper recognition, say the com- ed Shortly press the key on the
mand after the voice instruction and steering remote controller
beep tone. The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
Contact List Best Practices After the “beep”, say the voice com-
1) Do not store single-name entries mand.
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names Re-starting Voice Recognition
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob While system waits for a command
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”). Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or The command wait state is immedi-
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”). ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use command.
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4 210
ENDING VOICE Voice Recognition and Phone

RECOGNITION Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
While Voice Recognition is operating System may have difficulty under-
Press and hold the key on the standing some accents or uncom-
steering remote controller mon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
✽ NOTICE place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
• While using voice command, maximize the use of Voice
pressing any steering wheel control Recognition, consider these guide-
or a different key will end voice lines when storing contacts:
command.
• When the system is waiting for a • Do not store single-name entries
voice command, say “cancel” or (e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
“end” to end voice command. always use full names (including first
• When the system is waiting for a and last names) for these contacts
voice command, press and hold the • Do not use special characters (e.g.,
key on the steering wheel to '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
end voice command.
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance
Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be
sure to say the name exactly as it is
entered in the contacts list
4 211
Illustration on using voice commands • End voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): (BEEP)
Please say a command after Contacts

the beep (BEEP) Beep~
More Help Contacts.

Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, XM, Media, CD, USB,
Aux, My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call Cancel
History or Contacts. Please say a command.
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
• Skipping Voice Recognition

Please say a... while guidance message is being stated
Shortly pressing the (BEEP)

key (under 0.8 seconds)
More Help
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, XM, Media, CD, USB,
Aux, My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Contacts. Please say a command.
4 212
Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be • When listening to the radio, displays the
used anywhere in the system. next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
used within the current mode. Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts the most recently played radio screen.
Ex) Call John Smith • When currently listening to the FM radio,
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- maintains the current state.
mands. After saying this command, say • When listening to a different mode, displays
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial the most recently played FM screen.
Number” execute corresponding functions. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen. AM Displays the AM screen.
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
(Call by Name) this command, say the name of a contact saved in FM Preset 1~6.
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call. AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
this command, you can say the number that frequency.
you want to call. AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
Redial Connects the most recently called number. frequency.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice XM (Satellite) • When currently listening to the XM, main-
recognition and Bluetooth® connections. tains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played XM screen.
4 213

XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen. My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
0~255 Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
Media Moves to the most recently played media device.
screen. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod® Plays iPod® music.
4 214
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
FM, AM radio operation used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre- broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
quencies with superior reception and saves in Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Presets 1~6. Information Displays the information of the current broad-
Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast. cast.
Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 215
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
Audio CD operation ing USB and MP3 CD operation

Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Randomly plays the files within the current
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen- folder.
tial order. All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Repeat Repeats the current track. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen- order.
tial order. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10 Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
seconds each. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current Next File Plays the next file.
track. Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
4 216
• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod® • My Music Commands: Commands available during
operation My Music operation

Random Randomly plays the songs within the current Random Randomly plays all saved files.
category. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen- order.
Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
Information Displays the information screen of the current onds each.
song. Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
4 217
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:

Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone opera-
tion Command Operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
4 218
Pairing PHONE Key / Key 2. Select [OK] button to enter the [Non SSP supported device]
on the Steering Remote Pair Phone screen. (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
Controller 4. After a few moments, a screen is
entered.
When No Devices have been
Paired Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to
pair your Bluetooth® Wireless
1. Press the PHONE key or the Technology device with the car
key on the steering remote con- audio system.
troller. The following screen is dis- 1) Car Name : Name of device as
played. shown when searching from your [SSP supported device]
device 4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device Hear, check the passkey on your
device and confirm.
car audio system.

4 219

new device or select [Connect] to 1. The following steps are the same - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connect a previously paired device. as those described in the section device auto connection
ed at a time.
are supported.
4 220
• Bluetooth related operations are • After pairing is complete, a con- Connecting a Device
possible only with devices that sup- tacts download request is sent once
port Handsfree or audio features, to the mobile phone. Some mobile
such as a Bluetooth® Wireless phones may require confirmation Press the SETUP key Select
Technology mobile phone or a upon receiving a download [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
Technology devices are automati-
currently connected
cally searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due 2) Paired Phone : Device that is
to communication errors between paired but not connected
be restored.
4 221
From the paired phone list, select the Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select
device you want to connect and the phone you want to switch to the
select [Connect]. highest priority, then select [Change
What is Priority? Priority] button from the Menu. The
paired phones.

4 222
✽ NOTICE Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device

Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority
Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
phone.
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
4 223
✽ NOTICE
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
4 224

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology which asks to download contacts the steering wheel while the call is
device connected, press the PHONE data. incoming.
key to display the Phone menu screen. • This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
manual.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used name when the incoming caller is
contacts saved for easy access saved within your contacts
2) Call History : Displays call history 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
list screen incoming number
list
settings.
4 225

History]
operate.
phones.
✽ NOTICE
be downloaded.
4 226

The list of saved phone book entries Bluetooth® Wireless Technology may not be supported in some
is displayed. device has been disconnected. mobile phones. For more informa-
(However, the contacts and call tion of supported Bluetooth®
history saved to the phone will be devices and function support, refer
NOTE: to your phone’s user manual.
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
Find a contact in an alphabetical ed.)
order, press the MENU key.
• It is possible to download contacts
status bar.
4 227

selected phone
screen

system.
Technology. played.
Technology Connection” section with-
in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
4 228
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Auto Download (Contacts)

• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Auto Download]
ture.
• The contacts for only the connect- As the contacts are downloaded This feature is used to automatically
ed phone can be downloaded. from the mobile phone, a download download mobile contacts entries
progress bar is displayed. once a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is connected.
✽ NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con- ✽ NOTICE
tacts, the previous corresponding • The Auto Download feature will
data is deleted. download mobile contacts entries
• This feature may not be supported every time the phone is connected.
in some mobile phones. The download time may differ
• Voice Recognition may not oper- depending on the number of saved
ate while contacts are being down- contacts entries and the communi-
loaded. cation state.
• Before downloading contacts, first
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
4 229
Audio Streaming Outgoing Volume Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
When Audio Streaming is turned on, Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
you can play music files saved in going volume level.
device through the audio system. ✽ NOTICE
SEEK
✽ NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
4 230
[Prompt Feedback]
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”). ately ended and the beep will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use mand.
4 231

command.
end voice command.
4 232
Illustration on using voice commands More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.
• Starting voice command. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod®'.
Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like
the beep (BEEP) Beep~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
More Help manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. • End voice command.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
(BEEP)
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". Contacts
manual.
Please say a command after the beep. Contacts.
to call.
Cancel
Shortly pressing the (BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep)
More Help
4 233
Voice Command List

Ex) Call “John Smith” • When currently listening to the FM radio,
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial the most recently played FM screen.
Number” execute corresponding functions. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
4 234

CD Plays the music saved in the CD. Mute Mutes the sound.
iPod® Plays iPod® music. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4 235

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
present and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad- Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving cast.
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 236

tial order. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Repeat Repeats the current track. order.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen- Repeat Repeats the current file.
tial order. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Information Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
4 237

tial order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
4 238

Command Function
4 239
Blue Link® The Blue Link® button offers ➀ (Blue Link® Center)
access to enhanced navigation serv- Makes requests for Blue Link® serv-
ices. The " " button offers ice related inquiries and consulta-
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated immediate contact to SOS tions.
customer values through a Emergency Assistance. A detailed
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides list of commands is available in the A call is connected to the Blue Link®
consumers with fast and reliable IT Blue Link User's Manual. service center employee.
technology. As consumers’ lifestyles Pressing the key again will end the
become more and more mobile in call.
thanks to remarkable advances in Using Rear View Mirror Buttons This feature does not operate when
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall Pressing the Blue Link® buttons you are on a Bluetooth® phone call.
wireless telecommunication, new located on the rear view mirror will
lifestyle patterns demand seamless allow you to make service required
connection between one’s office, inquiries, POI info searches, and ➁ (Blue Link® for POI)
home, outdoors and automobiles. emergency rescues by connecting to • Blue Link® for Voice command
Blue Link® is Hyundai's innovative the Blue Link® Center. Starts Blue Link® voice command.
telematics solution that combines Such features can be used only after Voice receiving voice guidance,
safety, service, and infotainment into subscribing to the Blue Link® service. shortly press the button to convert to
a complete package. It works to both voice command mode. Press and
help simplify Hyundai owners' lives hold the button to end voice com-
and reduce distracted driving. The mand.
Blue Link® " " button offers
access to a voice-response menu of
services. • TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
“Navigate to” voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
4 240
2. Save Destination 5. Voice Guidance

“Save Destination” VR command is “Voice Guidance” VR command CAUTION
used to assign a voice tag to the last allows the user to mute/unmute the • You cannot talk simultaneous-
downloaded destination and store it Turn by Turn(TBT) direction ly on the Bluetooth® phone
in a destination directory. announcements. call and a Blue Link® services
phone all.
NOTE: 6. Suspend Route • While on a Bluetooth® call,
pressing the key or
The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup- “Suspend Route” VR command key will display a message
ports the store of ten(10) destina- allows the user to suspend and indicating that you are cur-
tions in the TBT destinations pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid- rently on a call.
directory. ance while in the guidance mode.
• A message will be displayed if
you receive a Bluetooth® call
3. Route Preview 7. Resume Route while already on a Blue Link®
“Route Preview” VR command allows “Resume Route” VR command call. To answer the incoming
the user to preview the route instruc- allows the user to resume Turn by call, press the button on
tions (upcoming maneuver instruc- Turn(TBT) route guidance. the steering wheel controls.
tions) at any time during the route You will not hear a ring to alert
guidance. you that there is an incoming
➂ (Blue Link® for SOS) call.
In the case of an emergency,
4. Destinations List requests for help to the Blue Link®
“Destinations List” VR command center.
allows the user to preview and delete Call is connected to the Blue Link®
the stored destinations with their emergency rescue center. Pressing
associated voice tags in the Turn by the key again will end the call.
Turn destinations directory. If you are already on a Bluetooth®
phone call, the call will end to connect
you to the Blue Link® Emergency
Rescue Center.
4 241
Eco Coach • What is My Eco MPG?

Your actual fuel economy average
over 2.5 minutes.
This value is also shown in bar graph
as your “now” rating.
• What are Eco Rewards?

• What is Eco Coach? If you beat the average (the EPA or
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com- community), you will receive an Eco
pares your fuel economy against the Reward point.
government tested average (EPA) or See your my Hyundai web page for
other similar Hyundai models (com- more information.
munity), based on your preference.
Each month, or after every tank fill [Eco Driving] will not operate if the
up, Eco Coach rates your extended vehicle ignition is not turned on.
average and gives you a reward star Please operate with the ignition
if you best the average. turned on.
See your My Hyundai web page for
more information.
• What does the bar graph and hori-

zontal line mean?
The horizontal line is adjusted once
per month or at each tank full, based
on your preference; it represents the
EPA combined average or communi-
ty average fuel economy target.
4 242
Turn by Turn ❈ For information on specific

The Turn by Turn feature can be used Blue Link® operations, please refer
through Blue Link®. to the Blue Link® User's Manual
that was provided with your vehi-
cle.
1. Direction Indicator Image

2. Remaining distance until next point
3. The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi

5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name

5. Distance to destination
6. Expected Time Arrival
4 243
■ CD Player : AM9B2DMKN, AM943DMAN
❋ logo will be shown if the HD RadioTM feature is supported.
4 244
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS 2. RADIO SEEK

6. TRACK
AND FUNCTIONS • Convert to Radio mode. • When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-
• Each time the key is pressed,the onds)
Audio Head Unit mode is changed in order of FM1, - Radio mode : plays previous/next
(for HD RADIOTM equipped model) FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3. frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
3. MEDIA modes : changes the track,
• Convert to Media Mode Song(file)
• Each time the key is pressed, the • When pressed and held (Over 0.8
mode is changed in order of CD, seconds)
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT - Radio mode : continuously
Audio. changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the
4. PHONE (for Bluetooth® Wireless current frequency.
Technology equipped model) - Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
• Converts to Phone mode modes : rewinds or fast forwards the
❈ When a phone is not connected, track or file
the connection screen is dis- - During a Handsfree call, controls
played. the call volume.
1. (EJECT) HD/CAT
• Ejects the disc. 5. PWR/VOL knob 7. FOLDER
• Power : Press to turn power • HD RADIO™ : Channel Change
on/off. • XM RADIO™ : Category Search
• Volume : Turn left/right to control • CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search
volume. Folder
4 245
11. SETUP Audio Head Unit

Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : turn to change broad-
cast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
8. DISP
13. DISC-IN LED CAT
• Turns the monitor display on/off. 15. FOLDER
inserted. • XM RADIO™ : Category Search
9. CLOCK • CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search
Displays the time/date/day. 14. RESET Folder
• Forced system termination and
10. SCAN system restart.
• Radio Mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes
: previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
4 246
Steering remote controller 3. SEEK 4. MODE

• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 sec- • Each time this key is pressed, the
onds) mode is changed in order of
- Radio mode : searches broadcast FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3
frequencies saved to presets. ➟CD➟USB or iPod®➟AUX➟My
Music➟BT Audio
- M e d i a ( C D / U S B / i Po d ®/ M y
Music/BT Audio) modes : • If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
changes the track, file or chapter. modes will be disabled.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds)
5.
- Radio mode, automatically search-
es broadcast frequencies and • When pressed shortly
channels - Starts voice recognition
1. VOLUME - Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) - When selecting during a voice
• Used to control volume. modes, rewinds or fast forwards prompt, stops the prompt and
the track or song(file) converts to voice command wait-
- BT Audio mode may not be sup- ing state
2. MUTE
ported in some mobile phones. • When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
• Mutes audio volume. onds)
- Ends voice recognition
4 247
6. 7.
• When pressed shortly • Ends phone call
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming
call screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
onds)
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Handsfree call, switches call back
to mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Handsfree is connected)
4 248
HD RadioTM Technology HD RadioTM signal delay

(for HD RADIO TM
equipped model) To overcome the delay that digital
Adjacent to traditional main stations systems inherently produce, HD
are extra local FM channels. These RadioTM technology first uses the
HD Radio Technology manufactured HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, audio signal of the analog broadcast-
under license from iBiquity Digital original music as well as deep cuts ing when you tune to an AM station
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign into traditional genre. or to the main channel of a FM sta-
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD tion. After that, the system will blend
Radio, and “Arc” logos are propri- from analog to digital signal.
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp. Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Normally, this blending is very
Technology enables local radio sta- smooth. If you experience a skip in
tions to broadcast a clean digital sig- program content of several seconds,
nal. AM sounds like today’s FM and the radio station has not implement-
FM sounds like a CD. ed HD RadioTM broadcasting correct-
ly. This is not a problem with your
audio system.
Due to the fact that sub channels are

only broadcasting digital, blending
from analog to digital signal is not pos-
sible if you tune to a sub channel. In
this case playback of the sub channel
starts after several seconds, this is a
Program Service Data: Contributes normal function.
to the superior user experience of
HD Radio Technology. Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3
Channel Guide, and other relevant
data streams.
4 249
RADIO MODE 1. Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.
Basic Mode Screen
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. Info
Displays broadcast information.
6. HD
Changes HD Radio channels.
7. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
4 250
HD RADIO MODE 1. Mode Display 8. Info

(for HD RADIOTM equipped model) Displays currently operating mode. Displays broadcast information.
Basic Mode Screen 2. HD Channel 9. HD

Displays information for the currently Changes HD Radio channels.
playing HD Radio broadcast.
10. A.Store
3. Song Information Automatically saves frequencies with
Displays the album, artist, and title superior reception to Preset buttons.
information.
4. Frequency
5. HD Radio Broadcast Station

Displays the HD Radio broadcast
station name.
6. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
7. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
4 251
Switching to Radio Mode Searching Radio Frequencies Using Radio Mode
Pressing the RADIO key will change Using Seek Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
the operating mode in order of FM1 SEEK
Press the TRACK key to play the Press the Preset button to display
➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3 previous/next frequency. the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within Using TUNE
SETUP [Display], then pressing the
RADIO key will display the Radio
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
Pop-up Mode screen. desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by
200kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by
10kHz
Press the 1 ~ 6 buttons to play

the desired preset.
✽ NOTICE
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select. While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current frequency to the selected
preset.
4 252
Auto Store Listening to HD Radio Changing HD Radio stations

Press the A.Store button to automati- Stations
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons. Press the button to change
HD Radio Technology is a digital HD Radio station.
radio technology used by AM and
✽ NOTICE FM radio station to transmit audio
and data via a digital signal in con- Viewing Station Information
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Cancel] button again will junction with their analog signals.
cancel Auto Store and restore the
previous frequency.
Scan
Press the SCAN key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the SCAN key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5 Press the Info button to view sta-
seconds each. tion information.
While listening to the radio, the HD
Once scan is complete, the previous Radio icon will become displayed if
frequency will be restored. receiving an HD Radio broadcast.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the SCAN key will cancel the scan
operation.
4 253
XM RADIO™ MODE • If you are driving in a valley where NOTE:

the surrounding hills or peaks There may also be additional
block the signal from the satellite. unforeseen circumstances leading
Features of your vehicle • If you are driving on a mountain to reception problems with the XM
Satellite radio reception road where is the signal blocked by satellite™ radio signal.
mountains. Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when start-
ing XM Radio™.
SATELLITE1
You may experience difficulties in SATELLITE2
receiving XM satellite™ radio signals
in the following situations. • If you are driving in an area with tall
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a trees that block the signal (30 ft.
covered parking area. /10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
• If you are driving beneath the top
est.
level of a multi-level freeway.
• The signal can become weak in
• If you are driving under a bridge.
some areas that are not covered
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi- by the XM repeater network.
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
4 254
XM RADIO™ MODE 1. Mode Display

Basic Mode Screen
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
number [1] ~ [6].
4. Preset Display
4 255
Using SEEK Searching Categories Selecting Presets/Saving

Press the
SEEK
TRACK key to play the Select the category by using the
Presets
previous/next channel. HD/CAT
FOLDER
CAT
( FOLDER ) key and press Press the Preset button to display
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, the TUNE knob to select. the broadcast information for the
channels are changed within the channel saved to each button.
current category.
Using Tune
desired channel.
SCAN
Press the SCAN key to scan all
channels with superior reception for Channels for the selected category
are played. Press the 1 ~ 6 buttons to play
5 seconds each. the desired preset.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored. ✽ NOTICE
During Scan, pressing the SCAN While listening to a channel you
key again will cancel the scan opera- want to save as a preset, press and
tion and restore the previously hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset
played channel. buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
If the “Category” icon is displayed, the current channel to the selected
channels are changed within the cur- preset.
rent category.
4 256
✽ NOTICE - USING CDs (Continued) (Continued)

• This device has been manufac- • Clean fingerprints and dust off • Do not use abnormally shaped
tured to be compatible with soft- the disc surface (coated side) with discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-
ware bearing the following logo a soft cloth. gon-shaped) as such discs could
marks. • The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs lead to malfunctions.
• Do not clean discs with chemical attached with labels may result in • If the disc is straddled on the disc
solutions, such as record sprays, disc slot jams or difficulties in disc slot without removal for 10 sec-
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq- removal. Such discs may also onds, the disc will automatically
uids, benzene, or thinners. result in noise while playing. be re-inserted into the disc player.
• After using a disc, put the disc • Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may • Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
back in its original case to prevent not properly operate depending ported. Other discs may result in
disc scratches. on the disc manufacturer, produc- recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-
• Hold discs by their edges or with- tion method and the record R, CDs with labels)
in the center hole to prevent dam- method as used by the user. If
ages to disc surfaces. problems persist, trying using a
• Do not introduce foreign sub- different CD as continued use
stances into the disc insert/eject slot. may result in malfunctions.
Introducing foreign substances • The performance of this product
could damage the device interior. may differ depending on the CD-
• Do not insert two discs simultane- RW Drive Software.
ously. • Copy-protected CDs such as S-
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, type CDs may not function in the
differences in disc reading and device. DATA discs cannot be
playing times may occur depend- played. (However, such discs may
ing on the disc manufacturer, pro- still operate but will do so abnor-
duction method and the recording mally.)
method as used by the user. (Continued)
(Continued)
4 257
MEDIA MODE Title Icon

When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Pressing the MEDIA key will change Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
the operating mode in order of device is connected or a CD is
CD➟USB(iPod®)➟AUX➟My Music ➟ inserted, the corresponding mode
BT Audio. icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
CD
iPod®
USB
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within AUX
MEDIA key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽ NOTICE
• The media mode pop up screen
can be displayed only when there
are two or more media modes
turned on.
4 258
AUDIO CD MODE 4. Play/Pause

Changes the play/pause state.
Basic Mode Screen
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
6. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
1. Mode
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func- 9. List
tion. Moves to the list screen.
3. Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
4 259
Using Audio CD Mode Changing Tracks Selecting from the List

SEEK
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks Press the TRACK key to move to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
the previous or next track. search for the desired track.
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing. ✽ NOTICE
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK key after the
track has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current track
from the beginning.
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK key before
the track has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
track. Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
play. Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
✽ NOTICE SEEK
TRACK key (over 0.8 seconds) to
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup- rewind or fast-forward the current
ported. Other discs may result in track.
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels) Scan
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track Press the SCAN key to play the first
information is included within the 10 seconds of each file.
audio CD.
4 260
Audio CD Mode Menu Repeat

Within this mode, you will have Press the Repeat button to repeat the
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), current track. Press the button again
Repeat and List features. to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current track.
List
Press the List button to display the
track list screen.
Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current disc.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play tracks Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
in random(Shuffle) order. search for tracks. Once the desired
Press the Shuffle button again to turn track is displayed, press the knob to
the Random(Shuffle) feature off. select and play.
• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in
random(Shuffle) order.
4 261
MP3 CD MODE 4. File Info 11. List

Displays information about the cur- Moves to the list screen.
Basic Mode Screen rent file.
5. Play/Pause
6. Play Time
7. Info
the current file.
1. Mode
8. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ 9. Repeat
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function. Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
3. File Index 10. Copy

Displays the current file number. Copies the current file into My Music
4 262
Using MP3 CD Mode Changing Files Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

SEEK
Press the TRACK key to move to While playing, press and hold the
the previous or next file. SEEK
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the ✽ NOTICE
mode will automatically start and SEEK
being playing. • Pressing the TRACK key after the Scan
file has been playing for 2 seconds Press the SCAN key to play the first
will start the current file from the 10 seconds of each file.
beginning.
SEEK
the file has been playing for 1 sec- Searching Folders
onds will start the previous file. HD/CAT CAT
Press the FOLDER ( FOLDER ) key to
select and search folders.
Selecting from the List Once the desired folder is displayed,
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to press the TUNE knob to select.
search for the desired file.
to pause and press button to
play.
✽ NOTICE
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or The first file within the selected fold-
song searches may not operate. Once you find the desired file, press er will begin playing.
Once loading is complete, try again. the TUNE knob to start playing.
4 263
MP3 CD Mode Menu ✽ NOTICE Repeat

Within this mode, you will have • When the ‘Folder File’ option is set Press the Repeat button to repeat the
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), as the default display within current file or folder.
Repeat, Copy and List features. Display setup, the album/artist/file Each time the button is pressed, the
information are displayed as feature changes in order of Repeat
detailed file information. ➟Repeat Folder➟Off.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ • Repeat: Repeats the current file.
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis- • Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
played as detailed file information. within the current Folder.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa- Copying Files
tion are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag. Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.
Info Random(Shuffle)
Press the Info button to display Press the Shuffle button to play files
✽ NOTICE
details about the current file. in random(Shuffle) order. Selecting another feature during
Each time the button is pressed, the copying will display a pop-up asking
feature changes in order of Random whether you wish to cancel copying.
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle) To cancel, select 'Yes’.
All➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in Random(Shuffle) order.
4 264
List
file list screen.

search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
4 265

USB DEVICE • Some USB devices may not be • Do not use the USB I/F to
• Connect the USB device after supported due to compatibility charge batteries or USB acces-
turning on the engine. The USB issues. sories that generate heat. Such
device may become damaged if • Avoid contact between the USB acts may lead to worsened per-
it is already connected when the connector with bodily parts or formance or damage to the
ignition is turned on.The USB foreign objects. device.
device may not operate properly • Repeated connecting/discon- • The device may not recognize
if the car ignition is turned on or necting of USB devices within the USB device if separately
off with the USB device connect- short periods of time may result purchased USB hubs and exten-
ed. in product malfunction. sion cables are being used.
• Heed caution to static electricity • A strange noise may occur when Connect the USB directly with
when connecting/disconnecting disconnecting the USB. the multimedia terminal of the
USB devices. • Make sure to connect/discon- vehicle.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not nect external USB devices with • When using mass storage USB
be recognized when connected the audio power turned off. devices with separate logical
as an external device. • The amount of time required to drives, only files saved to the
• When connecting an external recognize the USB device may root drive can be played.
USB device, the device may not differ depending on the type, • Files may not properly operate
properly recognize the USB is in size or file formats stored in the if application programs are
some states. USB. Such differences in time installed to the USBs.
• Only products formatted with are not indications of malfunc- • The device may not operate nor-
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will tions. mally if MP3 Players, cellular
be recognized. • The device only supports USB phones, digital cameras, or
• This device recognizes USB devices used to play music files. other electronic devices (USB
devices formatted in FAT • USB images and videos are not devices not recognized as
12/16/32 file formats. This supported. portable disk drives) are con-
device does not recognize files in (Continued) nected with the device.
NTFS file format.
(Continued)
4 266
• Charging through the USB may • Avoid use of USB
not work for some mobile memory products
devices. that can also be used
• The device may not support as key chains or
normal operation when using a mobile phone acces-
USB memory type besides sories. Use of such products may
(Metal Cover Type) USB cause damage to the USB jack.
Memory. • Connecting an MP3 device or
• The device may not support phone through various chan-
normal operation when using nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/
formats such as HDD Type, CF, USB mode may result in pop
or SD Memory. noises or abnormal operation.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by
connecting an Adaptor (SD
Type or CF Type) may not be
properly recognized.
• The device may not operate
properly when using USB HDDs
or USBs subject to connection
failures caused by vehicle vibra-
tions. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
4 267
USB MODE 4. File Info 11. List

5. Play/Pause
6. Play Time
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode. 8. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat- 9. Repeat

Displays the current file number. Copies the current file into My Music.
4 268
Using USB Mode ✽ NOTICE Selecting from the List

• Loading may require additional Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
time if there are many files and search for the desired file.
Playing/Pausing USB Files
folders within the USB and result
Once a USB is connected, the mode in faulty list display or file search-
will automatically start and begin ing. Normal operations will resume
playing a USB file. once loading is complete.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal Cover
Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
SEEK
Press the TRACK keys to move to Once you find the desired file, press
the previous or next file. the TUNE knob to start playing.
While playing, press the button ✽ NOTICE Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

to pause and press button to • Pressing the SEEK
TRACK key after the While playing, press and hold the
play. file has been playing for 2 seconds SEEK
will start the current file from the rewind or fast-forward the current file.
beginning.
SEEK
the file has been playing for 1 sec- Scan
onds will start the previous file. Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
4 269
Searching Folders USB Mode Menu ✽ NOTICE

HD/CAT CAT
Press the FOLDER ( FOLDER )key Within this mode, you will have • When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
to select and search folders. access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), as the default display within Display
Repeat, Copy and List features. setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
displayed only when such informa-
Once the desired folder is displayed, file ID3 tag.
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold- Info Random(Shuffle)
er will begin playing. Press the Info button to display Press the Shuffle button to play files
details about the current file. in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder➟Random
(Shuffle) All➟Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in ran-
dom(Shuffle) order.
in random(Shuffle) order.
4 270
Repeat List
Press the Repeat button to repeat the Press the List button to display the
current file or folder. file list screen.
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current
file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the Copy button to copy the Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
current file into My Music. search for files. Once the desired file
and play.
✽ NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes’.
4 271

iPod® DEVICE • When the EQ features of an • If your iPhone® is connected to
• iPod® is a registered trademark external device, such as the both the Bluetooth® Wireless
of Apple Inc. iPod®, and the audio system are Technology and USB, the sound
• In order to use the iPod® while both active, EQ effects could may not be properly played. In
operating the keys, you must use overlap and cause sound deteri- your iPhone®, select the Dock
a dedicated iPod® cable. (the oration and distortion. connector or Bluetooth®
cable that is supplied when pur- Whenever possible, turn off the Wireless Technology to change
chasing iPod®/iPhone® prod- EQ feature within the external the sound output (source).
ucts) device upon use by connecting • iPod® mode cannot be operated
• If the iPod® is connected to the with the audio system. when the iPod® cannot be recog-
vehicle while it is playing, a high • Noise may occur when an iPod® nized due to versions that do not
pitch sound could occur for or AUX device is connected. support communication proto-
approximately 1-2 seconds When such devices are not cols.
immediately after connecting. If being used, disconnect the • For fifth generation iPod® Nano
possible, connect the iPod® to device for storage. devices, the iPod® may not be
the vehicle with the iPod® • When the iPod® or AUX device recognized when the battery
stopped/paused. power is connected to the power level is low. Please charge the
• During ACC ON state, connect- jack, playing the external device iPod® for use.
ing the iPod® through the iPod® may result in noise. In such • Search/play orders shown within
cable will charge the iPod® cases, disconnect the power con- the iPod® device may differ with
through the car audio system. nection before use. the orders shown within the
• When connecting with the iPod® • Skipping or improper operation audio system.
cable, make sure to fully insert may occur depending on the • If the iPod® malfunctions due to
the jack to prevent communica- characteristics of your iPod® an iPod® device defect, reset the
tion interference. /iPhone® device. iPod® and try again. (To learn
(Continued) (Continued) more, refer to your iPod® manu-
al)
(Continued)
4 272
(Continued) iPod® MODE 4. Song Info

• Some iPod®s may not sync with Displays information about the cur-
the System depending on its ver- Basic Mode Screen rent song.
sion. If the Media is removed
before the Media is recognized, 5. Play/Pause
then the system may not proper-
ly restore the previously operat- Changes the play/pause state.
ed mode. (iPad® charging is not
supported.) 6. Play Time
7. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode. 8. Repeat
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis- 9. List
plays the currently operating func- Moves to the list screen.
tion.
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
4 273
Using iPod® Mode Changing Songs Searching Categories

SEEK
Press the TRACK key to move to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
the previous or next song. search for the desired category.
Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and ✽ NOTICE
SEEK
begin playing an iPod® song. • Pressing the TRACK key after the
song has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current song
from the beginning.
SEEK
the song has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist Once you find the desired category,
depending your iPod® product. press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
✽ NOTICE
play. SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to There are eight categories that can be
TRACK
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
rewind or fast-forward the current Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
✽ NOTICE song. Audiobooks and Podcasts.
iPod®s with unsupported communi-
cation protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.
4 274
Category Menu ✽ NOTICE

Within the iPod® Category menu, • If the search mode is accessed
you will have access to the , while playing a song, the most
Home, and features. recently searched category is dis-
played.
• Search steps upon initial connec-
tion may differ depending on the
type of iPod® device.
1. : Displays the play screen

2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root cat-
egory screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
4 275
iPod® Mode Menu Repeat AUX MODE

access to the Random(Shuffle), current song. Press the button again Using AUX Mode
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
Press the MEDIA key Select [AUX]
List
Category Menu.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play An external device can be connected
songs in random(Shuffle) order. to play music.
feature changes in order of Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
Random(Shuffle) Album➟Random search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
• Random(Shuffle) Album : Shuffle press the TUNE knob to select
Album plays album in and play.
Random(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random(Shuffle) order.
4 276
Connecting an External Device ✽ NOTICE

External audio players (Camcorders, • If an external device connector is
car VCR, etc.) can be played through connected with the AUX terminal,
a dedicated cable. then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been
connected.
• The AUX volume can be con-
trolled separately from other
audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the con-
nector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
4 277
MY MUSIC MODE 4. File Info 11. List

5. Play/Pause
6. Play Time
7. Info
current file.
1. Mode 8. Random(Shuffle)
Displays currently operating mode. Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
2. Operation State
Scan, displays the currently operat- Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
ing function.
10. Delete
3. File Index
Deletes the current file.
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
4 278
Using My Music Mode Changing Files Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

SEEK
Playing/Pausing My Music Files rewind or fast-forward the current file.
✽ NOTICE
SEEK Scan
beginning.
SEEK
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
While playing, press the button Selecting from the List

to pause and press button to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
play. search for the desired file.
✽ NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will
be disabled.
Once you find the desired file, press

the TUNE knob to start playing.
4 279
My Music Mode Menu Random List

Within this mode, you will have Press the Shuffle button to play files Press the List button to display the
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), in random order. Press the button file list screen.
Repeat, Delete and List features. again to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the Delete button to delete the
current file. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
Info search for files. Once the desired file
Press the Info button to display and play.
details about the current file.
✽ NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
4 280
List Menu 1) : Moves to the previous screen ✽ NOTICE

From the List screen, it is possible to 2) Sellect All: Selects all files • If there is memory available, up to
delete files you previously saved into 3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected 6,000 files can be saved.
My Music. files • Identical files cannot be copied
4) Delete: Deletes selected files more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go
to SETUP [System] [Memory
After selecting the files you want to Information]
delete, press the Delete button to
delete the selected files.
Press the Select All button or individ-

ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
Unselect All button and Delete buttons
will be enabled.
4 281
✽ NOTICE - USING THE (Continued)

Bluetooth® Wireless • When returning to Bluetooth®
Technology Audio Mode Wireless Technology Audio mode
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology after ending a call, the mode may
Audio Mode can be used only not automatically restart in some
when a Bluetooth® Wireless mobile phones.
Technology phone has been con- • Receiving an incoming call or mak-
nected. ing an outgoing call while playing
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available Audio may result in audio interfer-
when connecting mobile phones ence.
that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
4 282
Bluetooth® Wireless ✽ NOTICE Changing Files

Technology AUDIO MODE The play/pause feature may operate
SEEK
Press the TRACK key to move to
differently depending on the mobile the previous or next file.
Using Bluetooth® Wireless phone.
Technology Audio Mode Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® device has not been connected, press
Wireless Technology Audio the SETUP key [Phone] button to
display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection screen.
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start. It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.

play.
4 283
✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE - PAIRING • If you entered the Passkey within

• If the Bluetooth ® Wireless THROUGH [PHONE] the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio is not operating SETUP Technology device
properly, check whether the fea- • The Bluetooth® and Voice • If the following screen is displayed
ture is turned off at SETUP Recognition Manual is provided in and a 6-digit passkey is checked
[Phone] [Streaming Audio]. If the two versions due to software ver- and confirmed within the
feature is off, turn back on and try sion differences. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
again. • Before reading the manual, check device.
• If music is not yet playing from the following.
your mobile device after converting • Press the SETUP key Select
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Audio mode, pressing the play but-
ton once may start playing the
mode. Check to see that music is
playing from the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device after
converting to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode.
• From your Bluetooth® Wireless

Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4 284
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing PHONE Key / Key

Technology Device on the Steering Remote
Controller
Technology phone or device with the key on the steering remote con-
Pairing is necessary to connect and played. 1) Car Name : Name of device as
use the Bluetooth® Wireless 2. Press the OK button to enter shown when searching from your
Technology feature. the Pair Phone screen. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
the device

car audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
entered. Here, enter the
passkey “0000” to pair your
device with the car audio system.
4 285

calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting,
If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology MIC on/off)
devices are paired but none are cur- - Downloading Call History
rently connected, pressing the - Downloading Mobile Contacts
PHONE key or the key on the - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
steering wheel displays the following device auto connection
screen. Press the [Pair] button to - Bluetooth Audio Streaming
pair a new device or press the The following steps are the same as • Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
[Connect] to connect a previously those described in the section Technology devices can be paired
paired device. "When No Devices have been to the Car Handsfree system.
Paired" on the previous page. • Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
ed at a time.
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio
related features are supported.
4 286
• Bluetooth related operations are • After pairing is complete, a con- From the paired phone list, select the
possible only with devices that sup- tacts download request is sent once device you want to connect and
port Handsfree or audio features, to the mobile phone. Some mobile press the Connect button.
such as a Bluetooth® Wireless phones may require confirmation
Technology mobile phone or a upon receiving a download
Technology devices are automati- Connecting a Device
cally searched and reconnected. Press the SETUP key Select
• If the system becomes unstable due [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
to communication errors between
be restored.

currently connected
4 287
Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select Disconnecting a Device
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
What is Priority? Change priority button from the Menu. Press the SETUP key Select
It is possible to pair up to five The selected device will be changed [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to the highest priority.
paired phones.

From the paired phone list, select the

currently connected device and
✽ NOTICE press the Disconnect button.
phone.
4 288
Deleting a Device ✽ NOTICE

Press the SETUP key Select nected device, the device will auto-
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] matically be disconnected to pro-

device you want to delete and press
the Delete button.
4 289
4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts Favorites

USING Bluetooth® Wireless list screen
Technology Press the PHONE key Select
5) Setup : Displays Phone related [Favorites]
settings.
Phone Menu Screen
✽ NOTICE
Phone Menus • If you press the [Call History] but-
With a Bluetooth® Wireless ton but there is no call history
Technology device connected, press data, a prompt is displayed which
the PHONE key to display the Phone asks to download call history data.
menu screen. • If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts 1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
data. call upon selection
• This feature may not be supported 2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
in some mobile phones. For more tacts be saved as favorite.
information on download support, 3) Delete All : Delete all stored
refer to your mobile phone user’s favorite contacts
manual.
✽ NOTICE
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used • To save Favorite, contacts should
contacts saved for easy access be downloaded.
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial • Contact saved in Favorites will not
screen where numbers can be be automatically updated if the
dialed to make calls contact has been updated in the
3) Call History : Device the call histo- phone. To update Favorites, delete
ry list screen the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
4 290
Calling by Dialing a Number Answering Calls ✽ NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and
Press the PHONE key Select [Dial Answering a Call SETUP mode features are dis-
Number] Answering a call with a Bluetooth® abled. Only the call volume will
Wireless Technology device connect- operate.
ed will display the following screen. • The telephone number may not be
phones.
automatically revert to Private
mode.
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone

number
2) Call : If a number has been entered, 1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
calls the number If no number has name when the incoming caller is
been entered, switches to call histo- saved within your contacts
ry screen 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
3) End : Deletes the entered phone incoming number
number 3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers 4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
one digit at a time
4 291
During a Handsfree Call Call History • Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
Press the PHONE key Select [Call • Calls received with hidden caller ID
History] will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call histo-
ry stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 20 received, dialed and missed
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s • Time of received/dialed calls and call
name if the incoming caller is time information are not saved.
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the A list of incoming, outgoing and
incoming number missed calls is displayed.
3) Call time : Displays the call time Press the Download button to down-
load the call history.
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
1) Call History :
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party - Displays recent calls (call history)
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off - Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
✽ NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
4 292

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology may not be supported in some
device has been disconnected. mobile phones. For more informa-
The list of saved phone book entries (However, the contacts and call tion of supported Bluetooth®
is displayed. Press the Download but- history saved to the phone will be devices and function support, refer
ton to download the call history. deleted if a paired phone is delet- to your phone’s user manual.
ed.)
1) Contacts List : • It is possible to download contacts
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries • When downloading contacts, the
- Connects call upon selection status bar.
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries
4 293
Bluetooth® Wireless Viewing Paired Phone List 3) Delete : Deletes the currently
Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select selected phone
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] 4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
Pairing a New Device tion priority

phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology played.
system. For more information, refer to the
For more information, refer to the Technology Connection” section with-
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
4 294
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Streaming Audio

• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Streaming Audio]
ture.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
As the contacts are downloaded When Streaming Audio is turned on,
from the mobile phone, a download you can play music files saved in your
progress bar is displayed. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device through the audio system.
✽ NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• Voice Recognition may not oper-
ate while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 295
Outgoing Volume Turning Bluetooth System Off ✽ NOTICE

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Technology back on, go to SETUP
Off] [Phone] and press “Yes”.
system.
Use the , buttons to adjust the

outgoing volume level.
✽ NOTICE
SEEK
4 296
[Prompt Feedback]
4 297
❈ Illustration on using voice commands • End voice command.

• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP) Ding~
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP) Ding~ Contacts
More Help
Contacts
Please say the name of the contacts you want
More Help. to call (BEEP)
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call Cancel
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

Please say a... Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds):
Shortly pressing the (BEEP)
More Help
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod®, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
4 298
Voice Command List

Ex) Call John Smith • When currently listening to the FM radio,
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or the most recently played FM screen.
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
4 299

CD Plays the music saved in the CD. Mute Mutes the sound.
USB Plays USB music. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4 300
• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
radio operation used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre- broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
quencies with superior reception and saves in Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Presets 1~6. Information Displays the information of the current broad-
Seek up Plays the next (higher) receivable broadcast. cast.
Seek down Plays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast.

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 301

Play Plays the currently paused track. Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current track. Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen- folder.
tial order. All Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Repeat Repeats the current track. Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10 Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Information Displays the information screen of the current order.
track. Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
4 302

Play Plays the currently paused song. Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current song. Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
category. Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
4 303
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing Using the PHONE Button

Technology Device or the Steering Wheel Control
Button
device
the device

car audio system.
4 304
[Non SSP supported device] ✽ NOTICE Pairing through [PHONE]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing) Setup
displayed where the passkey is Press the SETUP key Select
entered. [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to Select TUNE knob
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device] If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

4. After a few moments, a screen is devices are paired but none are cur-
displayed 6 digits passkey. rently connected, pressing the
Hear, check the passkey on your PHONE key or the key on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology steering wheel displays the following
device and confirm. screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the 1. The following steps are the same
[Connect] to connect a previously as those described in the section
paired device. "When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

4 305
✽ NOTICE • Bluetooth related operations are • After pairing is complete, a con-

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology possible only with devices that sup- tacts download request is sent once
features supported within the vehi- port Handsfree or audio features, to the mobile phone. Some mobile
cle are as follows. Some features such as a Bluetooth® Wireless phones may require confirmation
may not be supported depending Technology mobile phone or a upon receiving a download
on your Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth audio device. request, ensure your mobile phone
Technology device. • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless accepts the connection. Refer to
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree Technology device becomes discon- your phones user’s manual for
calls nected due to being out of commu- additional information regarding
- Operations during a call (Switch to nication range, turning the device phone pairing and connections.
Private, Switch to call waiting, OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless
MIC on/off) Technology communication error,
- Downloading Call History corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless
- Downloading Mobile Contacts Technology devices are automati-
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology cally searched and reconnected.
device auto connection • If the system becomes unstable due
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming to communication errors between
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless the car Handsfree and the
Technology devices can be paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
to the Car Handsfree system. device, reset the device by turning
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless off and back on again. Upon reset-
Technology device can be connect- ting Bluetooth® Wireless
ed at a time. Technology device, the system will
• Other devices cannot be paired be restored.
are supported.
4 306
Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the Changing Priority
Press the SETUP key Select device you want to connect and
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] press the Connect button.
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
paired phones.

currently connected
4 307
From the paired phone list, select ✽ NOTICE Disconnecting a Device

highest priority, then press the the selected phone is set as a priority
Change priority button from the Menu. Press the SETUP key Select
phone.
The selected device will be changed [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
to the highest priority.

press the Disconnect button.
4 308


the Delete button.
4 309

settings.
Phone Menu Screen
✽ NOTICE
manual.
✽ NOTICE
Favorite.
4 310

phones.
mode.

number
2) Call : If a number has been 1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
entered, calls the number If no name when the incoming caller is
number has been entered, switch- saved within your contacts
es to call history screen 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
one digit at a time
4 311
During a Handsfree Call Call History • Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s • Up to 20 received, dialed and
name if the incoming caller is missed calls are stored in Call
saved within your contacts History.
2) Incoming Number : Displays the • Time of received/dialed calls and
incoming number A list of incoming, outgoing and call time information are not saved.
3) Call time : Displays the call time missed calls is displayed.
4) End : Ends call Press the Download button to down-
heard by the other party 1) Call History :
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off - Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
✽ NOTICE 2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
4 312

ed.)
- Displays downloaded contacts
- Connects call upon selection status bar.
alphabetical order.
entries
4 313

For more information, refer to the Technology Connection” section
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- within Bluetooth® Wireless
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous screen

selected phone
4 314
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Auto Download (Contacts)

• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Auto Download]
ture.
As the contacts are downloaded This feature is used to automatically
from the mobile phone, a download download mobile contacts entries
progress bar is displayed. once a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is connected.
✽ NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone contacts, ✽ NOTICE
the previous corresponding data is • The Auto Download feature will
deleted. download mobile contacts entries
• This feature may not be supported every time the phone is connected. The
in some mobile phones. download time may differ depending
• Voice Recognition may not operate on the number of saved contacts
while contacts are being down- entries and the communication state.
loaded. • Before downloading contacts, first
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
4 315
Streaming Audio Outgoing Volume Turning Bluetooth System Off

[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
system.
When Streaming Audio is turned on, Use the , buttons to adjust the
you can play music files saved in outgoing volume level.
your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device through the audio
system. ✽ NOTICE
SEEK
4 316
✽ NOTICE
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
4 317
steering wheel remote controller. Say [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] Joe”).
a command. [Prompt Feedback]
mand after the voice instruction and steering remote controller.
steering remote controller.
4 318
❈ Illustration on using voice commands More Help

the beep (BEEP) Ding~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
More Help manual.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands. • End voice command.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod®'. Please say a command after
Additionally, there are phone commands like the beep (BEEP) Ding~
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's Contacts
manual.
Contacts
• Skipping Voice Recognition to call (BEEP)
Cancel
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the (BEEP) Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

More Help
4 319
Voice Command List

Ex) Call “John Smith” • When currently listening to the FM radio,
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or the most recently played FM screen.
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
4 320

CD Plays the music saved in the CD. Mute Mutes the sound
USB Plays USB music. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4 321

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad-
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 322
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation USB and MP3 CD operation

tial order. Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
4 323

4 324
SETUP Display Settings Pop-up Mode

Starting Mode [Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the SETUP key to display the Press the SETUP key Select
Setup screen. [Display] Select [Brightness]
This feature is used to display the

Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
You can select and control options Use the , buttons to adjust the
related to [Display], [Sound], When this feature is turned on,
screen brightness or set the pressing the RADIO or MEDIA key
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
[System]. will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
Night mode.
Press the Default button to reset.
✽ NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness be displayed only when two or more
automatically media modes have been connected.
2) Daylight : Always maintains the
brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the
brightness on low
4 325
Text Scroll MP3 Information Display Sound Settings

Press the SETUP key Select [Display] Select [Media Display]
Sound Settings
[Display] Select [Text Scroll]
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]
This feature is used to change the

This feature is used to scroll text dis- information displayed within USB
played on the screen when it is too and MP3 CD modes.
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeat- 1) Folder File : Displays file name
edly scrolled. When turned off, the and folder name
text is scrolled just once. 2) Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
4 326
Use the , , , buttons to SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Voice Recognition Volume
adjust the Fader/Balance settings. Control) Press the SETUP key Select
Use the , buttons to adjust the Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] Select [Voice Recognition
Bass/Middle/Treble settings. [Sound] Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
Press the Default button to reset. Vol.]
Virtual Sound
[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the

Voice Recognition volume.
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from Off/Low/Mid/High.
This feature is used to set the Power

Bass, Power Treble and Surround
sound options.
4 327
Touch Screen Beep Blue Link Voice Volume Clock/Calendar Setting

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select Clock Setting
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen [Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice
Beep] Vol.]
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.

This feature is used to turn the touch Blue Link Voice Volume.
screen beep on/off.
❈ Blue Link® may differ depending

on the selected audio. ✽ NOTICE
Press and hold the CLOCK key (over
0.8 seconds) to set the
Clock/Calendar screen.
4 328
Calendar Setting Time Format Clock Display

[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar [Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format] [Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings] Display (Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.

Use the , buttons to set the clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Month, Day and Year setting.
4 329
System Setting Prompt Feedback Language

[System] Select [Prompt Feedback] [System] Select [Language]
HD Radio™ On/Off
[System] Select [FM], [AM]
This feature is used to select the This feature is used to change the
desired prompt feedback option from system and voice recognition lan-
ON and OFF. guage.
This feature is used to set whether to If the language is changed, the sys-
receive FM/AM HD Radio™ broad- tem will restart and apply the select-
casts. 1) ON : When using voice recognition, ed language.
provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance prompts
4 330
Memory Information REAR VIEW CAMERA

Press the SETUP key Select (if equipped)
[System] Select [Memory Information]
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the transmission
shift lever is positioned into reverse
(R).
This feature displays information ically stop operating when set to a
related to system memory. the transmission shift lever is posi-
tioned to another gear.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use CAUTION
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
4 331
ices. The " " button offers imme- ice related inquiries and consulta-
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated diate contact to SOS Emergency tions.
customer values through a Assistance. A detailed list of com-
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides mands is available in the Blue Link A call is connected to the Blue Link®
consumers with fast and reliable IT User's Manual. service center employee.
1. Navigate to
ous destinations.
4 332

phone all.
NOTE: 6. Suspend Route • While on a Bluetooth® call,
pressing the key or
The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup- “Suspend Route” VR command key will display a message
ports the store of ten(10) destina- allows the user to suspend and indicating that you are cur-
tions in the TBT destinations pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid- rently on a call.
directory. ance while in the guidance mode.
Rescue Center.
4 333
Eco Coach • What does the bar graph and hori-

zontal line mean?
• What is My Eco MPG?

• What is Eco Coach? over 2.5 minutes.
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com- This value is also shown in bar graph
pares your fuel economy against the as your “now” rating.
government tested average (EPA) or
other similar Hyundai models (com- • What are Eco Rewards?
munity), based on your preference. If you beat the average (the EPA or
Each month, or after every tank fill community), you will receive an Eco
up, Eco Coach rates your extended Reward point.
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average. See your my Hyundai web page for
more information.
more information.
[Eco Driving] will not operate if the
vehicle ignition is not turned on.
Please operate with the ignition
turned on.
4 334

cle.

total of 9 levels.

1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name

7. Current Street name
4 335
How vehicle audio works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception
the distance from the radio station,
FM reception closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
JBM002
JBM001
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
AM and FM radio signals are broadcasts. This is because AM radio
cast from transmitter towers located waves are transmitted at low fre-
around your city. They are intercept- quencies. These long distance, low
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- frequency radio waves can follow the
cle. This signal is then processed by curvature of the earth rather than
the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they
speakers. curve around obstructions resulting
When a strong radio signal has in better signal coverage.
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
4 336
FM radio station
JBM003 JBM004 JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the nal weakens, another more power-
follow the earth's surface. Because signal will weaken and sound will ful signal near the same frequency
of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, may begin to play. This is because
begin to fade within short distances we suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto
from the station. Also, FM signals are stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs,
easily affected by buildings, moun- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a
tains, and obstructions. This can lead large obstructions between the stronger signal.
to undesirable or unpleasant listen- transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
ing conditions which might lead you turb the signal causing static or signals being received from sever-
to believe a problem exists with your fluttering noises to occur. Reducing al directions can cause distortion
radio. The following conditions are the treble level may lessen this or fluttering. This can be caused by
normal and do not indicate radio effect until the disturbance clears. a direct and reflected signal from
trouble: the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 337
Using a cellular phone or a two- Caring for CDs • Depending on the type of CD-
way radio R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
• If the temperature inside the car is too
When a cellular phone is used inside not operate normally according to
high, open the car windows to venti- the manufacturing companies. In
the vehicle, noise may be produced late before using the system.
from the audio system. This does not such circumstances, continued
• It is illegal to copy and use use may cause malfunctions to
mean that something is wrong with MP3/WMA files without permission.
the audio equipment. In such a case, your audio system.
Use CDs that are created only by
try to operate mobile devices as far lawful means.
from the audio equipment as possible.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such ✽ NOTICE
as benzene and thinner, normal - Playing an Incompatible
CAUTION cleaners and magnetic sprays Copy Protected Audio CD
When using a communication made for analogue disc onto CDs. Some copy protected CDs, which do
system such as a cellular phone • To prevent the disc surface from not comply with international audio
or a radio set inside the vehicle, getting damaged, hold CDs by the CD standards (Red Book), may not
a separate external antenna edges or the center hole only. play on your car audio. Please note
must be fitted. When a cellular • Clean the disc surface with a piece that inabilities to properly play a
phone or a radio set is used of soft cloth before playback (wipe copy protected CD may indicate
with an internal antenna alone, it from the center to the outside that the CD is defective, not the CD
it may interfere with the vehi- edge). player.
cle's electrical system and • Do not damage the disc surface or
adversely affect safe operation attach pieces of sticky tape or
of the vehicle. paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
WARNING more than one CD at a time).
Do not use a cellular phone • Keep CDs in their cases after use to
while driving. Stop at a safe protect them from scratches or dirt.
location to use a cellular phone.
4 338
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) : WARNING
1. Song playing order : to • Do not stare at the screen
sequentially. while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
2. Folder playing order : of time could lead to traffic
❋ If no song file is contained in the accidents.
folder, that folder is not displayed. • Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents.
Use the phone feature after
parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
4 339
(Continued) CAUTION (Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the • Operating the device while • Turn on the car ignition before
screen is blank or no sound driving could lead to accidents using this device. Do not oper-
can be heard as these signs due to a lack of attention to ate the audio system for long
may indicate product malfunc- external surroundings. First periods of time with the ignition
tion. Continued use in such park the vehicle before operat- turned off as such operations
conditions could lead to acci- ing the device. may lead to battery discharge.
dents(fires, electric shock) or • Do not subject the device to
product malfunctions. • Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds severe shock or impact. Direct
• Do not touch the antenna dur- from outside of the vehicle. pressure onto the front side of
ing thunder or lightening as Driving in a state where exter- the monitor may cause dam-
such acts may lead to light- nal sounds cannot be heard age to the LCD or touch
ning induced electric shock. may lead to accidents. screen.
• Do not stop or park in park- • Pay attention to the volume set- • When cleaning the device,
ing-restricted areas to operate ting when turning the device make sure to turn off the
the product. Such acts could on. A sudden output of extreme device and use a dry and
lead to traffic accidents. volume upon turning the smooth cloth. Never use
• Use the system with the vehi- device on could lead to hearing tough materials, chemical
cle ignition turned on. impairment. (Adjust the volume cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
Prolonged use with the igni- to a suitable levels before turn- benzene, thinners, etc.) as
tion turned off could result in ing off the device.) such materials may damage
battery discharge. the device panel or cause
(Continued) color/quality deterioration.
(Continued)
4 340
(Continued) ✽ NOTICE - USING THE (Continued)

• Do not place beverages close USB DEVICE • An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
to the audio system. Spilling • To use an external USB device, not recognizable.
beverages may lead to system make sure the device is not con- • Depending on the condition of
malfunction. nected when starting up the the external USB device, the
vehicle. Connect the device after connected external USB device
• In case of product malfunction, can be unrecognizable.
please contact your place of pur- starting up.
• If you start the engine when the • When the formatted byte/sector
chase or After Service center. setting of External USB device
• Placing the audio system USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB is not either 512BYTE or
within an electromagnetic 2048BYTE, then the device will
environment may result in flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.) not be recognized.
noise interference. • Use only a USB device format-
• If the engine is started up or
• Prevent caustic solutions turned off while the external USB ted to FAT 12/16/32.
such as perfume and cosmet- device is connected, the external • USB devices without USB I/F
ic oil from contacting the USB device may not work. authentication may not be rec-
dashboard because they may • The System may not play unau- ognizable.
cause damage or discol- thenticated MP3 or WMA files. • Make sure the USB connection
oration. 1) It can only play MP3 files with terminal does not come in con-
the compression rate between tact with the human body or
8Kbps~320Kbps. other objects.
2) It can only play WMA music • If you repeatedly connect or dis-
files with the compression rate connect the USB device in a
between 8Kbps~320Kbps. short period of time, it may
• Take precautions for static elec- break the device.
tricity when connecting or dis- • You may hear a strange noise
connecting the external USB when connecting or disconnect-
device. ing a USB device.
4 341

• If you disconnect the external • If you use devices such as a USB • Some USB flash memory read-
USB device during playback in hub purchased separately, the ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
USB mode, the external USB vehicle’s audio system may not etc.) or external-HDD type
device can be damaged or may recognize the USB device. In that devices can be unrecognizable.
malfunction. Therefore, discon- case, connect the USB device • Music files protected by DRM
nect the external USB device directly to the multimedia termi- (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
when the audio is turned off or nal of the vehicle. MENT) are not recognizable.
in another mode. (e.g, Radio, • If the USB device is divided by • The data in the USB memory
CD) logical drives, only the music files may be lost while using this
• Depending on the type and on the highest-priority drive are audio. Always back up impor-
capacity of the external USB recognized by car audio. tant data on a personal storage
device or the type of the files • Devices such as MP3 Player/ device.
stored in the device, there is a Cellular phone/Digital camera can • Please avoid using
difference in the time taken for be unrecognizable by standard USB memory prod-
recognition of the device. USB I/F can be unrecognizable. ucts which can be
• Do not use the USB device for • Charging through the USB may used as key chains or
purposes other than playing not be supported in some mobile cellular phone acces-
music files. devices. sories as they could cause dam-
• Playing videos through the USB • USB HDD or USB types liable to age to the USB jack. Please
is not supported. connection failures due to vehicle make certain only to use plug
• Use of USB accessories such as vibrations are not supported. type connector products.
rechargers or heaters using USB (i-stick type)
I/F may lower performance or • Some non-standard USB devices
cause trouble. (METAL COVER TYPE USB)
(Continued) can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
4 342

iPod® DEVICE • Some iPod® devices, such as the • When connecting iPod® with the
• Some iPod® models may not iPhone® , can be connected iPod® Power Cable, insert the
support communication proto- through the Bluetooth® Wireless connector to the multimedia
col and files may not properly Technology interface. The socket completely. If not insert-
play. device must have audio ed completely, communications
Supported iPod® models: Bluetooth® Wireless Technology between iPod® and audio may
- iPhone® 3GS/4 capability (such as for stereo be interrupted.
- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation headphone Bluetooth® Wireless • When adjusting the sound
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation Technology). effects of the iPod® and the
- iPod® classic The device can play, but it will audio system, the sound effects
• The order of search or playback not be controlled by the audio of both devices will overlap and
of songs in the iPod® can be dif- system. might reduce or distort the
ferent from the order searched • To use iPod® features within the quality of the sound.
in the audio system. audio, use the cable provided • Deactivate (turn off) the equal-
• If the iPod® is disabled due to its upon purchasing an iPod® izer function of an iPod® when
own malfunction, reset the device. adjusting the audio system’s
iPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod® • Skipping or improper operation volume, and turn off the equal-
manual) may occur depending on the izer of the audio system when
• An iPod® may not operate nor- characteristics of your iPod®/ using the equalizer of an iPod®.
mally on low battery. iPhone® device. • When not using iPod® with car
(Continued) • If your iPhone® is connected to audio, detach the iPod® cable
both the Bluetooth® Wireless from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®
Technology and USB, the sound may remain in accessory mode,
may not be properly played. In and may not work properly.
your iPhone®, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)
4 343
✽ NOTICE - Bluetooth® ✽ NOTICE - BEFORE USING ✽ NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS

Wireless Technology THE Bluetooth® FOR SAFE DRIVING
HANDSFREE
• The Bluetooth® word mark and • Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
logos are registered trademarks What is Bluetooth® ? that enables drivers to practice
owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and • Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis- safe driving. Connecting the head
any use of such marks is under tance wireless networking technol- unit with a Bluetooth® phone
license. ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~ allows the user to conveniently
A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is 2.48GHz frequency to connect make and receive calls and use
required to use Bluetooth® wire- various devices within a certain contacts. Before using Bluetooth®,
less technology. distance. carefully read the contents of this
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Supported within PCs, external user’s manual.
phone compatibility can be checked devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, • Excessive use or operations while
by visiting www. hyundaiusa.com various electronic devices, and driving may lead to negligent driv-
and under the CARING FOR automotive environments, ing practices and result in acci-
YOUR CAR - BLUETOOTH Bluetooth® allows data to be trans- dents. Refrain from excessive
COMPATIBILITY menu. mitted at high speeds without hav- operations while driving.
ing to use a connector cable. • Viewing the screen for prolonged
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a periods of time is dangerous and
device which allows the user to may lead to accidents. When driv-
conveniently make phone calls ing, view the screen only for short
with Bluetooth® mobile phones periods of time.
through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. To
learn more about mobile device com-
patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.
4 344
✽ NOTICE -WHEN CON- • Park the vehicle when connecting

NECTING A Bluetooth® the head unit with the mobile
PHONE phone.
• Bluetooth® connection may become
intermittently disconnected in
• Before connecting the head unit some mobile phones. Follow these
with the mobile phone, check to steps to try again.
see that the mobile phone supports 1. Within the mobile phone, turn
Bluetooth® features. the Bluetooth® function off/on
• Even if the phone supports and try again.
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be 2. Turn the mobile phone power
found during device searches if the Off/On and try again.
phone has been set to hidden state 3. Completely remove the mobile
or the Bluetooth® power is turned phone battery, reboot, and then
off. Disable the hidden state or again.
turn on the Bluetooth® power 4. Reboot the Audio System and
prior to searching/connecting with try again.
the Head unit. 5. Delete all paired devices, pair
• After a Bluetooth phone has been and try again.
successfully paired, the phone will • Handsfree call quality and volume
automatically connect when the may differ depending on the
ignition is turned on. model of your mobile phone.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth®
device, turn off the Bluetooth® fea-
ture within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
4 345

Voice Recognition - When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
• When using the voice recognition windstorms)
feature, only commands listed • Phone related voice commands
within the user's manual are sup- can be used only when a
ported. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
• Be aware that during the opera- device is connected.
tion of the voice recognition sys- • When making calls by stating a
tem, pressing any key other than name, the corresponding contact
the key terminate voice recog- must be downloaded and stored
nition mode. within the audio system.
• For superior voice recognition • After downloading the Bluetooth®
performance, position the micro- Wireless Technology phone book,
phone used for voice recognition it takes some times to convert the
above the head of the driver’s seat phone book data into voice infor-
and maintain a proper position mation. During this time, voice
when saying commands. recognition may not properly
• Within the following situations, operate.
voice recognition may not function • Pronounce the voice commands
properly due to background noises naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
which may be picked up by the mal conversation.
overhead microphone.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the heating and air condi-
tioning fan blower speed is high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
4 346
■ CD Player : AM1B2DMKN, AM1B3DMAN
4 347
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS • Each time the key is pressed, the 4. PHONE

mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
AND FUNCTIONS FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up the connection screen is displayed.
❈ Display and settings may differ screen will be displayed when
depending on the selected audio. [Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is dis- 5. PWR/VOL knob
played, use the TUNE knob or • Power : Turns power On/Off by
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the pressing the knob
desired mode. • Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
3. MEDIA
SEEK
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, 6. TRACK
My Music, BT Audio mode. • Radio Mode : Automatically search-
• Each time the key is pressed, the es for broadcast frequencies.
mode is changed in order of CD, • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
Audio.
onds): Moves to next or previous song
Audio Head Unit ❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop (file)
up screen will be displayed when
1. (EJECT) - Press and hold the key (over 0.8
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
• Ejects the disc. seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards
When the pop up screen is dis-
the current song.
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the • BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
2. RADIO
desired mode. previous song(file)
• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.
❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
4 348
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and • CD, USB, My Music mode

Menu pop up screen, the number - Shortly press the key (under 0.8
menu is selected. seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
9. DISP ❈ Press the SCAN key again to
• Each time the button is shortly continue listening to the current
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it song (file).
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off 11. SETUP
CLOCK
❈ Audio operation is maintained and • Shortly press the key (under 0.8
only the screen will be turned Off. seconds) : Moves to the Display,
In the screen Off state, press any Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-
CAT
key to turn the screen On again. ting modes.
7. FOLDER • Press and hold the key (over 0.8
• Radio Mode 10. SCAN seconds) : Move to the Time set-
- XM RADIO™ : Category Search • Radio Mode ting screen.
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder - Shortly press the key (under 0.8
Search seconds): Previews each broad- 12. MENU
cast for 5 seconds each. • Displays menus for the current mode.
8. 1 ~ 6 (Preset) - Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts 13. TUNE knob
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5 • Radio mode : Changes frequency
(channels) or receives saved fre-
seconds each. by turning the knob left/right.
quencies (channels)
❈ Press the SCAN key again to • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
continue listening to the current Searches songs (files) by turning
- 1 : Repeat frequency. the knob left/right.
- 2 : Random ❈ XM Radio™ does not support the
Preset scan feature.
4 349
❈ When the desired song is dis-

played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
14. DISC-IN LED

inserted
4 350
SETUP Mode Pop up Sound Settings

[Mode Pop up] Changes /
On Off
selection mode
Display Settings Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
• During On state, press the RADIO through TUNE knob or 2 key
or MEDIA key to display the mode Select menu through TUNE knob
Press the SETUP key Select [Display] change pop up screen.
through TUNE knob or 1 key
Select menu through TUNE knob Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4 351
Sound Settings Virtual Sound Speed Dependent Volume Control

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass, The PoewrBass, PowerTreble, and This feature is used to automatically
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and Surround can be set. control the volume level according to
Balance. the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Virtual Sound] Set menu
Select [Sound Settings] Select through TUNE knob Set On / Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
menu through TUNE knob Turn Off through TUNE knob [On/Off] TUNE knob
TUNE knob left/right to set
• PowerBass : This is a sound sys-
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the tem feature that provides live bass.
sound tone.
Voice Recognition Volume
• PowerTreble : This is a sound system Adjusts voice recognition volume.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound feature that provides live tremble.
fader and balance. Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
• Surround : This is a sound system volume of TUNE knob
• Default : Restores default settings. feature that provides surround
❈ Back : While adjusting values, re- sound.
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
❈ May differ depending on the selected

audio.
4 352
Blue Link® Voice Volume Clock Settings Clock Settings

(for Blue Link equipped model)
® This menu is used to set the time.
SETUP
Press the CLOCK key Select [Clock] Select [Clock Settings] Set through
Sets the Blue Link® voice recognition through TUNE knob or 3 key TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
volume. Select menu through TUNE knob
❈ While using Blue Link® voice
recognition, turning the tune knob
will display the volume control
popup screen.
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute]
and [AM/PM].
4 353
Calendar Settings Clock Display when Power is

This menu is used to set the date OFF
(MM/DD/YYYY). Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set
On / Off through TUNE knob
Select [Calendar Settings]] Set
through TUNE knob Press • On : Displays time/date on screen
TUNE knob • Off : Turn off.

focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through TUNE knob
4 354
SYSTEM SETTINGS Memory Information • Off : This mode is for expert users
Displays currently used memory and and omits some information during
total system memory. voice command operation. (When
Press the SETUP key Select using Expert mode, guidance
[System] through tune knob or 5 Select [Memory Information] OK instructions can be heard through
key Select menu through TUNE The currently used memory is dis- the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
knob played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side. Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through TUNE knob
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes. ❈ The system will reboot after the
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set language is changed.
through TUNE knob ❈ Language support by region
• On : This mode is for beginner - English, Francais, Espanol
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
4 355
RADIO : FM, AM OR XM Preset SEEK SCAN

Press the 1 ~ 6 key Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 • Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency seconds): The broadcast frequency
saved in the corresponding key. increases and previews each
• Pressing and holding the key (over broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding scanning all frequencies, returns
the desired key from 1 ~ 6 and plays the current broadcast fre-
will save the currently playing quency.
SEEK broadcast to the selected key and • Pressing and holding the key (over
SEEK
Press the TRACK key sound a BEEP. 0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 for 5 seconds each.
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically search- Selecting through manual
es for the next frequency. search
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10MHz
4 356
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or 1 key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
4 357
XM RADIO ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, Category

channels are changed within the CAT
current category. Press the FOLDER key Set through
Using XM satellite™ Radio the TUNE knob
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3 SCAN
month complimentary period of XM
Satellite™ Radio. XM provides Press the SCAN key
access to over 130 channels of • Shortly pressing the key: Previews
music, information, and entertain- each broadcast for 5 seconds
ment programming. each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to • The display will indicate the catego-
continue listening to the current ry menus, highlight the category
frequency that the current channel belongs to.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, • In the Category List Mode, press
channels are changed within the CAT
current category. the FOLDER key to navigate cat-
egory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
SEEK category.
SEEK
Press the TRACK key ❈ If channel is selected by selecting
• Shortly pressing the key: select category, then the “CATEGORY”
previous or next channel. icon is displayed at the top of the
• Pressing and holding the key (over screen.
0.8 seconds): continuously move to
previous or next channel.
4 358
Preset Tune
Press the 1 ~ 6 key • Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the channel number or scrolls category
frequency saved in the correspon- list.
ding key. • Press TUNE knob : Selects the
• Pressing and holding the key (over menu.
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6 Menu
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a Select category menu through the
BEEP. TUNE knob Press the MENU key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or 1 key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the

current song.
4 359
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Repeat

Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / While song (file) is playing 1 RPT
(RPT) key
iPod® / My Music
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
Press the MEDIA key to change the • To repeat one song (Press the key):
<USB>
mod mode in order of CD ➟ Repeats the current song.
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
Audio. screen
The folder/file name is displayed on • To repeat folder (pressing twice):
the screen. repeats all files within the current
folder.
<My Music> ❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn
off repeat.
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted. Random
<Audio CD> ❈ The USB music is automatically While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
played when a USB is connected. (RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Press the key): Plays all
songs in random order.
<CD MP3>
4 360
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on Changing Song/File Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
screen While song (file) is playing SEEK Mode
TRACK CAT
• Folder Random (Press the key) : key While file is playing FOLDER
Plays all files within the current fold- • Shortly pressing the key : Plays the (Folder Up) key
er in random order. current song from the beginning. • Searches the next folder.
iPod® mode: ALB RDM on screen ❈ If the SEEK
key is pressed While file is playing CAT
FOLDER
TRACK
• Album Random (Press the key) : again within 3 second, the previ- (Folder Down) key
Plays all files within albums of the ous song is played. • Searches the parent folder.
current category in random order. • Pressing and holding the key (over ❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
MP3 CD, USB, iPod® mode: ALL 0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song. the TUNE knob, the first file
RDM on screen While song (file) is playing within the selected folder will be
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays SEEK
TRACK key
played.
all files in random order. • Shortly pressing the key : Plays the ❈ In iPod® mode, moves to the
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn next song. Parent Folder.
off repeat. • Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the Searching Songs (File)
song.
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
Scan
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
While song (file) is playing SCAN selected song (file).
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod® mode.
4 361
MENU : Audio CD Information MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Random, through the TUNE knob or 3 to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Information features. key to display information of the cur- Folder Repeat, All Random,
rent song. Information, and Copy features.
info display.
Repeat
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT Repeat
key to repeat the current song. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
❈ Press RPT again to turn off. through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
Random ❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
4 362
Folder Random Information Copy

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or 5 through the TUNE knob or 6
key to randomly play songs within the key to display information of the cur- key.
rent song.
current folder. • This is used to copy the current
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off song into My Music. You can play
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off. info display. the copied Music in My Music
mode.
Folder Repeat ❈ If another key is pressed while
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT] copying is in progress, a pop up
through the TUNE knob or 3 asking you whether to cancel
key to repeat songs within the cur- copying is displayed.
rent folder. ❈ If another media is connected or
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off. inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
All Random ing is canceled.
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM] ❈ Music will not be played while
through the TUNE knob or 4 key copying is in progress.
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
4 363
MENU : iPod® All Random

IniPod® mode, press the MENU key Press the MENU key Set [
to set the Repeat, Album Random, All A.RDM] through the TUNE knob
Random, Information and Search fea- or 3 key.
tures. Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
Information
key.
Repeat Displays information of the current
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] song.
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
key to repeat the current song. info display.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Search
Album Random Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
Press the MENU key Set [ Alb.RDM] through the TUNE knob or 5
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM key. key.
Plays albums within the currently Displays iPod® category list.
playing category in random order. ❈ Searching iPod® category is
❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off. MENU key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
4 364
MENU : My Music Mode Random Delete

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
In My Music mode, press the MENU through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or 4
key to set the Repeat, Random, key. key.
Information, Delete, Delete All, and Plays all songs in random order. • Deletes currently playing file
Delete Selection features. ❈ Press RDM again to turn random off. In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
Information
key.
Repeat song.
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT info display. ➀ Select the file you wish to delete
key. by using the TUNE knob.
Repeats the currently playing song. ➁ Press the MENU key and select
the delete menu to delete the
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat selected file.
off.
4 365
Delete All ✽ NOTICE - USING THE My AUX

Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All] Music Feature AUX is used to play external MEDIA
through the TUNE knob or 5 key. • Even if memory is available, a currently connected with the AUX
Deletes all songs of My Music. maximum of 6,000 songs can be terminal.
stored. AUX mode will automatically start
• The same song can be copied up to when an external device is connect-
Delete Selection 1,000 times. ed with the AUX terminal.
• Memory info can be checked in
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel] the System menu of Setup. If an external device is connected,
through the TUNE knob or 6 you can also press the MEDIA key to
key. change to AUX mode.
Songs within My Music are selected ❈ AUX mode cannot be started
and deleted. unless there is an external device
➀ Select the songs you wish to connected to the AUX terminal.
delete from the list.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE AUX

➁ After selecting, press the key and Fully insert the AUX cable into the
select the delete menu. AUX terminal for use.
4 366
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
AUDIO Technology Audio Streaming : Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
[Phone] through the tune knob or
What is Bluetooth® Wireless 4 key Select [Audio Press the TUNE knob to play and
Technology? Streaming] through the TUNE pause the current song.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows knob Set On / Off
devices to be connected in a short dis-
tance, including hands-free devices, Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
stereo headsets, wireless remote con- Technology Audio
trollers, etc. For more information, visit
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Press the MEDIA key to change the
website at www.Bluetooth.com mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio. ❈ The play / pause functions may
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® not be supported in some mobile
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Wireless Technology audio will start phones.
Technology audio features playing.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ❈ Audio may not automatically start
audio may not be supported playing in some mobile phones.
depending on the compatibility of
mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On .
4 367
PHONE PHONE • Check call history and making call

➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless Making a call using the remote controller .
Technology phone features Steering-wheel mount controls
➁ The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless ➂ Press the key again to con-
Technology phone, you must first nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
• If the mobile phone is not paired or number
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone ➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
is paired or connected, the guid- the key on the steering
ance screen will be displayed. remote controller.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- ➁ The most recently called number
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® 1) button : Activates voice recog- is redialed.
Wireless Technology phone will be nition.
automatically connected. Even if 2) button : Places and transfers ❈ If call history does not exist, a
you are outside, the first Bluetooth® calls. screen asking whether to down-
Wireless Technology phone will be 3) button : Ends calls or cancels load call history is displayed. (The
automatically connected once you functions. download feature may not be sup-
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If ported in some mobile phones)
you do not want automatic
phone connection, set the
power to OFF.
4 368
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology Device WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
What is Bluetooth® Wireless that may lead to an accident,
Technology Pairing? severe personal injury, and
Pairing refers to the process of syn- death. The driver’s primary
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless responsibility is in the safe and
Technology phone or device with the legal operation of a vehicle, and
car audio system for connection. use of any handheld devices,
Pairing is necessary to connect and other equipment, or vehicle sys-
use the Bluetooth® Wireless tems which take the driver’s
Technology feature. eyes, attention and focus away
4 369
Pairing PHONE Key / Key 2. Select [OK] button to enter the [Non SSP supported device]
on the Steering Remote Pair Phone screen. (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
Controller 4. After a few moments, a screen is
entered.
When No Devices have been
Paired Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to
1. Press the PHONE key or the Technology device with the car
key on the steering remote con- audio system.
troller. The following screen is dis- 1) Car Name : Name of device as
played. shown when searching from your [SSP supported device]
device 4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
the device Hear, check the passkey on your
device and confirm.
car audio system.

4 370

features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
Press the SETUP key Select tures may not be supported
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] depending on your Bluetooth®
Select TUNE knob Wireless Technology device.
new device or select [Connect] to The following steps are the same as - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connect a previously paired device. those described in the section device auto connection
ed at a time.
are supported.
(Continued)
4 371
(Continued) (Continued) Connecting a Device

• Bluetooth related operations are • After pairing is complete, a con-
possible only with devices that tacts download request is sent
support Handsfree or audio fea- once to the mobile phone. Some Press the SETUP key Select
tures, such as a Bluetooth® mobile phones may require confir- [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
Wireless Technology mobile phone mation upon receiving a download
or a Bluetooth audio device. request, ensure your mobile phone
Technology device becomes dis- your phones user’s manual for
connected due to being out of com- additional information regarding
munication range, turning the phone pairing and connections.
device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
currently connected
devices are automatically searched 2) Paired Phone : Device that is
and reconnected. paired but not connected
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
be restored.
(Continued)
4 372
From the paired phone list, select the Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select
device you want to connect and the phone you want to switch to the
select [Connect]. highest priority, then select [Change
What is Priority? Priority] button from the Menu. The
paired phones.

4 373
✽ NOTICE Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device

phone.
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
4 374
✽ NOTICE
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
4 375

With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology which asks to download contacts the steering wheel while the call is
device connected, press the PHONE data. incoming.
key to display the Phone menu screen. • This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
manual.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used name when the incoming caller is
contacts saved for easy access saved within your contacts
2) Call History : Displays call history 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
list screen incoming number
list
settings.
4 376

History]
operate.
phones.
✽ NOTICE
be downloaded.
4 377
Contacts ✽ NOTICE (Continued)

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the
Press the PHONE key Select contact download feature has been
[Contacts] turned off within the Bluetooth®
been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In
be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may
• Mobile phone contacts are man- require device authorization upon
aged separately for each paired attempting to download contacts.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology If downloading does not normally
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- occur, check the Bluetooth®
tacts each). Previously down- Wireless Technology device set-
loaded data is maintained even if tings or the screen state.
The list of saved phone book entries the Bluetooth® Wireless • The contacts download feature
is displayed. Technology device has been dis- may not be supported in some
connected. (However, the contacts mobile phones. For more informa-
and call history saved to the phone tion of supported Bluetooth®
✽ NOTICE will be deleted if a paired phone is devices and function support,
Find a contact in an alphabetical deleted.) refer to your phone’s user manual.
order, press the MENU key. • It is possible to download contacts
status bar.
(Continued)
4 378

selected phone
screen

system.
Technology. played.
Technology Connection” section with-
in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
4 379
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume

• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
ture.
• The contacts for only the connect- As the contacts are downloaded Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
ed phone can be downloaded. from the mobile phone, a download going volume level.
progress bar is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE While on a call, the volume can be
• Upon downloading phone con- SEEK
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• Voice Recognition may not oper-
ate while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 380
Turning Bluetooth System Off

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
✽ NOTICE
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
4 381
[Prompt Feedback]
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”). ately ended and the beep will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use mand.
4 382

command.
end voice command.
4 383
Illustration on using voice commands More Help

the beep (BEEP) Beep~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
More Help manual.
More Help
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. • End voice command.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Additionally, there are phone commands like Please say a command after
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". the beep (BEEP) Contacts
manual.
Please say a command after the beep. Contacts.
to call.
Cancel
Shortly pressing the (BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep)
More Help
4 384
Voice Command List

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
used anywhere in the system. (Call by Name) this command, say the name of a contact
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
used within the current mode. nect the call.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
Ex) Call “John Smith” this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
on Mobile "Mobile" in Contacts Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
in Office "Office" in Contacts • When listening to the radio, displays the
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
at Home "Home" in Contacts Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home the most recently played radio screen.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as • When currently listening to the FM radio,
on Other "Other" in Contacts maintains the current state.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other • When listening to a different mode, displays
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- the most recently played FM screen.
mands. After saying this command, say FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen. AM Displays the AM screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
4 385

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
saved in FM Preset 1~6. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding device.
frequency. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding Mute Mutes the sound.
frequency.
XM (Satellite) • When currently listening to the XM, main- Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
tains the current state.
XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.
0~255
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
4 386

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
present and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad- Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving cast.
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 387

tial order. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Information Displays the information screen of the current file.
4 388

4 389

Command Function
4 390
ices. The " " button offers ice related inquiries and consulta-
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated immediate contact to SOS tions.
customer values through a Emergency Assistance. A detailed
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides list of commands is available in the A call is connected to the Blue Link®
consumers with fast and reliable IT Blue Link User's Manual. service center employee.
1. Navigate to
ous destinations.
4 391

phone all.
• While on a Bluetooth® call,
✽ NOTICE 6. Suspend Route
pressing the key or
The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature “Suspend Route” VR command key will display a message
supports the store of ten(10) destina- allows the user to suspend and indicating that you are cur-
tions in the TBT destinations direc- pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid- rently on a call.
tory. ance while in the guidance mode.
Rescue Center.
4 392
Eco Coach • What is My Eco MPG?

over 2.5 minutes.
This value is also shown in bar graph
as your “now” rating.
• What are Eco Rewards?

• What is Eco Coach? If you beat the average (the EPA or
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com- community), you will receive an Eco
pares your fuel economy against the Reward point.
government tested average (EPA) or See your my Hyundai web page for
other similar Hyundai models (com- more information.
munity), based on your preference.
Each month, or after every tank fill [Eco Driving] will not operate if the
up, Eco Coach rates your extended vehicle ignition is not turned on.
average and gives you a reward star Please operate with the ignition
if you best the average. turned on.
more information.
• What does the bar graph and hori-

zontal line mean?
4 393

cle.

total of 9 levels.

1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name

4 394
■ CD Player : AM9B2DMKN, AM943DMAN
❋ logo will be shown if the HD RadioTM feature is supported.
4 395
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS 2. RADIO SEEK

6. TRACK
AND FUNCTIONS • Convert to Radio mode. • When pressed shortly(under 0.8 sec-
• Each time the key is pressed,the onds)
Audio Head Unit mode is changed in order of FM1, - Radio mode : plays previous/next
(for HD RADIOTM equipped model) FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3. frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
3. MEDIA modes : changes the track,
• Convert to Media Mode Song(file)
• Each time the key is pressed, the • When pressed and held (Over 0.8
mode is changed in order of CD, seconds)
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT - Radio mode : continuously changes
Audio. the frequency. Upon release, plays
the
4. PHONE (for Bluetooth® Wireless current frequency.
Technology equipped model) - Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
• Converts to Phone mode modes : rewinds or fast forwards the
❈ When a phone is not connected, track or file
the connection screen is dis- - During a Handsfree call, controls
played. the call volume.
1. (EJECT) HD/CAT
• Ejects the disc. 5. PWR/VOL knob 7. FOLDER
• Power : Press to turn power • HD RADIO™ : Channel Change
on/off. • XM RADIO™ : Category Search
• Volume : Turn left/right to control • CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search
volume. Folder
4 396
11. SETUP Audio Head Unit

Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : turn to change broad-
cast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
8. DISP
13. DISC-IN LED CAT
• Turns the monitor display on/off. 15. FOLDER
inserted. • XM RADIO™ : Category Search
9. CLOCK • CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search
Displays the time/date/day. 14. RESET Folder
• Forced system termination and
10. SCAN system restart.
• Radio Mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes
: previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
4 397
Steering remote controller 3. SEEK 4. MODE

• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 • Each time this key is pressed, the
seconds) mode is changed in order of
- Radio mode : searches broad- FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3
cast frequencies saved to pre- ➟CD➟USB or iPod®➟AUX➟My
sets. Music➟BT Audio
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music/ • If the media is not connected or a
BT Audio) modes : changes the disc is not inserted, corresponding
track, file or chapter. modes will be disabled.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds) 5.
- Radio mode, automatically • When pressed shortly
searches broadcast frequencies - Starts voice recognition
1. VOLUME and channels
- When selecting during a voice
• Used to control volume. - Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) prompt, stops the prompt and
modes, rewinds or fast forwards converts to voice command wait-
the track or song(file) ing state
2. MUTE - BT Audio mode may not be sup- • When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
• Mutes audio volume. ported in some mobile phones. onds)
- Ends voice recognition
4 398
6. 7.
• When pressed shortly • Ends phone call
- When pressed in the phone screen,
displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
onds)
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a Bluetooth®
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back to
Handsfree (Operates only when
Handsfree is connected)
4 399
HD RadioTM Technology HD RadioTM signal delay

(for HD RADIO TM
equipped model) To overcome the delay that digital
Adjacent to traditional main stations systems inherently produce, HD
are extra local FM channels. These RadioTM technology first uses the
HD Radio Technology manufactured HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, audio signal of the analog broadcast-
under license from iBiquity Digital original music as well as deep cuts ing when you tune to an AM station
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign into traditional genre. or to the main channel of a FM sta-
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD tion. After that, the system will blend
Radio, and “Arc” logos are propri- from analog to digital signal.
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp. Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Normally, this blending is very
Technology enables local radio sta- smooth. If you experience a skip in
tions to broadcast a clean digital sig- program content of several seconds,
nal. AM sounds like today’s FM and the radio station has not implement-
FM sounds like a CD. ed HD RadioTM broadcasting correct-
ly. This is not a problem with your
audio system.
Due to the fact that sub channels are

only broadcasting digital, blending
from analog to digital signal is not pos-
sible if you tune to a sub channel. In
this case playback of the sub channel
starts after several seconds, this is a
Program Service Data: Contributes normal function.
to the superior user experience of
HD Radio Technology. Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3
Channel Guide, and other relevant
data streams.
4 400
RADIO MODE 1. Mode Display

Basic Mode Screen
2. Frequency
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. Info
Displays broadcast information.
6. HD
Changes HD Radio channels.
7. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
4 401
HD RADIO MODE 1. Mode Display 8. Info

(for HD RADIOTM equipped model) Displays currently operating mode. Displays broadcast information.
Basic Mode Screen 2. HD Channel 9. HD

Displays information for the currently Changes HD Radio channels.
playing HD Radio broadcast.
10. A.Store
3. Song Information Automatically saves frequencies with
Displays the album, artist, and title superior reception to Preset buttons.
information.
4. Frequency
5. HD Radio Broadcast Station

Displays the HD Radio broadcast
station name.
6. Preset
number [1] ~ [6].
7. Preset Display
4 402
Switching to Radio Mode Searching Radio Frequencies Using Radio Mode
Pressing the RADIO key will change Using Seek Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
the operating mode in order of FM1 SEEK
Press the TRACK key to play the Press the Preset button to display
➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3 previous/next frequency. the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within Using TUNE
RADIO key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen. desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by
200kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by
10kHz
Press the 1 ~ 6 buttons to play

the desired preset.
✽ NOTICE
focus. Press the knob to select. While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current frequency to the selected
preset.
4 403
Auto Store Listening to HD Radio Changing HD Radio stations

Press the A.Store button to automati- Stations
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons. Press the button to change
HD Radio Technology is a digital HD Radio station.
radio technology used by AM and
✽ NOTICE FM radio station to transmit audio
and data via a digital signal in con- Viewing Station Information
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Cancel] button again will junction with their analog signals.
cancel Auto Store and restore the
previous frequency.
Scan
Press the SCAN key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the SCAN key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5 Press the Info button to view sta-
seconds each. tion information.
While listening to the radio, the HD
Once scan is complete, the previous Radio icon will become displayed if
frequency will be restored. receiving an HD Radio broadcast.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the SCAN key will cancel the scan
operation.
4 404
XM RADIO™ MODE • If you are driving in a valley where ✽ NOTICE

the surrounding hills or peaks There may also be additional
block the signal from the satellite. unforeseen circumstances leading to
Features of your vehicle • If you are driving on a mountain reception problems with the XM
Satellite radio reception road where is the signal blocked by satellite™ radio signal.
mountains. Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when start-
ing XM Radio™.
SATELLITE1
You may experience difficulties in SATELLITE2
receiving XM satellite™ radio signals
in the following situations. • If you are driving in an area with tall
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a trees that block the signal (30 ft.
covered parking area. /10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
• If you are driving beneath the top
est.
level of a multi-level freeway.
• The signal can become weak in
• If you are driving under a bridge.
some areas that are not covered
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi- by the XM repeater network.
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
4 405
XM RADIO™ MODE 1. Mode Display

Basic Mode Screen
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
number [1] ~ [6].
4. Preset Display
4 406
Using SEEK Searching Categories Selecting Presets/Saving

Press the
SEEK
TRACK key to play the Select the category by using the
Presets
previous/next channel. HD/CAT
FOLDER
CAT
( FOLDER ) key and press Press the Preset button to display
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, the TUNE knob to select. the broadcast information for the
channels are changed within the channel saved to each button.
current category.
Using Tune
desired channel.
SCAN
Press the SCAN key to scan all
channels with superior reception for Channels for the selected category
are played. Press the 1 ~ 6 buttons to play
5 seconds each. the desired preset.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored. ✽ NOTICE
During Scan, pressing the SCAN While listening to a channel you
key again will cancel the scan opera- want to save as a preset, press and
tion and restore the previously hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset
played channel. buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
If the “Category” icon is displayed, the current channel to the selected
channels are changed within the cur- preset.
rent category.
4 407
✽ NOTICE - USING CDs (Continued) (Continued)

• This device has been manufac- • Clean fingerprints and dust off • Do not use abnormally shaped
tured to be compatible with soft- the disc surface (coated side) with discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-
ware bearing the following logo a soft cloth. gon-shaped) as such discs could
marks. • The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs lead to malfunctions.
• Do not clean discs with chemical attached with labels may result in • If the disc is straddled on the disc
solutions, such as record sprays, disc slot jams or difficulties in disc slot without removal for 10 sec-
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq- removal. Such discs may also onds, the disc will automatically
uids, benzene, or thinners. result in noise while playing. be re-inserted into the disc player.
• After using a disc, put the disc • Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may • Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
back in its original case to prevent not properly operate depending ported. Other discs may result in
disc scratches. on the disc manufacturer, produc- recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-
• Hold discs by their edges or with- tion method and the record R, CDs with labels)
in the center hole to prevent dam- method as used by the user. If
ages to disc surfaces. problems persist, trying using a
• Do not introduce foreign sub- different CD as continued use
stances into the disc insert/eject slot. may result in malfunctions.
Introducing foreign substances • The performance of this product
could damage the device interior. may differ depending on the CD-
• Do not insert two discs simultane- RW Drive Software.
ously. • Copy-protected CDs such as S-
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, type CDs may not function in the
differences in disc reading and device. DATA discs cannot be
playing times may occur depend- played. (However, such discs may
ing on the disc manufacturer, pro- still operate but will do so abnor-
duction method and the recording mally.)
method as used by the user. (Continued)
(Continued)
4 408
MEDIA MODE Title Icon

When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Pressing the MEDIA key will change Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
the operating mode in order of device is connected or a CD is
CD➟USB(iPod®)➟AUX➟My Music ➟ inserted, the corresponding mode
BT Audio. icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
CD
iPod®
USB
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within AUX
MEDIA key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽ NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are
two or more media modes turned
on.
4 409
AUDIO CD MODE 4. Play/Pause

Basic Mode Screen
5. Play Time
6. Info
the current track.
7. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
1. Mode
8. Repeat
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func- 9. List
tion. Moves to the list screen.
3. Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
4 410
Using Audio CD Mode Changing Tracks Selecting from the List

SEEK
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks Press the TRACK key to move to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
the previous or next track. search for the desired track.
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing. ✽ NOTICE
SEEK
track has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current track
from the beginning.
SEEK
the track has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
track. Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
to pause and press button to Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
play. Tracks
✽ NOTICE SEEK
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup- rewind or fast-forward the current
ported. Other discs may result in track.
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels) Scan
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track Press the SCAN key to play the first
information is included within the 10 seconds of each file.
audio CD.
4 411
Audio CD Mode Menu Repeat

access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), current track. Press the button again
• Repeat : Repeats the current track.
List
track list screen.
Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current disc.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play tracks Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
in random(Shuffle) order. search for tracks. Once the desired
Press the Shuffle button again to turn track is displayed, press the knob to
the Random(Shuffle) feature off. select and play.
• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks in
random(Shuffle) order.
4 412
MP3 CD MODE 4. File Info 11. List

5. Play/Pause
6. Play Time
7. Info
the current file.
1. Mode
8. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
2. Operation State
Scan, displays the currently operat-

Displays the current file number. Copies the current file into My Music
4 413
Using MP3 CD Mode Changing Files Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

SEEK
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the ✽ NOTICE
mode will automatically start and SEEK
being playing. • Pressing the TRACK key after the Scan
beginning.
SEEK
the file has been playing for 1 sec- Searching Folders
onds will start the previous file. HD/CAT CAT
Press the FOLDER ( FOLDER ) key to
select and search folders.
Selecting from the List Once the desired folder is displayed,
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to press the TUNE knob to select.
search for the desired file.
play.
✽ NOTICE
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or The first file within the selected fold-
song searches may not operate. Once you find the desired file, press er will begin playing.
Once loading is complete, try again. the TUNE knob to start playing.
4 414
MP3 CD Mode Menu ✽ NOTICE Repeat

Within this mode, you will have • When the ‘Folder File’ option is set Press the Repeat button to repeat the
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), as the default display within current file or folder.
Repeat, Copy and List features. Display setup, the album/artist/file Each time the button is pressed, the
information are displayed as feature changes in order of Repeat
detailed file information. ➟Repeat Folder➟Off.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ • Repeat: Repeats the current file.
the folder name/file name are dis- • Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
played as detailed file information. within the current Folder.
displayed only when such informa- Copying Files
file ID3 tag. Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.
Info Random(Shuffle)
Press the Info button to display Press the Shuffle button to play files
✽ NOTICE
details about the current file. in random(Shuffle) order. Selecting another feature during
Each time the button is pressed, the copying will display a pop-up asking
feature changes in order of Random whether you wish to cancel copying.
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle) To cancel, select 'Yes’.
All➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
in Random(Shuffle) order.
4 415
List
file list screen.

search for files. Once the desired file
and play.
4 416

USB DEVICE • Some USB devices may not be • Do not use the USB I/F to
• Connect the USB device after supported due to compatibility charge batteries or USB acces-
turning on the engine. The USB issues. sories that generate heat. Such
device may become damaged if • Avoid contact between the USB acts may lead to worsened per-
it is already connected when the connector with bodily parts or formance or damage to the
ignition is turned on.The USB foreign objects. device.
device may not operate properly • Repeated connecting/discon- • The device may not recognize
if the car ignition is turned on or necting of USB devices within the USB device if separately
off with the USB device connect- short periods of time may result purchased USB hubs and exten-
ed. in product malfunction. sion cables are being used.
• Heed caution to static electricity • A strange noise may occur when Connect the USB directly with
when connecting/disconnecting disconnecting the USB. the multimedia terminal of the
USB devices. • Make sure to connect/discon- vehicle.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not nect external USB devices with • When using mass storage USB
be recognized when connected the audio power turned off. devices with separate logical
as an external device. • The amount of time required to drives, only files saved to the
• When connecting an external recognize the USB device may root drive can be played.
USB device, the device may not differ depending on the type, • Files may not properly operate
properly recognize the USB is in size or file formats stored in the if application programs are
some states. USB. Such differences in time installed to the USBs.
• Only products formatted with are not indications of malfunc- • The device may not operate nor-
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will tions. mally if MP3 Players, cellular
be recognized. • The device only supports USB phones, digital cameras, or
• This device recognizes USB devices used to play music files. other electronic devices (USB
devices formatted in FAT • USB images and videos are not devices not recognized as
12/16/32 file formats. This supported. portable disk drives) are con-
device does not recognize files in (Continued) nected with the device.
NTFS file format.
(Continued)
4 417
• Charging through the USB may • Avoid use of USB
not work for some mobile memory products
devices. that can also be used
• The device may not support as key chains or
normal operation when using a mobile phone acces-
USB memory type besides sories. Use of such products may
(Metal Cover Type) USB cause damage to the USB jack.
Memory. • Connecting an MP3 device or
• The device may not support phone through various chan-
normal operation when using nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/
formats such as HDD Type, CF, USB mode may result in pop
or SD Memory. noises or abnormal operation.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by
connecting an Adaptor (SD
Type or CF Type) may not be
properly recognized.
• The device may not operate
properly when using USB HDDs
or USBs subject to connection
failures caused by vehicle vibra-
tions. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
4 418
USB MODE 4. File Info 11. List

5. Play/Pause
6. Play Time
7. Info
current file.
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode. 8. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat- 9. Repeat

Displays the current file number. Copies the current file into My Music.
4 419
Using USB Mode ✽ NOTICE Selecting from the List

• Loading may require additional Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
time if there are many files and search for the desired file.
Playing/Pausing USB Files
folders within the USB and result
Once a USB is connected, the mode in faulty list display or file search-
will automatically start and begin ing. Normal operations will resume
playing a USB file. once loading is complete.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal Cover
Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
SEEK
Press the TRACK keys to move to Once you find the desired file, press
the previous or next file. the TUNE knob to start playing.
While playing, press the button ✽ NOTICE Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

to pause and press button to • Pressing the SEEK
TRACK key after the While playing, press and hold the
play. file has been playing for 2 seconds SEEK
will start the current file from the rewind or fast-forward the current file.
beginning.
SEEK
the file has been playing for 1 sec- Scan
onds will start the previous file. Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
4 420
Searching Folders USB Mode Menu ✽ NOTICE

HD/CAT CAT
Press the FOLDER ( FOLDER )key Within this mode, you will have • When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
to select and search folders. access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), as the default display within Display
Repeat, Copy and List features. setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
Once the desired folder is displayed, file ID3 tag.
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold- Info Random(Shuffle)
er will begin playing. Press the Info button to display Press the Shuffle button to play files
details about the current file. in random(Shuffle) order.
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder➟Random
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in ran-
dom(Shuffle) order.
in random(Shuffle) order.
4 421
Repeat List
Press the Repeat button to repeat the Press the List button to display the
current file or folder. file list screen.
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current
file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the Copy button to copy the Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
current file into My Music. search for files. Once the desired file
and play.
✽ NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes’.
4 422

iPod® DEVICE • When the EQ features of an • If your iPhone® is connected to
• iPod® is a registered trademark external device, such as the both the Bluetooth® Wireless
of Apple Inc. iPod®, and the audio system are Technology and USB, the sound
• In order to use the iPod® while both active, EQ effects could may not be properly played. In
operating the keys, you must use overlap and cause sound deteri- your iPhone®, select the Dock
a dedicated iPod® cable. (the oration and distortion. connector or Bluetooth®
cable that is supplied when pur- Whenever possible, turn off the Wireless Technology to change
chasing iPod®/iPhone® prod- EQ feature within the external the sound output (source).
ucts) device upon use by connecting • iPod® mode cannot be operated
• If the iPod® is connected to the with the audio system. when the iPod® cannot be recog-
vehicle while it is playing, a high • Noise may occur when an iPod® nized due to versions that do not
pitch sound could occur for or AUX device is connected. support communication proto-
approximately 1-2 seconds When such devices are not cols.
immediately after connecting. If being used, disconnect the • For fifth generation iPod® Nano
possible, connect the iPod® to device for storage. devices, the iPod® may not be
the vehicle with the iPod® • When the iPod® or AUX device recognized when the battery
stopped/paused. power is connected to the power level is low. Please charge the
• During ACC ON state, connect- jack, playing the external device iPod® for use.
ing the iPod® through the iPod® may result in noise. In such • Search/play orders shown within
cable will charge the iPod® cases, disconnect the power con- the iPod® device may differ with
through the car audio system. nection before use. the orders shown within the
• When connecting with the iPod® • Skipping or improper operation audio system.
cable, make sure to fully insert may occur depending on the • If the iPod® malfunctions due to
the jack to prevent communica- characteristics of your iPod® an iPod® device defect, reset the
tion interference. /iPhone® device. iPod® and try again. (To learn
(Continued) (Continued) more, refer to your iPod® manu-
al)
(Continued)
4 423
(Continued) iPod® MODE 4. Song Info

• Some iPod®s may not sync with Displays information about the cur-
the System depending on its ver- Basic Mode Screen rent song.
sion. If the Media is removed
before the Media is recognized, 5. Play/Pause
then the system may not proper-
ly restore the previously operat- Changes the play/pause state.
ed mode. (iPad® charging is not
supported.) 6. Play Time
7. Random(Shuffle)
on/off.
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode. 8. Repeat
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis- 9. List
plays the currently operating func- Moves to the list screen.
tion.
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
4 424
Using iPod® Mode Changing Songs Searching Categories

SEEK
Press the TRACK key to move to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
the previous or next song. search for the desired category.
Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and ✽ NOTICE
SEEK
begin playing an iPod® song. • Pressing the TRACK key after the
song has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current song
from the beginning.
SEEK
the song has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist Once you find the desired category,
depending your iPod® product. press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
✽ NOTICE
play. SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to There are eight categories that can be
TRACK
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
rewind or fast-forward the current Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
✽ NOTICE song. Audiobooks and Podcasts.
iPod®s with unsupported communi-
cation protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.
4 425
Category Menu ✽ NOTICE

Within the iPod® Category menu, • If the search mode is accessed
you will have access to the , while playing a song, the most
Home, and features. recently searched category is dis-
played.
• Search steps upon initial connec-
tion may differ depending on the
type of iPod® device.
1. : Displays the play screen

2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root cat-
egory screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
4 426
iPod® Mode Menu Repeat AUX MODE

access to the Random(Shuffle), current song. Press the button again Using AUX Mode
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
Press the MEDIA key Select [AUX]
List
Category Menu.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play An external device can be connected
songs in random(Shuffle) order. to play music.
feature changes in order of Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
Random(Shuffle) Album➟Random search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
• Random(Shuffle) Album : Shuffle press the TUNE knob to select
Album plays album in and play.
Random(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random(Shuffle) order.
4 427
Connecting an External Device ✽ NOTICE

External audio players (Camcorders, • If an external device connector is
car VCR, etc.) can be played through connected with the AUX terminal,
a dedicated cable. then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been
connected.
• The AUX volume can be con-
trolled separately from other
audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the con-
nector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
4 428
MY MUSIC MODE 4. File Info 11. List

5. Play/Pause
6. Play Time
7. Info
current file.
1. Mode 8. Random(Shuffle)
Displays currently operating mode. Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
2. Operation State
Scan, displays the currently operat- Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
ing function.
10. Delete
3. File Index
Deletes the current file.
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
4 429
Using My Music Mode Changing Files Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

SEEK
Playing/Pausing My Music Files rewind or fast-forward the current file.
✽ NOTICE
SEEK Scan
beginning.
SEEK
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
While playing, press the button Selecting from the List

to pause and press button to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
play. search for the desired file.
✽ NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will
be disabled.
Once you find the desired file, press

the TUNE knob to start playing.
4 430
My Music Mode Menu Random List

Within this mode, you will have Press the Shuffle button to play files Press the List button to display the
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle), in random order. Press the button file list screen.
Repeat, Delete and List features. again to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the Delete button to delete the
current file. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
Info search for files. Once the desired file
Press the Info button to display and play.
details about the current file.
✽ NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
4 431
List Menu 1) : Moves to the previous screen ✽ NOTICE

From the List screen, it is possible to 2) Sellect All: Selects all files • If there is memory available, up to
delete files you previously saved into 3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected 6,000 files can be saved.
My Music. files • Identical files cannot be copied
4) Delete: Deletes selected files more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go
to SETUP [System] [Memory
After selecting the files you want to Information]
delete, press the Delete button to
delete the selected files.
Press the Select All button or individ-

ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
Unselect All button and Delete buttons
will be enabled.
4 432

Bluetooth® Wireless • When returning to Bluetooth®
Technology Audio Mode Wireless Technology Audio mode
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology after ending a call, the mode may
Audio Mode can be used only not automatically restart in some
when a Bluetooth® Wireless mobile phones.
Technology phone has been con- • Receiving an incoming call or mak-
nected. ing an outgoing call while playing
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available Audio may result in audio interfer-
when connecting mobile phones ence.
that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
4 433
Bluetooth® Wireless ✽ NOTICE Changing Files

Technology AUDIO MODE The play/pause feature may operate
SEEK
Press the TRACK key to move to
differently depending on the mobile the previous or next file.
Using Bluetooth® Wireless phone.
Technology Audio Mode Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® device has not been connected, press
Wireless Technology Audio the SETUP key [Phone] button to
display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection screen.
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start. It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.

play.
4 434
✽ NOTICE
• If the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio is not operating
properly, check whether the fea-
ture is turned off at SETUP
[Phone] [Streaming Audio]. If the
feature is off, turn back on and try
again.
• If music is not yet playing from
your mobile device after converting
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play but-
ton once may start playing the
mode. Check to see that music is
playing from the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device after
converting to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode.
4 435
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing Using the PHONE Button

Technology Device or the Steering Wheel Control
Button
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device

car audio system.
4 436
[Non SSP supported device] ✽ NOTICE Pairing through [PHONE]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing) Setup
displayed where the passkey is Press the SETUP key Select
entered. [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to Select TUNE knob
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device] If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

4. After a few moments, a screen is devices are paired but none are cur-
displayed 6 digits passkey. rently connected, pressing the
Hear, check the passkey on your PHONE key or the key on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology steering wheel displays the following
device and confirm. screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the The following steps are the same as
[Connect] to connect a previously those described in the section
paired device. "When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

4 437
✽ NOTICE • Bluetooth related operations are • After pairing is complete, a con-

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology possible only with devices that sup- tacts download request is sent once
features supported within the vehi- port Handsfree or audio features, to the mobile phone. Some mobile
cle are as follows. Some features such as a Bluetooth® Wireless phones may require confirmation
may not be supported depending Technology mobile phone or a upon receiving a download
on your Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth audio device. request, ensure your mobile phone
Technology device. • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless accepts the connection. Refer to
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree Technology device becomes discon- your phones user’s manual for
calls nected due to being out of commu- additional information regarding
- Operations during a call (Switch to nication range, turning the device phone pairing and connections.
Private, Switch to call waiting, OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless
MIC on/off) Technology communication error,
- Downloading Call History corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless
- Downloading Mobile Contacts Technology devices are automati-
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology cally searched and reconnected.
device auto connection • If the system becomes unstable due
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming to communication errors between
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless the car Handsfree and the
Technology devices can be paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
to the Car Handsfree system. device, reset the device by turning
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless off and back on again. Upon reset-
Technology device can be connect- ting Bluetooth® Wireless
ed at a time. Technology device, the system will
• Other devices cannot be paired be restored.
are supported.
4 438
Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the Changing Priority
Press the SETUP key Select device you want to connect and
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] press the Connect button.
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
paired phones.

currently connected
4 439
From the paired phone list, select ✽ NOTICE Disconnecting a Device

highest priority, then press the the selected phone is set as a priority
Change priority button from the Menu. Press the SETUP key Select
phone.
The selected device will be changed [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
to the highest priority.

press the Disconnect button.
4 440


the Delete button.
4 441

settings.
Phone Menu Screen
✽ NOTICE
manual.
✽ NOTICE
Favorite.
4 442

phones.
mode.

number
2) Call : If a number has been 1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
entered, calls the number If no name when the incoming caller is
number has been entered, switch- saved within your contacts
es to call history screen 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
one digit at a time
4 443
During a Handsfree Call Call History • Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s • Up to 50 received, dialed and
name if the incoming caller is missed calls are stored in Call
saved within your contacts History.
2) Incoming Number : Displays the • Time of received/dialed calls and
incoming number A list of incoming, outgoing and call time information are not saved.
3) Call time : Displays the call time missed calls is displayed.
4) End : Ends call Press the Download button to down-
heard by the other party 1) Call History :
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off - Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
✽ NOTICE 2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
4 444

ed.)
-Displays downloaded contacts
-Connects call upon selection status bar.
alphabetical order.
entries
4 445

For more information, refer to the Technology Connection” section
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- within Bluetooth® Wireless
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous

screen
selected phone
4 446
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume

• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
ture.
• To learn more about whether
your mobile phone supports con-
tacts downloads, refer to your
mobile phone user’s manual.
As the contacts are downloaded Use the , buttons to adjust the
from the mobile phone, a download outgoing volume level.
progress bar is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE While on a call, the volume can be
• Upon downloading phone contacts, SEEK
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 447
Turning Bluetooth System Off ✽ NOTICE

Press the SETUP key Select To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Technology back on, go to SETUP
Off] [Phone] and press “Yes”.
system.
4 448
steering wheel remote controller. Say [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] Joe”).
a command. [Prompt Feedback]
mand after the voice instruction and steering remote controller.
steering remote controller.
4 449
❈ Illustration on using voice commands More Help

the beep (BEEP) Ding~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
More Help manual.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands. • End voice command.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod®'. Please say a command after
Additionally, there are phone commands like the beep (BEEP) Ding~
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's Contacts
manual.
Contacts
• Skipping Voice Recognition to call (BEEP)
Cancel
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the (BEEP) Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

More Help
4 450
Voice Command List

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
used anywhere in the system. (Call by Name) this command, say the name of a contact
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
used within the current mode. nect the call.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
Ex) Call “John Smith” this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
on Mobile "Mobile" in Contacts Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
in Office "Office" in Contacts • When listening to the radio, displays the
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
at Home "Home" in Contacts Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home the most recently played radio screen.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as • When currently listening to the FM radio,
on Other "Other" in Contacts maintains the current state.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other • When listening to a different mode, displays
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- the most recently played FM screen.
mands. After saying this command, say FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen. AM Displays the AM screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
4 451

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
saved in FM Preset 1~6. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding device.
frequency. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding Mute Mutes the sound
frequency.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
XM (Satellite) • When currently listening to the XM, main-
tains the current state.
XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.
0~255
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
4 452

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad-
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 453
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation USB and MP3 CD operation

tial order. Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
4 454

4 455
SETUP Display Settings Mode Pop-up

Starting Mode [Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the SETUP key to display the Press the SETUP key Select
Setup screen. [Display] Select [Brightness]
This feature is used to display the

Mode Pop-up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
You can select and control options Use the , buttons to adjust the
related to [Display], [Sound], When this feature is turned on,
screen brightness or set the pressing the RADIO or MEDIA key
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
[System]. will display the Mode Pop-up screen.
Night mode.
Press the Default button to reset.
✽ NOTICE
The media Mode Pop-up screen can
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness be displayed only when two or more
automatically media modes have been connected.
2) Daylight : Always maintains the
brightness on high
3) Night : Always maintains the
brightness on low
4 456
MP3 Information Display Sound Settings Use the , , , buttons to

Press the SETUP key Select adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
[Display] Select [Media Display] Use the , buttons to adjust the
Sound Settings Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the SETUP key Select Press the Default button to reset.
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name

and folder name
2) Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
4 457
Virtual Sound SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Voice Recognition Volume

Press the SETUP key Select Control) Press the SETUP key Select
[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound] Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] Select [Voice Recognition
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
Vol.]
This feature is used to set the Power Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Bass, Power Treble and Surround Voice Recognition volume.
sound options. The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
4 458
Touch Screen Beep Blue Link Voice Volume Clock/Calendar Setting

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select Clock Setting
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen [Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice
Beep] Vol.]
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes setting and select
AM/PM.

This feature is used to turn the touch Blue Link Voice Volume.
screen beep on/off.
❈ Blue Link® may differ depending

on the selected audio.
✽ NOTICE
Press and hold the CLOCK key (over
0.8 seconds) to set the
Clock/Calendar screen.
4 459
Calendar Setting Time Format Clock Display

[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar [Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format] [Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings] Display (Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.

Use the , buttons to set the clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Month, Day and Year setting.
4 460
System Setting Prompt Feedback Language

[System] Select [Prompt Feedback] [System] Select [Language]
HD Radio™ On/Off
[System] Select [FM], [AM]
This feature is used to select the This feature is used to change the
desired prompt feedback option from system and voice recognition lan-
ON and OFF. guage.
This feature is used to set whether to If the language is changed, the sys-
receive FM/AM HD Radio™ broad- tem will restart and apply the select-
casts. 1) ON : When using voice recognition, ed language.
provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance prompts
4 461
Memory Information REAR VIEW CAMERA

Press the SETUP key Select (if equipped)
[System] Select [Memory Information]
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the transmission
shift lever is positioned into reverse
(R).
This feature displays information ically stop operating when set to a
related to system memory. the transmission shift lever is posi-
tioned to another gear.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use CAUTION
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
4 462
ices. The " " button offers imme- ice related inquiries and consulta-
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated diate contact to SOS Emergency tions.
customer values through a Assistance. A detailed list of com-
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides mands is available in the Blue Link A call is connected to the Blue Link®
consumers with fast and reliable IT User's Manual. service center employee.
1. Navigate to
ous destinations.
4 463

phone all.
• While on a Bluetooth® call,
✽ NOTICE 6. Suspend Route
pressing the key or
The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature “Suspend Route” VR command key will display a message
supports the store of ten(10) destina- allows the user to suspend and indicating that you are cur-
tions in the TBT destinations direc- pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid- rently on a call.
tory. ance while in the guidance mode.
Rescue Center.
4 464
Eco Coach • What does the bar graph and hori-

zontal line mean?
• What is My Eco MPG?

• What is Eco Coach? over 2.5 minutes.
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com- This value is also shown in bar graph
pares your fuel economy against the as your “now” rating.
government tested average (EPA) or
other similar Hyundai models (com- • What are Eco Rewards?
munity), based on your preference. If you beat the average (the EPA or
Each month, or after every tank fill community), you will receive an Eco
up, Eco Coach rates your extended Reward point.
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average. See your my Hyundai web page for
more information.
more information.
[Eco Driving] will not operate if the
vehicle ignition is not turned on.
Please operate with the ignition
turned on.
4 465

cle.

total of 9 levels.

1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name

7. Current Street name
4 466
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 • Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 • Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 • Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 • Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 • Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 • Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Downhill brake control (DBC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 • Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 5
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 • Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 • Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 • GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
5 2
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle Necessary inspections
CALIFORNIA PROPO- • Be sure that all windows, outside Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
SITION 65 WARNING mirror(s), and outside lights are engine coolant, brake fluid, and
Engine exhaust and a wide vari- clean. washer fluid should be checked on a
ety of automobile components • Check the condition of the tires. regular basis, with the exact interval
and parts, including compo- depending on the fluid. Further
nents found in the interior fur- • Check under the vehicle for any details are provided in Section 7,
nishings in a vehicle, contain or sign of leaks. “Maintenance”.
emit chemicals known to the • Be sure there are no obstacles
State of California to cause can- behind you if you intend to back up.
cer and birth defects and repro- WARNING
ductive harm. In addition, cer- Driving while distracted can
tain fluids contained in vehicles result in a loss of vehicle con-
and certain products of compo- trol, that may lead to an accident,
nent wear contain or emit chem- severe personal injury, and
icals known to the State of death. The driver’s primary
California to cause cancer and responsibility is in the safe and
birth defects or other reproduc- legal operation of a vehicle, and
tive harm. use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
5 3
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
WARNING WARNING - Driving under
All passengers must be proper- the influence of alcohol or
• Position the seat so that all con- drugs
ly belted whenever the vehicle
trols are easily reached.
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts” Drinking and driving is danger-
• Adjust the inside and outside in section 3 for more informa- ous. Drunk driving is the num-
rearview mirrors. tion on their proper use. ber one contributor to the high-
• Be sure that all lights work. way death toll each year. Even a
• Check all gauges. small amount of alcohol will
WARNING affect your reflexes, percep-
• Check the operation of warning
tions and judgement. Driving
lights when the ignition switch is Always check the surrounding while under the influence of
turned to the ON position. areas near your vehicle for peo- drugs is as dangerous or more
• Release the parking brake and ple, especially children, before dangerous than driving drunk.
make sure the brake warning light putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse). You are much more likely to
goes out.
have a serious accident if you
For safe operation, be sure you are drink or take drugs and drive.
familiar with your vehicle and its
If you are drinking or taking
equipment.
drugs, do not drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been drink-
ing or taking drugs. Choose a
designated driver or call a cab.
5 4
WARNING
• When you intend to park or
stop the vehicle with the
engine on, be careful not to
depress the accelerator pedal
for a long period of time. It may
overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden
stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possi-
bly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely
stored.
• If you do not focus on driving,
it may cause an accident. Be
careful when operating what
may disturb driving such as
audio or heater. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive safely.
5 5
KEY POSITIONS
Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch position ACC (Accessory)
(if equipped) LOCK The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
✽ NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning
the ignition switch to the ACC posi-
tion, turn the key while turning the
steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
OCM050001 OCM050002
Whenever a front door is opened, the The steering wheel locks to protect
ignition switch will be illuminated for against theft. The ignition key can be
your convenience, provided the igni- removed only in the LOCK position.
tion switch is not in the ON position. When turning the ignition switch to
The light will go off immediately the LOCK position, push the key
when the ignition switch is turned on inward at the ACC position and turn
or go off after about 30 seconds the key toward the LOCK position.
when the door is closed.
5 6
ON
WARNING - Ignition key (Continued)
The warning lights can be checked
• Never turn the ignition switch • Never reach for the ignition
before the engine is started. This is
to LOCK or ACC while the vehi- switch, or any other controls
the normal running position after the
cle is moving.This would result through the steering wheel
engine is started.
in loss of directional control while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if The presence of your hand or
the engine is not running to prevent and braking function, which
could cause an accident. arm in this area could cause a
battery discharge. loss of vehicle control, an acci-
• The anti-theft steering column dent and serious bodily injury
START lock is not a substitute for the or death.
parking brake. Before leaving
Turn the ignition switch to the START the driver’s seat, always make • Do not place any movable
position to start the engine. The sure the shift lever is engaged objects around the driver’s seat
engine will crank until you release in P (Park), set the parking as they may move while driving,
the key; then it returns to the ON brake fully and shut the engine interfere with the driver and lead
position. The brake warning light can off. Unexpected and sudden to an accident.
be checked in this position. vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
5 7
Starting the engine 4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta- CAUTION
tionary. If the engine stalls while you are
WARNING in motion, do not attempt to
Start driving at moderate engine
Always wear appropriate shoes speeds. (Steep accelerating and move the shift lever to the P
when operating your vehicle. decelerating should be avoided.) (Park) position. If traffic and
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, road conditions permit, you may
ski boots,etc.) may interfere put the shift lever in the N
with your ability to use the (Neutral) position while the
brake or the accelerator pedal. vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
1. Make sure the parking brake is position in an attempt to restart
applied. the engine.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
CAUTION
when the shift lever is in the N Do not engage the starter for
(Neutral) position. more than 10 seconds. If the
3. Turn the ignition switch to START engine stalls or fails to start, wait
and hold it there until the engine 5 to 10 seconds before re-engag-
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), ing the starter. Improper use of
then release the key. the starter may damage it.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
5 8
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated engine start/stop Engine start/stop button posi- ✽ NOTICE
button tion You are able to turn off the engine
OFF (START/RUN) or vehicle power
(ON), only when the vehicle is not in
motion.
White CAUTION
In an emergency situation while
To turn off the engine (START/RUN the vehicle is in motion, you are
position) or vehicle power (ON posi- able to turn the engine off and
tion), press the engine start/stop but- to the ACC position by pressing
ton with the shift lever in the P (Park) the engine start/stop button for
position. When you press the engine more than 2 seconds or 3 times
ODM052006 start/stop button without the shift successively within 3 seconds.
Whenever the front door is opened, lever in the P (Park) position, the If the vehicle is still moving, you
the engine start/stop button will illu- engine start/stop button will not can restart the engine without
minate for your convenience. The change to the OFF position but to the depressing the brake pedal by
light will go off after about 30 sec- ACC position. pressing the engine start/stop
onds when the door is closed. It will button with the shift lever in the
also go off immediately when the N (Neutral) position.
theft-alarm system is armed.
5 9
ACC(Accessory) ON START/RUN
Orange Blue Not illuminated
With automatic transaxle With automatic transaxle With automatic transaxle

Press the engine start/stop button Press the engine start/stop button To start the engine, depress the
while it is in the OFF position without while it is in the ACC position without brake pedal and press the engine
depressing the brake pedal. depressing the brake pedal. start/stop button with the shift lever in
the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) posi-
tion. For your safety, start the engine
The electrical accessories are opera- The warning lights can be checked with the shift lever in the P (Park)
tional. before the engine is started. Do not position.
leave the engine start/stop button in
If the engine start/stop button is in the ON position for a long time. The
the ACC position for more than 1 battery may discharge, because the
hour, the button is turned off auto- engine is not running.
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
5 10
✽ NOTICE (Continued)
If you press the engine start/stop WARNING
• Never press the engine • Never reach for the engine
button without depressing the brake start/ stop button or any other
pedal, the engine will not start and start/stop button while the
vehicle is in motion. This controls through the steering
the engine start/stop button changes wheel while the vehicle is in
as follow: would result in loss of direc-
motion. The presence of your
OFF ➔ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC tional control and braking
hand or arm in the area could
function, which could cause
cause loss of vehicle control,
✽ NOTICE an accident.
an accident and serious bodi-
If you leave the engine start/stop • Before leaving the driver's ly injury or death.
button in the ACC or ON position seat, always make sure the
shift lever is engaged in P • Do not place any movable
for a long time, the battery will dis- objects around the driver's
charge. (Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off. seat as they may move while
Unexpected and sudden vehi- driving, interfere with the driv-
cle movement may occur if er and lead to an accident.
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
5 11
Starting the engine 5.Do not wait for the engine to warm • Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
up while the vehicle remains sta- cle, if it is far away from you, the
tionary. engine may not start.
WARNING Start driving at moderate engine • When the engine start/stop button
Always wear appropriate shoes speeds. (Steep accelerating and is in the ACC position or above, if
when operating your vehicle. decelerating should be avoided.) any door is opened, the system
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, checks for the smart key. If the
ski boots,etc.) may interfere with smart key is not in the vehicle, the
your ability to use the brake, “ ” indicator and a message
accelerator pedal. “Key is not in the vehicle” will appear
on the instrument cluster and LCD
1. Carry the smart key or leave it display. And if all doors are closed,
inside the vehicle. the chime will sound for 5 seconds.
2. Make sure the parking brake is The indicator or warning will turn off
firmly applied. while the vehicle is moving. Always
have the smart key with you.
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully. WARNING
You can also start the engine when The engine will start, only when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) the smart key is in the vehicle.
position.
Never allow children or any per-
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
son who is unfamiliar with the
It should be started without depress- vehicle to press the engine
ing the accelerator pedal. start/stop button or related parts.
5 12
(Continued)
CAUTION • When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
If the engine stalls while the you cannot start the engine nor-
vehicle is in motion, do not mally.
attempt to move the shift lever Replace the fuse with a new one. If
to the P (Park) position. If the it is not possible, you can start the
traffic and road conditions per- engine by pressing the engine
mit, you may put the shift lever start/stop button for 10 seconds
in the N (Neutral) position while while it is in the ACC position. The
the vehicle is still moving and engine can start without depressing
press the engine start/stop but- the brake pedal. But for your safe-
ton in an attempt to restart the ODM052007 ty always depress the brake pedal
engine. before starting the engine.
✽ NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you CAUTION
can start the engine by pressing Do not press the engine
the engine start/stop button with start/stop button for more than
the smart key. 10 seconds except when the
The side with the lock button stop lamp fuse is blown.
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
(Continued)
5 13
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic
transaxle has 6 forward speeds and
one reverse speed. The individual
speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in Drive, depending on
+ (UP) the position of the accelerator pedal.
✽ NOTICE
- ( D OW N ) The first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the PCM
(Powertrain Control Module).
Depress the brake pedal and the knob button when shifting.
Press the knob button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
ODM052011
5 14
For smooth operation, depress the Transaxle ranges

brake pedal when shifting from N CAUTION The indicator lights in the instrument
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear. • To avoid damage to your cluster displays the shift lever posi-
transaxle, do not accelerate tion when the ignition switch is in the
WARNING - Automatic the engine in R (Reverse) or ON position.
transaxle any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• Always check the surrounding P (Park)
areas near your vehicle for • When stopped on an incline,
do not hold the vehicle sta- Always come to a complete stop
people, especially children, before shifting into P (Park). This
before shifting a vehicle into tionary with engine power.
Use the service brake or the position locks the transaxle and pre-
D (Drive) or R (Reverse). vents the front wheels from rotating.
parking brake.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the • Do not shift from N (Neutral)
shift lever is in the P (Park) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
position; then set the parking (Reverse) when the engine is
brake fully and shut the above idle speed.
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
5 15
R (Reverse) N (Neutral)
WARNING Use this position to drive the vehicle The wheels and transaxle are not
• Shifting into P (Park) while the backward. engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
vehicle is in motion will cause even on the slightest incline unless
the drive wheels to lock which CAUTION the parking brake or service brakes
will cause you to lose control are applied.
of the vehicle. Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
• Do not use the P (Park) posi- (Reverse); you may damage the D (Drive)
tion in place of the parking transaxle if you shift into R This is the normal forward driving
brake. Move the shift lever to (Reverse) while the vehicle is in position. The transaxle will automati-
the P (Park) position and set motion, except as explained in cally shift through a 6-gear sequence,
the parking brake fully. “Rocking the vehicle”, in this providing the best fuel economy and
• Never leave a child unattend- manual. power.
ed in a vehicle.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
CAUTION depress the accelerator fully, at which
The transaxle may be damaged time the transaxle will automatically
if you shift into P (Park) while downshift to the next lower gear.
the vehicle is in motion.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
5 16
In sports mode, moving the shift (Continued)

lever backwards and forwards will • In sports mode, when the engine
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. rpm approaches the red zone, the
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the transaxle will upshift automatically.
sports mode allows gearshifts with • To maintain the required levels of
the accelerator pedal depressed. vehicle performance and safety,
Up (+) : Push the lever forward the system may not execute cer-
once to shift up one gear. tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards • When accelerating from a stop on
once to shift down one gear. a slippery road, push the shift
OANNDR2102 lever forward into the +(up) posi-
Sports mode
✽ NOTICE tion. This causes the transaxle to
• In sports mode, the driver must shift into 2nd gear which is better
Whether the vehicle is stationary or for smooth accelerating on a slip-
in motion, sports mode is selected by execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care pery road.
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate. to keep the engine speed below the
To return to D (Drive) range opera- red zone.
tion, push the shift lever back into the • In sports mode, only the 6 forward
main gate. gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P
(Park) position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
(Continued)
5 17
Shift lock system Ignition key interlock system

For your safety, the automatic (if equipped)
transaxle has a shift lock system The ignition key cannot be removed
which prevents shifting the transaxle unless the shift lever is in the P
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Park) position. If the ignition switch
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is is in any other position, the key can-
depressed. not be removed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition OANNDR3103
switch to the ON position to R.
Shift-lock override
3. Move the shift lever to R.
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
WARNING tion into R (Reverse) position with
the brake pedal depressed, continue
Always fully depress the brake depressing the brake, then do the fol-
pedal before and while shifting lowing:
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad- 1. Carefully remove the cap covering
vertent motion of the vehicle the shift-lock override access hole.
which could injure persons in 2. Insert a screwdriver into the
or around the vehicle. access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have you vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
5 18
Good driving practices • Always use the parking brake and

• Never move the shift lever from P shift into P (Park) when parking the WARNING
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other vehicle. Do not depend on placing • Always buckle-up! In a colli-
position with the accelerator pedal the transaxle in P (Park) to keep sion, an unbelted occupant is
depressed. the vehicle from moving. significantly more likely to be
• Exercise extreme caution when seriously injured or killed than
• Never move the shift lever into "P"
driving on a slippery surface. Be a properly belted occupant.
when the vehicle is in motion.
especially careful when braking, • Avoid high speeds when cor-
• Be sure the vehicle is completely accelerating or shifting gears. On a nering or turning.
stopped before you attempt to shift slippery surface, an abrupt change
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). • Do not make quick steering
in vehicle speed can cause the
wheel movements, such as
• Never take the vehicle out of gear drive wheels to lose traction and
sharp lane changes or fast,
and coast down a hill. This may be the vehicle to go out of control.
sharp turns.
extremely hazardous. Always leave • Optimum vehicle performance and
the vehicle in gear when moving. • The risk of rollover is greatly
economy is obtained by smoothly
increased if you lose control
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can depressing and releasing the
of your vehicle at highway
cause them to overheat and mal- accelerator pedal.
speeds.
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down, • Loss of control often occurs if
move the shift lever to sports mode two or more wheels drop off the
and shift to a lower gear. roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• When using sports mode, slow
down before shifting to a lower • In the event your vehicle
gear. leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
5 19
Moving up a steep grade from a

WARNING standing start
If your vehicle becomes stuck in To move up a steep grade from a
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you standing start, depress the brake
may attempt to rock the vehicle pedal, move the shift lever to D
free by moving it forward and (Drive) and release the parking
backward. Do not attempt this brake. Depress the accelerator grad-
procedure if people or objects ually while releasing the service
are anywhere near the vehicle. brakes.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
5 20
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)

Engine power can be delivered to the Tight corner brake effect
front and rear wheels for maximum WARNING - Off road
traction. AWD is useful when extra driving CAUTION - AWD
traction is required, such as, when This vehicle is designed prima-
driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or When turning sharply on a
rily for on road use although it paved road at low speed while
snow-covered roads. Occasional off- can operate effectively off road.
road use such as established in all wheel drive, steering con-
It was not designed to drive in trol will be difficult.
unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is challenging off-road conditions.
always important when traveling off- Driving in conditions that Tight corner brake effect is a unique
highway that the driver carefully exceed the vehicle's intended characteristic of all-wheel drive vehi-
reduces the speed to a level that design or the driver's experi- cles caused by the difference in tire
does not exceed the safe operating ence level may result in severe rotation at the four wheels.
speed for those conditions. In gener- injury or death.
al, off-road conditions provide less Sharp turns at low speeds should be
traction and braking effectiveness carried out with caution.
than normal road conditions. The
driver must be especially alert to
avoid driving on slopes which tilt the
vehicle to either side.
These factors must be carefully con-
sidered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with
the driving surface and under control
in these conditions is always the dri-
ver's responsibility for the safety of
him/herself and passengers.
5 21
ALL Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle oper-
ates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles under nor-
mal operating conditions. However, if the system deter-
AWD AUTO
mines that there is a need for the AWD mode, the
(AWD LOCK is engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels
deactivated) automatically without driver intervention.
(Indicator light is
not illuminated) • When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehi-
cle moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp
grades, off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy
roads, etc., to maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at
AWD LOCK speeds above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWD
(Indicator light is AUTO mode at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the
illuminated) vehicle decelerates to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph),
however, the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCK
mode again.
✽ NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indi-
cator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivat-
ed. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
5 22
For safe all wheel drive opera-

tion
WARNING - All wheel

driving
When conditions demand the
use of four-wheel drive, all func-
tions of your vehicle are
exposed to extreme stress.
Slow down and be ready for
changes in the composition and HILL1 HILL2
traction of the surface under
your tires. If you have any • When you are driving up or down
doubt about the safety of the hills drive as straight as possible. WARNING - Hills
conditions you are facing, stop Use extreme caution in going up or
Driving across the contour of
and consider the best way to down steep hills, since you may flip
steep hills can be extremely
proceed. Do not exceed the abil- your vehicle over depending on the
dangerous. This danger can
ity of yourself or your vehicle to grade, terrain and water/mud con-
come from slight changes in the
operate safely. ditions.
wheel angle which can destabi-
lize the vehicle or, even if the
• Do not try to drive in deep standing vehicle is maintaining stability
water or mud since such conditions under power, it can lose that
can stall your engine and clog your stability if the vehicle stops its
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down forward motion. Your vehicle
steep hills since it requires extreme may roll over without warning
skill to maintain control of the vehi- and without time for you to cor-
cle. rect a mistake that could cause
serious injury or death.
5 23
• You must consciously take the • Always hold the steering wheel firm-
effort to learn how to corner in an ly when you are driving off-road.
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your • Make sure all passengers are
experience in conventional 2WD wearing seat belts.
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in AWD mode. You must
drive more slowly in AWD. WARNING - Wind danger
• Drive carefully off-road because If you are driving in heavy wind,
your vehicle may be damaged by the vehicle's higher center of
rocks or roots of trees. Become gravity decreases your steering
familiar with the off-road conditions control capacity and requires
where you are going to be before ODMEDR2146 you to drive more slowly.
you begin driving.
WARNING - Steering • If you need to drive through water,
wheel stop your vehicle, set your transfer
WARNING - AWD to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
Reduce speed when you turn Do not grab the inside of the at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
corners. The center of gravity of steering wheel when you are
AWD vehicles is higher than driving off-road. You may hurt
that of conventional 2WD vehi- your arm by a sudden steering WARNING - Driving
cles, making them more likely to maneuver or from steering through water
roll over when you turn corners wheel rebound due to impact Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast. with objects on the ground. You too fast in water, the water can
could lose control of the steer- get into the engine compartment
ing wheel. and wet the ignition system,
causing your vehicle to sudden-
ly stop. If this happens and your
vehicle is in a tilted position,
your vehicle may roll over.
5 24
✽ NOTICE
WARNING - AWD driving CAUTION - Mud or snow
• Do not drive through water if the
level is higher than the bottom of • Avoid high cornering speed. If one of the front or rear wheels
the vehicle. • Do not make quick steering begins to spin in mud, snow,
• Check your brake condition once wheel movements, such as etc. the vehicle can sometimes
you are out of mud or water. Press sharp lane changes or fast, be driven out by depressing the
the brake pedal several times as sharp turns. accelerator pedal further; how-
you move slowly until you feel nor- ever avoid running the engine
• The risk of rollover is greatly continuously at high rpm
mal braking forces return. increased if you lose control
• Shorten your scheduled mainte- because doing so could dam-
of your vehicle at high speed. age the AWD system.
nance interval if you drive in off-
road conditions such as sand, mud • In a collision, an unbelted per-
or water (see “Maintenance under son is significantly more like-
severe usage conditions” in section ly to die compared to a person
7). Always wash your vehicle thor- wearing a seat belt.
oughly after off road use, especially • Loss of control often occurs if
cleaning the bottom of the vehicle. two or more wheels drop off
• Since the driving torque is always the roadway and the driver
applied to the 4 wheels the per- over steers to re-enter the
formance of the AWD vehicle is roadway. In the event your
greatly affected by the condition of vehicle leaves the roadway, do
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehi- not steer sharply. Instead,
cle with four tires of the same size slow down before pulling
and type. back into the travel lanes.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary
tow truck. Make sure that the
vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for towing.
5 25
Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle
WARNING - Rollover WARNING
is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle As with other Sport Utility Your vehicle is equipped with
(SUV). SUV’s have higher ground Vehicle (SUVs), failure to oper- tires designed to provide safe
clearance and a narrower track to ate this vehicle correctly may ride and handling capability. Do
make them capable of performing in a result in loss of control, an acci- not use a size and type of tire
wide variety of off-road applications. dent or vehicle rollover. and wheel that is different from
Specific design characteristics give • Utility vehicles have a signifi- the one that is originally
them a higher center of gravity than cantly higher rollover rate installed on your vehicle. It can
ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the than other types of vehicles. affect the safety and perform-
higher ground clearance is a better ance of your vehicle, which
• Specific design characteris- could lead to steering failure or
view of the road, which allows you to tics (higher ground clearance,
anticipate problems. They are not rollover and serious injury.
narrower track, etc.) give this When replacing the tires, be
designed for cornering at the same vehicle a higher center of
speeds as conventional passenger sure to equip all four tires with
gravity than ordinary vehicles. the tire and wheel of the same
vehicles, any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform • SUVs not designed for corner- size, type, tread, brand and
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. ing at the same speeds as load-carrying capacity. If you
Due to this risk, driver and passengers conventional vehicles. nevertheless decide to equip
are strongly recommended to buckle • Avoid sharp turns or abrupt your vehicle with any tire/wheel
their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an maneuvers. combination not recommended
unbelted person is more likely to die • In a rollover crash, an unbelt- by HYUNDAI for off road driv-
than a person wearing a seat belt. ed person is significantly ing, you should not use these
There are steps that a driver can make more likely to die than a per- tires for highway driving.
to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all son wearing a seat belt. Make
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt sure everyone in the vehicle is
maneuvers, do not load your roof rack properly buckled up.
with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
5 26
WARNING - Jacked WARNING - Dynamometer

vehicle testing
While a full-time AWD vehicle is Keep away from the front of the
raised on a jack, never start the vehicle while the vehicle is in
engine or cause the tires to gear on the dynamometer. This
rotate. is very dangerous as the vehi-
There is a danger that rotating cle can jump forward and cause
tires touching the ground could serious injury or death.
Temporary free roller
cause the vehicle to fall off the
jack and to jump forward or Roll tester (speedometer)
rearward. ONCEDR3147
1. Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be 2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tested on a special four wheel tester for a speedometer test as
chassis dynamometer. shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
✽ NOTICE 4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-
Never engage the parking brake porary free roller as shown in the
while performing these tests. illustration.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not

be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following:
5 27
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes (Continued)
Your vehicle has power-assisted
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot • Wet brakes may impair the
brakes that adjust automatically vehicle’s ability to safely slow
through normal usage. resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high down; the vehicle may also
In the event that the power-assisted pull to one side when the
brake temperatures, exces-
brakes lose power because of a brakes are applied. Applying
sive brake lining and pad
stalled engine or some other reason, the brakes lightly will indicate
wear, and increased stopping
you can still stop your vehicle by whether they have been affect-
distances.
applying greater force to the brake ed in this way. Always test your
pedal than you normally would. The • When descending a long or brakes in this fashion after
stopping distance, however, will be steep hill, shift to a lower gear driving through deep water. To
longer. and avoid continuous applica- dry the brakes, apply them
tion of the brakes. Continuous lightly while maintaining a safe
When the engine is not running, the
brake application will cause forward speed until brake per-
reserve brake power is partially
the brakes to overheat and formance returns to normal.
depleted each time the brake pedal
could result in a temporary
is applied. Do not pump the brake • Always, confirm the position
loss of braking performance.
pedal when the power assist has of the brake and accelerator
been interrupted. (Continued) pedal before driving. If you
Pump the brake pedal only when don't check the position of the
necessary to maintain steering con- accelerator and brake pedal
trol on slippery surfaces. before driving, you may
depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
5 28
In the event of brake failure Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and CAUTION
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can new pads are required, you will hear • To avoid costly brake repairs,
make an emergency stop with the a high-pitched warning sound from do not continue to drive with
parking brake. The stopping dis- your front brakes or rear brakes (if worn brake pads.
tance, however, will be much greater equipped). You may hear this sound • Always replace the front or
than normal. come and go or it may occur when- rear brake pads as pairs.
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
WARNING - Parking conditions or climates may cause a WARNING - Brake wear
brake brake squeal when you first apply (or This brake wear warning sound
Applying the parking brake lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor- means your vehicle needs serv-
while the vehicle is moving at mal and does not indicate a problem ice. If you ignore this audible
normal speeds can cause a with your brakes. warning, you will eventually
sudden loss of control of the lose braking performance,
vehicle. If you must use the which could lead to a serious
parking brake to stop the vehi- accident.
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
5 29
Parking brake Releasing the parking brake

CAUTION
Applying the parking brake
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emer-
gency situation. It could dam-
age the vehicle system and
endanger driving safety.
OCM050016
OCM050015 Foot type
Foot type To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
To engage the parking brake, first
second time while applying the foot
apply the foot brake and then
brake. The pedal will automatically
depress the parking brake pedal
extend to the fully released position.
down as far as possible.
5 30
If the parking brake does not release

(Continued)
or does not release all the way, have
the system checked by an authorized • All vehicles should always
HYUNDAI dealer. have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
WARNING of the vehicle which can injure
• To prevent unintentional occupants or pedestrians.
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the W-75
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely Check the brake warning light by
positioned in P (Park) for turning the ignition switch ON (do not
automatic transaxle equipped start the engine). This light will be
vehicles. illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
• Never allow anyone who is START or ON position.
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the Before driving, be sure the parking
parking brake is released brake is fully released and the brake
unintentionally, serious injury warning light is off.
may occur. If the brake warning light remains on
(Continued) after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may be
a malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
5 31
If at all possible, cease driving the Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (Continued)
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while • Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
operating the vehicle and only con- WARNING ered roads.
tinue to drive the vehicle until you ABS (or ESC) will not prevent • With tire chains installed.
can reach a safe location or repair accidents due to improper or • On roads where the road sur-
shop. dangerous driving maneuvers. face is pitted or has different
Even though vehicle control is surface height.
improved during emergency
braking, always maintain a safe The safety features of an ABS
distance between you and (or ESC) equipped vehicle
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should not be tested by high
should always be reduced dur- speed driving or cornering.
ing extreme road conditions. This could endanger the safe-
ty of yourself or others.
The braking distance for vehi-
cles equipped with an anti-lock
braking system or (Electronic
Stability Control System) may be
longer than for those without it
in the following road conditions.
During these conditions the
vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
(Continued)
5 32
The ABS continuously senses the ✽ NOTICE • Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
speed of the wheels. If the wheels A click sound may be heard in the tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
are going to lock, the ABS system engine compartment when the vehi- ficient stopping distance. Always
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic cle begins to move after the engine is maintain a safe distance from the
brake pressure to the wheels. started. These conditions are normal vehicle in front of you.
When you apply your brakes under and indicate that the anti-lock brake • Always slow down when cornering.
conditions which may lock the system is functioning properly. The anti-lock brake system cannot
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ prevent accidents resulting from
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- excessive speeds.
responding sensation in the brake • On loose or uneven road surfaces,
pedal. This is normal and it means operation of the anti-lock brake
your ABS is active. system may result in a longer stop-
In order to obtain the maximum ben- ping distance than for vehicles
efit from your ABS in an emergency equipped with a conventional
situation, do not attempt to modulate brake system.
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation warrants and allow
the ABS to control the force being
delivered to the brakes.
5 33
(Continued) CAUTION
• The ABS warning light will • When the brakes are operated
stay on for approximately 3 continuously on a road having
seconds after the ignition poor traction, the ABS will be
switch is ON. During that time, active and the ABS warning
the ABS will go through self- light may illuminate. Pull your
diagnosis and the light will go vehicle over to a safe place
off if everything is normal. If and stop the engine.
the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your • Restart the engine. If the ABS
ABS. Contact an authorized warning light is off, then your
W-78
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as ABS system is normal.
possible. Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS. Contact
CAUTION an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
• If the ABS warning light is on as soon as possible.
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. In this
case, however, your regular
brakes will work normally.
(Continued)
5 34
✽ NOTICE Electronic Stability Control

When you jump start your vehicle (ESC) WARNING
because of a drained battery, the Never drive too fast for the road
engine may not run as smoothly and conditions or too quickly when
the ABS warning light may turn on cornering. The ESC system will
at the same time. This happens not prevent accidents. Excessive
because of the low battery voltage. It speed in turns, abrupt maneu-
does not mean your ABS is malfunc- vers, and hydroplaning on wet
tioning. surfaces can result in severe
• Do not pump your brakes! accidents.
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
ODM052046
The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle’s brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
5 35
ESC operation When operating • When moving out of the

ESC ON condition When the ESC is in opera- mud or driving on a slip-
tion, the ESC indicator light pery road, the engine rpm
When the ignition switch is in the ON (revolutions per minute)
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF blinks:
may not increase even if
indicator lights illuminate for approxi- • When you apply your
you press the accelerator
mately three seconds and goes off, brakes under conditions
pedal deeply. This is to
then the ESC is turned on. which may lock the
maintain the stability and
If this light stays on, your vehicle may wheels, you may hear
traction of the vehicle and
have a malfunction with the ESC sounds from the brakes, or
does not indicate a prob-
system. Have your vehicle checked feel a corresponding sen-
lem.
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer sation in the brake pedal.
as soon as possible. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
• When the ESC activates,
the engine may not
respond to the accelerator
as it does under routine
conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was
in use when the ESC acti-
vates, the cruise control
automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be
reengaged when the road
conditions allow. See
“Cruise Control System”
later in this chapter.
5 36
ESC OFF condition • State 2 Indicator lights

Press the ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator ■ ESC indicator light
light illuminates and ESC OFF warn-
ing chime will sound. At this state,
To cancel ESC operation : the engine control function and brake
• State 1 control function does not operate. In
other words, the vehicle stability con- ■ ESC OFF indicator light
Press the ESC OFF button shortly
(ESC OFF indicator light illumi- trol function does not operate any
nates). At this state, the engine con- more.
trol function does not operate. In If the ignition switch is placed to the
other words, the traction control LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
function does not operate but only ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
the brake control function operates. engine, the ESC will automatically When the ignition switch is placed to
turn on again. the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
5 37
ESC OFF usage

WARNING When driving CAUTION
When the ESC is blinking, this To prevent damage to the
The ESC OFF mode should only be
indicates the ESC is active: transaxle:
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
Drive slowly and NEVER stuck in snow or mud by temporarily • Do not allow wheel(s) of one
attempt to accelerate. NEVER stopping operation of the ESC to axle to spin excessively while
press the ESC OFF button while maintain wheel torque. the ESC, ABS, and brake
the ESC indicator light is blink- warning lights are displayed.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
ing or you may lose control of The repairs would not be cov-
the ESC OFF button while driving on
the vehicle resulting in an acci- ered by the vehicle warranty.
a flat road surface.
dent. Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) exces-
sively while these lights are
displayed.
CAUTION
• When operating the vehicle on
Driving with varying tire or a dynamometer, ensure the
wheel sizes may cause the ESC ESC is turned off (ESC OFF
system to malfunction. When light illuminated).
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your origi-
nal tires for this vehicle. ✽ NOTICE
Turning the ESC OFF does not
affect ABS or standard brake sys-
tem operation.
5 38
Vehicle stability management VSM operation VSM operation off

(VSM) (if equipped) When the VSM is in operation, ESC If you press the ESC OFF button to
This system provides further indicator light ( ) blinks. turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
enhancements to vehicle stability When the vehicle stability manage- cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
and steering responses when a vehi- ment is operating properly, you can light ( ) illuminates.
cle is driving on a slippery road or a feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle To turn on the VSM, press the button
vehicle detected changes in coeffi- and/or abnormal steering responses again. The ESC OFF indicator light
cient of friction between right wheels (EPS). This is only the effect of brake goes out.
and left wheels when braking. and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as
gradient or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
5 39
Malfunction indicator Downhill brake control (DBC)

The VSM system will automatically WARNING
be deactivated if a malfunction has • The Vehicle Stability
been detected somewhere in the Management system is not a
Electric Power Steering system or substitute for safe driving
the VSM system. If a malfunction is practices but a supplemen-
detected, the ESC indicator light will tary function only. It is the
illuminate and remain on. If the ESC responsibility of the driver to
indicator light ( ) or EPS warning always check the speed and
light remains on, take your vehicle to the distance to the vehicle
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and ahead. Always hold the steer-
have the system checked. ing wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to ODM052047
✽ NOTICE operate according to the dri-
• The VSM is designed to function ver's input through steering, The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
above approximately 9 mph (15 acceleration, and braking, assists the driver when descending a
km/h) on curves. even with the VSM opera- steep hill without the driver depress-
• The VSM is designed to function tional. Always follow all the ing the brake pedal. It slows the vehi-
above approximately 18 mph (30 normal precautions for driv- cle to approximately 6.3 mph (10
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on ing at safe speeds for the con- km/h) and lets the driver concentrate
a split-mu road. The split-mu road ditions – including driving in on steering the vehicle.
is made of surfaces which have dif- inclement weather and on a DBC defaults to the OFF position
ferent friction forces. slippery road. whenever the ignition is turned on.
• Driving with varying tire or The DBC can be turned on or off by
wheel sizes may cause the pushing the button.
VSM system to malfunction.
When replacing tires, make
sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
5 40
Indicator
Mode Description
light
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
Green light 25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode.
Standby
illuminated The system maintains the standby mode when vehicle speed is under approximately
38 mph (60km/h).
In the standby mode, DBC will activate automatically under the following conditions:
Green light
Activated • The incline is over a certain degree.
blink
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is not depressed.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
Green light
OFF • The DBC button is pressed again.
OFF
• The vehicle speed is over approximately 38 mph (60 km/h).
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
Temporarily Green light • The hill is not steep enough.
deactivated illuminated • The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
When the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
WARNING
If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or there is an operational problem.
The DBC will not activate. If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates even though the DBC system has
cooled, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
5 41
✽ NOTICE Hill-start assist control (HAC)

• The DBC does not turn ON in the WARNING A vehicle has the tendency to roll
P (Park) position. • Unnecessary or unwanted back on a steep hill when the driver
• The DBC may not activate if the DBC activation may result in begins to accelerate after a stop. The
ESC (or ABS) is activated. an accident. Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) pre-
• Noise or vibration may occur from • On a very steep hill even vents the vehicle from rolling back by
the brakes when the DBC is acti- though the brake pedal or operating the brakes automatically
vated. accelerator pedal is depressed for about 1.5 seconds. The brakes
• The rear stop light comes on when the DBC may not deactivate. are released when the accelerator
the DBC is activated. pedal is depressed or after about 1.5
• Always turn OFF the DBC on nor- seconds.
mal roads. The DBC might acti-
vate from the standby mode dur-
ing abrupt cornering or driving WARNING
over speed bumps. The HAC is activated only for
about 1.5 seconds, so always
depress the accelerator pedal to
begin accelerating after a stop.
5 42
✽ NOTICE Good braking practices • Driving through water may get the
• The HAC does not operate when brakes wet. They can also get wet
the transaxle shift lever is in the P when the vehicle is washed. Wet
WARNING brakes can be dangerous! Your
(Park) or N (Neutral) position. • Whenever you leave or park
• The HAC activates even though vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
your vehicle, always set the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
the ESC is off but it does not acti- parking brake as far as possi-
vate when the ESC has malfunc- cause the vehicle to pull to one side.
ble and fully engage the vehi- To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
tioned. cle's transaxle into the P (Park) lightly until the braking action returns
position. If the parking brake is to normal, taking care to keep the
not fully engaged, the vehicle vehicle under control at all times. If
may move inadvertently and the braking action does not return to
injure yourself and others. normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
• All vehicles should always do so and call an authorized
have the parking brake fully HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
engaged when parking to • Don't coast down hills with the
avoid inadvertent movement vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
of the vehicle which can injure ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
occupants or pedestrians. gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
• After being parked, check to be gear so that engine braking will
sure the parking brake is not help you maintain a safe speed.
engaged and that the parking • Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
brake indicator light is out before Resting your foot on the brake
driving away. pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because it can result in the
brakes overheating and losing their
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
5 43
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv- • Under some conditions your park-
ing, apply the brakes gently and ing brake can freeze in the
keep the vehicle pointed straight engaged position. This is most like-
ahead while you slow down. When ly to happen when there is an
you are moving slowly enough for it accumulation of snow or ice
to be safe to do so, pull off the road around or near the rear brakes or if
and stop in a safe place. the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
• If your vehicle is equipped with an that the parking brake may freeze,
automatic transaxle, don't let your apply it only temporarily while you
vehicle creep forward. To avoid put the gear selector lever in P
creeping forward, keep your foot (automatic transaxle) and block the
firmly on the brake pedal when the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
vehicle is stopped. roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake • Do not hold the vehicle on an
and place the shift lever in P (auto- incline with the accelerator pedal.
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is This can cause the transaxle to
facing downhill, turn the front overheat. Always use the brake
wheels into the curb to help keep pedal or parking brake.
the vehicle from rolling. If your vehi-
cle is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help
keep the vehicle from rolling. If
there is no curb or if it is required
by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
5 44
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING (Continued)
• If the cruise control is left on, • Pay particular attention to the
(CRUISE indicator light in the driving conditions whenever
instrument cluster is illumi- using the cruise control sys-
nated), the cruise control can tem.
be switched on accidentally. • Be careful when driving
Keep the cruise control sys- downhill using the cruise con-
tem off (CRUISE indicator trol system, which may
light OFF) when the cruise increase the vehicle speed.
control is not in use, to avoid
ODM052024 inadvertently setting a speed.
1.Cruise indicator • Use the cruise control system
2.Cruise set indicator only when driving on open
highways in good weather.
The cruise control system allows you • Do not use the cruise control
to program the vehicle to maintain a when it may not be safe to
constant speed without depressing keep the vehicle at a constant
the accelerator pedal. speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on
This system is designed to function slippery (rainy, icy or snow-
above approximately 25 mph (40 covered) or winding roads or
km/h). over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
(Continued)
5 45
✽ NOTICE Cruise control switch To set cruise control speed:

• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
ODMEDR2016 ODM052025
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi- CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys- 1. Press the CRUISE button on the
tion. tem on or off. steering wheel to turn the system
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control on. The CRUISE indicator light in
operation. the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 25 mph
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con- (40 km/h).
trol speed.
5 46
To increase cruise control set To decrease the cruising

speed: speed:
ODM052027
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired ODM052026 ODM052027
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi- Follow either of these procedures: Follow either of these procedures:
nate. Release the accelerator • Move the lever up (to RES+) and • Move the lever down (to SET-) and
pedal at the same time. The hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
desired speed will automatically Release the lever at the speed you slow down. Release the lever at the
be maintained. want. speed you want to maintain.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may • Move the lever up (to RES+) and • Move the lever down (to SET-) and
slow down or speed up slightly while release it immediately. release it immediately.
going uphill or downhill. The cruising speed will increase by The cruising speed will decrease
1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this move the lever down (to SET-) in
manner. this manner.
5 47
To temporarily accelerate with To cancel cruise control, do Each of these actions will cancel
the cruise control on: one of the following: cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
If you want to speed up temporarily
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
when the cruise control is on,
system off. If you wish to resume
depress the accelerator pedal.
cruise control operation, move up the
Increased speed will not interfere
lever (to RES+) located on your
with cruise control operation or
steering wheel. You will return to your
change the set speed.
previously preset speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
ODM052028
• Depress the brake pedal.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 9 mph
(15 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
5 48
To resume cruising speed at ✽ NOTICE To turn cruise control off, do

more than approximately 25 Always check the road conditions one of the following:
mph (40 km/h): when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
ODM052025
ODM052026
• Press the CRUISE button (the
If any method other than the CRUISE indicator light in the
CRUISE button was used to cancel instrument cluster will go off).
cruising speed and the system is still • Turn the ignition off.
activated, the most recent set speed
Both of these actions cancel cruise
will automatically resume when you
control operation. If you want to
move the lever up (to RES+).
resume cruise control operation,
It will not resume, however, if the repeat the steps provided in “To set
vehicle speed has dropped below cruise control speed” on the previous
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). page.
5 49
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

The BSD (Blind spot detection) sys-
tem uses a radar sensor to alert the WARNING
driver while driving. • While driving, keep your eyes
It senses the rear side territory of the on the road and be aware of
vehicle and provides information to your surroundings even
the driver. though the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system is operat-
ing.
1 BSD (Blind spot detection)
• The BSD (Blind spot detec-
When a vehicle approaches you and tion) system is a convenient
OAN053105 is detected in your blind spot area, feature designed to assist the
the system will warn you. The warn- driver. However, do not rely
ing range depends on your vehicle solely on the system to alert
speed. However, if your vehicle is you when vehicles are
about 6 mph (10 km/h) faster than the approaching. Always pay
other vehicle, the system will not proper attention to your sur-
warn you. roundings and use caution
2 LCA (Lane change assist) when changing lanes.
When a vehicle approaches you at
high speed, the system will warn you.
3 RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves rearward
and the sensor detects an approach-
ing vehicle on either the left or right
side, the system will warn you.
OVI053129L
5 50
Operating conditions Warning type 1st stage

The indicator on the switch will illumi- The system will activate when:
nate when the BSD (Blind spot 1.The system is on
detection) system switch is pressed
with the ignition switch ON. 2.Vehicle speed is above 18.6 mph
(30 km/h)
If the vehicle speed exceeds 18.6
mph (30 km/h) the system will acti- 3.Other vehicles are detected in the
vate. boundaries of the radar system.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
ONCNDO3007
and ON the system returns to the
previous state. If a vehicle is detected within the
When the system is not used, turn boundary of the system, a yellow
the system off by turning off the warning light will illuminate in the
switch. outside rearview mirror glass.
When the system is turned on, the Once the detected vehicle moves out
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec- of the boundary of the system, the
onds on the outside rearview mirror. warning will turn off.
5 51
2nd stage When the second stage alert is acti- BSD Detecting Sensor
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror housing and
a warning alarm will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch
back to its original position, the sec-
ond stage alert will be deactivated.
OVI053121
ONCEDR3017
The sensors are located on the

inside of the rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OVI053122
The second stage alarm will activate

when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane.
5 52
Warning message Rear cross traffic alert
ONC043075N
ONC043074N If there is a problem with BSD, a warn- OVI053131

ing message will appear to notify the
If the detecting sensor performance driver. If this occurs, have a vehicle When your vehicle moves backwards
is low or overheated by foreign sub- checked by an authorized HYUNDAI from a parking position, the sensor
stances on the rear bumper, the dealer. detects approaching vehicles to the
message will appear to notify the left or right side direction and gives
driver. Also, a warning message may information to the driver.
appear when there is heavy rain or in
a large area with nothing to detect. If
this occurs, inspect the rear bumper
for any debris or dirt which may
affect the operation of the BSD sen-
sor. If the system does not activate
normally after removing the sub-
stances on the rear bumper, consult
5 53
Operating conditions - RCTA Warning type ❈ If the left or right side bumper of
• When the ignition is ON, if you your vehicle is blocked by a barrier
press the BSD switch, the switch or another vehicle, the system
indicator illuminates and the system sensing ability may be limited.
turns on.
• The system operates when the WARNING
vehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10 • The warning light on the out-
km/h) when the gear shift lever is in side rearview mirror housing
reverse (R). will illuminate whenever a
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) vehicle is detected at the rear
detecting range is 0.5 - 20m (1.6 - side by the system.
65.6 ft) based on the side direction. To avoid accidents, do not
If an approaching vehicle is within OVI053132 focus only on the warning
the sensing range and is traveling • If the vehicle detected by sensors light and neglect to see the
at a speed of 2.5 - 22 mph (4 - 36 approaches your vehicle, the warn- surroundings of the vehicle.
km/h), the system will detect the ing chime will sound and the warn- • Drive safely even though the
vehicle. However, the system sensing light will blink on the outside vehicle is equipped with a
ing range may vary based on the rearview mirror. BSD (Blind spot detection)
surrounding conditions. Always system. Do not solely rely on
use good judgment and pay atten- • If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range from behind your the system but check for your-
tion to your surroundings while self before changing lanes.
driving even while using the BSD vehicle, moves in the opposite
system. direction away from your vehicle or The system may not alert the
moves slowly, the warning is can- driver in some conditions so
celled. always check the surround-
• The system may not operate prop- ings while driving.
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
5 54
- The rear bumper near the sensor is - When going down or up a steep
CAUTION covered or hidden with foreign mat- road where the height of the lane is
• The system may not work ter such as a sticker, bumper guard, different.
properly if the bumper has bicycle stand etc. - When the other vehicle drives at
been replaced or if repair work - The rear bumper is damaged or the the rear very nearby or drives very
has been done near the sen- sensor is out of place. close.
sor. - The height of the vehicle is - When the temperature of the rear
• The detection area differs changed or altered such as when bumper is high.
according to the roads width. the cargo area is loaded with heavy - When a trailer or carrier is installed.
If the road is narrow the sys- objects, or has abnormal tire pres-
tem may detect other vehicles sure etc. Outside rearview mirror may not
in the next lane. - Due to bad weather such as heavy alert the driver when:
• Conversely, if the road is very rain or snow. - The outside rearview mirror hous-
wide the system may not - A fixed object is near such as a ing is very muddy or dirty.
detect other vehicles. guardrail, tunnel etc. - The driver or passenger window is
• The system may turn off due - A large amount of metal sub- very muddy or dirty.
to strong electromagnetic stances are near the vehicles such - The driver or passenger window is
waves. as a construction area. tinted with a very dark tint.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck. This device complies with Part
Non-operating conditions 15 of the FCC rules.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
Driver's Attention Operation is subject to the following
- A flatbed trailer is near.
The driver must be extra cautious in two conditions:
- If the vehicle has been started at
the following situations in which the 1. This device may not cause harm-
the same time as the vehicle next to
system may not assist the driver and it and the vehicle has started to ful interference, and
may not function properly. move. 2. This device must accept any inter-
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc. - When the other vehicle passes by ference received, including inter-
- The area around the sensor is cov- very fast. ference that may cause undesired
ered by rain, snow, mud, etc operation.
- When changing lanes.
5 55
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM

Active ECO operation • When the Active ECO button is Limitation of Active ECO oper-
pressed the ECO indicator (green) ation:
will illuminate to show that the
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating.
Active ECO is operating, the system
• When the Active ECO is activated, operation is limited even though there
it will remain on until the Active is no change in the ECO indicator.
ECO button is pressed again.
• When the coolant temperature is
Active ECO does not turn off when
low: The system will be limited until
the engine is restarted. To turn off
engine performance becomes nor-
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
mal.
button again.
• When driving up a hill: The system
• If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-
will be limited to gain power when
tem will return to normal mode.
ODM052050 driving uphill because the engine
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- torque is restricted.
ciency by controlling certain engine When Active ECO is activated : • When using sports mode: The sys-
and transaxle system operating • The engine noise may get louder. tem will be limited according to the
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends shift location.
• The vehicle speed may slightly be
on the driver's driving habit and road • When the accelerator pedal is
reduced.
condition. deeply depressed for a few sec-
• The air conditioner performance onds: The system will be limited,
may be affected. judging that the driver wants to
speed up.
5 56
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends • Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This • Keep your vehicle in good condi-
mainly on your style of driving, where can increase fuel consumption and tion. For better fuel economy and
you drive and when you drive. also increase wear on these com- reduced maintenance costs, main-
Each of these factors affects how ponents. In addition, driving with tain your vehicle in accordance
many miles (kilometers) you can get your foot resting on the brake pedal with the maintenance schedule in
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To oper- may cause the brakes to overheat, Section 7. If you drive your vehicle
ate your vehicle as economically as which reduces their effectiveness in severe conditions, more frequent
possible, use the following driving and may lead to more serious con- maintenance is required (see
suggestions to help save money in sequences. Section 7 for details).
both fuel and repairs: • Take care of your tires. Keep them • Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a inflated to the recommended pres- mum service, your vehicle should
moderate rate. Don't make "jack- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too be kept clean and free of corrosive
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts much or too little, results in unnec- materials. It is especially important
and maintain a steady cruising essary tire wear. Check the tire that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
speed. Don't race between stop- pressures at least once a month. allowed to accumulate on the
lights. Try to adjust your speed to • Be sure that the wheels are underside of the vehicle. This extra
the traffic so you don't have to aligned correctly. Improper align- weight can result in increased fuel
change speeds unnecessarily. ment can result from hitting curbs consumption and also contribute to
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possi- or driving too fast over irregular corrosion.
ble. Always maintain a safe dis- surfaces. Poor alignment causes • Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
tance from other vehicles so you faster tire wear and may also result sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
can avoid unnecessary braking. in other problems as well as reduces fuel economy.
This also reduces brake wear. greater fuel consumption. • Don't let the engine idle longer
• Drive at a moderate speed. The than necessary. If you are waiting
faster you drive, the more fuel your (and not in traffic), turn off your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate engine and restart only when
speed, especially on the highway, you're ready to go.
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
5 57
• Remember, your vehicle does not Keeping a vehicle in good operating

require extended warm-up. After condition is important both for econ-
the engine has started, allow the omy and safety. Therefore, have an
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform
prior to placing the vehicle in gear. scheduled inspections and mainte-
In very cold weather, however, give nance.
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
WARNING - Engine off
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. during
Lugging is driving too slowly in too motion
high a gear resulting engine buck-
ing. If this happens, shift to a lower Never turn the engine off to
gear. Over-revving is racing the coast down hills or anytime the
engine beyond its safe limit. This vehicle is in motion. The power
can be avoided by shifting at the steering and power brakes will
recommended speeds. not function properly without the
engine running. Instead, keep
• Use your air conditioning sparingly. the engine on and downshift to
The air conditioning system is an appropriate gear for engine
operated by engine power so your braking effect. In addition, turn-
fuel economy is reduced when you ing off the ignition while driving
use it. could engage the steering wheel
• Open windows at high speeds can lock resulting in loss of vehicle
reduce fuel economy. steering which could cause
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds serious injury or death.
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
5 58
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions • If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use Reducing the risk of a rollover
When hazardous driving conditions second gear. Accelerate slowly to This multi-purpose passenger vehicle
are encountered such as water, avoid spinning the drive wheels. is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- • Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or (SUV). SUV’s have higher ground
ards, follow these suggestions: other non-slip material under the clearance and a narrower track to
• Drive cautiously and allow extra drive wheels to provide traction make them capable of performing in a
distance for braking. when stalled in ice, snow, or mud. wide variety of off-road applications.
Specific design characteristics give
• Avoid sudden braking or steering. them a higher center of gravity than
• When braking with non-ABS WARNING - Downshifting ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the
brakes pump the brake pedal with Downshifting with an automatic higher ground clearance is a better
a light up-and-down motion until transaxle, while driving on slip- view of the road, which allows you to
the vehicle is stopped. pery surfaces can cause an anticipate problems. They are not
accident. The sudden change in designed for cornering at the same
tire speed could cause the tires speeds as conventional passenger
WARNING - ABS to skid. Be careful when down- vehicles, any more than low-slung
Do not pump the brake pedal on shifting on slippery surfaces. sports vehicles are designed to per-
a vehicle equipped with ABS. form satisfactorily in off-road condi-
tions. Due to this risk, driver and pas-
sengers are strongly recommended to
buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
5 59
Rocking the vehicle

WARNING - Rollover WARNING If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
As with other Sports Utility Your vehicle is equipped with free it from snow, sand, or mud, first
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate tires designed to provide safe turn the steering wheel right and left
this vehicle correctly may result ride and handling capability. Do to clear the area around your front
in loss of control, an accident or not use a size and type of tire wheels. Then, shift back and forth
vehicle rollover. and wheel that is different from between R (Reverse) and any for-
• Utility vehicles have a signifi- the one that is originally ward gear in vehicles equipped with
cantly higher rollover rate installed on your vehicle. It can an automatic transaxle. Do not race
than other types of vehicles. affect the safety and perform- the engine, and spin the wheels as lit-
ance of your vehicle, which tle as possible. If you are still stuck
• Specific design characteris- could lead to steering failure or
tics (higher ground clearance, after a few tries, have the vehicle
rollover and serious injury. pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
narrower track, etc.) give this When replacing the tires, be
vehicle a higher center of engine overheating and possible
sure to equip all four tires with damage to the transaxle.
gravity than ordinary vehicles. the tire and wheel of the same
• A SUV is not designed for cor- size, type, tread, brand and
nering at the same speeds as load-carrying capacity. If you CAUTION
conventional vehicles. nevertheless decide to equip Prolonged rocking may cause
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt your vehicle with any tire/wheel engine over-heating, transaxle
maneuvers. combination not recommended damage or failure, and tire dam-
• In a rollover crash, an unbelt- by HYUNDAI for off road driv- age.
ed person is significantly ing, you should not use these
more likely to die than a per- tires for highway driving.
son wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
5 60
Smooth cornering Driving at night

WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
✽ NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OUN056051 OCM053010
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. Avoid braking or gear changing in Because night driving presents more
corners, especially when roads are hazards than driving in the daylight,
WARNING wet. Ideally, corners should always here are some important tips to
be taken under gentle acceleration. If remember:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in you follow these suggestions, tire
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you • Slow down and keep more distance
wear will be held to a minimum. between you and other vehicles, as
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and it may be more difficult to see at
backward. Do not attempt this night, especially in areas where
procedure if people or objects there may not be any street lights.
are anywhere near the vehicle. • Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
During the rocking operation the glare from other driver's headlights.
vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward or backward as it becomes
unstuck, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
5 61
• Keep your headlights clean and Driving in the rain • If your tires are not in good condi-
properly aimed on vehicles not tion, making a quick stop on wet
equipped with the automatic head- pavement can cause a skid and
light aiming feature. Dirty or improp- possibly lead to an accident. Be
erly aimed headlights will make it sure your tires are in good shape.
much more difficult to see at night. • Turn on your headlights to make it
• Avoid staring directly at the head- easier for others to see you.
lights of oncoming vehicles. You • Driving too fast through large pud-
could be temporarily blinded, and it dles can affect your brakes. If you
will take several seconds for your must go through puddles, try to
eyes to readjust to the darkness. drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
1VQA3003 your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
Rain and wet roads can make driving operation returns.
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
5 62
Driving in flooded areas Highway driving

Avoid driving through flooded areas Tires: WARNING
unless you are sure the water is no • Underinflated or overinflated
higher than the bottom of the wheel tires can cause poor handling,
hub. Drive through any water slowly. loss of vehicle control, and
Allow adequate stopping distance sudden tire failure leading to
because brake performance may be accidents, injuries, and even
affected. death. Always check the tires
for proper inflation before
After driving through water, dry the
driving. For proper tire pres-
brakes by gently applying them sev-
sures, refer to section 8,
eral times while the vehicle is moving
“Tires and wheels”.
slowly.
• Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is danger-
Driving off-road 1VQA1004
ous. Worn-out tires can result
Drive carefully off-road because your Adjust the tire inflation pressures to in loss of vehicle control, col-
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or specification. Low tire inflation pres- lisions, injury, and even death.
roots of trees. Become familiar with sures will result in overheating and Worn-out tires should be
the off-road conditions where you possible failure of the tires. replaced as soon as possible
are going to drive before you begin and should never be used for
Avoid using worn or damaged tires driving. Always check the tire
driving. which may result in reduced traction tread before driving your vehi-
or tire failure. cle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to sec-
✽ NOTICE tion 7, “Tires and wheels”.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
5 63
Fuel, engine coolant and engine

oil:
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
5 64
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions Snow tires
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
may be necessary to use snow tires cle, make sure they are radial tires of
or to install tire chains on your tires. the same size and load range as the
If snow tires are needed, it is neces- original tires. Mount snow tires on all
sary to select tires equivalent in size four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
and type of the original equipment handling in all weather conditions.
tires. Failure to do so may adversely Keep in mind that the traction provid-
affect the safety and handling of your ed by snow tires on dry roads may
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding, not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
rapid acceleration, sudden brake inal equipment tires. You should drive
1VQA3005 applications, and sharp turns are cautiously even when the roads are
Severe weather conditions in the potentially very hazardous practices. clear. Check with the tire dealer for
winter result in greater wear and During deceleration, use engine maximum speed recommendations.
other problems. To minimize the braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
problems of winter driving, you brake applications on snowy or icy WARNING - Snow tire size
should follow these suggestions: roads may cause skids to occur. You Snow tires should be equivalent
need to keep sufficient distance in size and type to the vehicle's
between the vehicle in operation in standard tires. Otherwise, the
front and your vehicle. Also, apply safety and handling of your vehi-
the brake gently. It should be noted cle may be adversely affected.
that installing tire chains on the tire
will provide a greater driving force,
but will not prevent side skids. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
✽ NOTICE ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check the state laws before fitting
tire chains.
5 65
Tire chains When using tire chains, attach them

to the drive wheels as follows. CAUTION
2WD : Front wheels • Make sure the snow chains are
AWD : All four wheels the correct size and type for
your tires. Incorrect snow
If a full set of chains is not chains can cause damage to
available for an AWD vehicle, the vehicle body and suspen-
chains may be installed on sion and may not be covered
the front wheels only. by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty. Also, the snow chain
connecting hooks may be dam-
aged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
1VQA3007 chains to come loose from the
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are tire. Make sure the snow chains
thinner, they can be damaged by are SAE class “S” certified.
mounting some types of snow chains • Always check chain installa-
on them. Therefore, the use of snow tion for proper mounting after
tires is recommended instead of driving approximately 0.3 to
snow chains. Do not mount tire 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to
chains on vehicles equipped with ensure safe mounting.
aluminum wheels; snow chains may Retighten or remount the
cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains if they are loose.
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
5 66
Chain installation Use high quality ethylene gly-

When installing chains, follow the WARNING - Tire chains col coolant
manufacturer's instructions and • The use of chains may Your vehicle is delivered with high
mount them as tightly as you can. adversely affect vehicle han- quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
Drive slowly with chains installed. If dling. cooling system. It is the only type of
you hear the chains contacting the • Do not exceed 20 mph (30 coolant that should be used because
body or chassis, stop and tighten km/h) or the chain manufac- it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
them. If they still make contact, slow turer’s recommended speed ing system, lubricates the water
down until it stops. Remove the limit, whichever is lower. pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
chains as soon as you begin driving to replace or replenish your coolant
on cleared roads. • Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns, and in accordance with the maintenance
other road hazards, which may schedule in section 7. Before winter,
WARNING - Mounting cause the vehicle to bounce. have your coolant tested to assure
chains that its freezing point is sufficient for
• Avoid sharp turns or locked- the temperatures anticipated during
When mounting snow chains, wheel braking. the winter.
park the vehicle on level ground
away from traffic. Turn on the
vehicle Hazard Warning flashers CAUTION
and place a triangular emer- • Chains that are the wrong size
gency warning device behind or improperly installed can
the vehicle if available. Always damage your vehicle's brake
place the vehicle in P (Park), lines, suspension, body and
apply the parking brake and wheels.
turn off the engine before
installing snow chains. • Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
5 67
Check battery and cables Check spark plugs and igni- Use approved window washer
Winter puts additional burdens on tion system anti-freeze in system
the battery system. Visually inspect Inspect your spark plugs as To keep the water in the window
the battery and cables as described described in section 7 and replace washer system from freezing, add an
in section 7. The level of charge in them if necessary. Also check all approved window washer anti-freeze
your battery can be checked by an ignition wiring and components to be solution in accordance with instruc-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a sure they are not cracked, worn or tions on the container. Window wash-
service station. damaged in any way. er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
Change to "winter weight" oil To keep locks from freezing engine coolant or other types of anti-
if necessary To keep the locks from freezing, freeze as these may damage the
In some climates it is recommended squirt an approved de-icer fluid or paint finish.
that a lower viscosity "winter weight" glycerine into the key opening. If a
oil be used during cold weather. See lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
section 8 for recommendations. If an approved de-icing fluid to remove
you aren't sure what weight oil you the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
should use, consult an authorized you may be able to thaw it out by
HYUNDAI dealer. using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
5 68
Don't let your parking brake Don't let ice and snow accu- Don't place foreign objects or
freeze mulate underneath materials in the engine com-
Under some conditions your parking Under some conditions, snow and partment
brake can freeze in the engaged ice can build up under the fenders Placement of foreign objects or
position. This is most likely to happen and interfere with the steering. When materials which prevent cooling of
when there is an accumulation of driving in severe winter conditions the engine, in the engine compart-
snow or ice around or near the rear where this may happen, you should ment, may cause a failure or com-
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If periodically check underneath the bustion. The manufacturer is not
there is a risk the parking brake may vehicle to be sure the movement of responsible for the damage caused
freeze, apply it only temporarily while the front wheels and the steering by such placement.
you put the shift lever in P (automat- components is not obstructed.
ic transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake. Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls or a blanket, etc.
5 69
TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering towing with Remember that trailering is different
your vehicle, you should first check WARNING - Weight limits than just driving your vehicle by itself.
with your state’s Department of Before towing, make sure the Trailering means changes in han-
Motor Vehicles to determine their total trailer weight, GCW (gross dling, durability, and fuel economy.
legal requirements. combination weight), GVW Successful, safe trailering requires
Since laws vary the requirements for (gross vehicle weight), GAW correct equipment, and it has to be
towing trailers, cars, or other types of (gross axle weight) and trailer used properly.
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask tongue load are all within the
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for limits. This section contains many time-test-
further details before towing. ed, important trailering tips and safe-
ty rules. Many of these are important
WARNING - Towing a CAUTION for your safety and that of your pas-
trailer Pulling a trailer improperly can sengers. Please read this section
damage your vehicle and result carefully before you pull a trailer.
If you don't use the correct
equipment and/or drive improp- in costly repairs not covered by
erly, you can lose control when your warranty. To pull a trailer Load-pulling components such as
you pull a trailer. For example, if correctly, follow the advice in the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
the trailer is too heavy, the this section. blies, and tires are forced to work
brakes may not work well - or harder against the load of the added
even at all. You and your pas- weight. The engine is required to
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To operate at relatively higher speeds
sengers could be seriously or
identify what the vehicle trailering and under greater loads. This addi-
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only
capacity is for your vehicle, you tional burden generates extra heat.
if you have followed all the
should read the information in The trailer also considerably adds
steps in this section.
“Weight of the trailer” that appears wind resistance, increasing the
later in this section. pulling requirements.
5 70
Hitches Safety chains Trailer brakes

It's important to have the correct You should always attach chains If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large between your vehicle and your trail- ing system, make sure it conforms to
trucks going by, and rough roads are er. Cross the safety chains under the federal and/or local regulations and
a few reasons why you’ll need the tongue of the trailer so that the that it is properly installed and oper-
right hitch. Here are some rules to tongue will not drop to the road if it ating correctly.
follow: becomes separated from the hitch. If your trailer weight exceeds the
• If you have to make any holes in Instructions about safety chains may maximum allowed weight without
the body of your vehicle when you be provided by the hitch manufactur- trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
install a trailer hitch, be sure to seal er or by the trailer manufacturer. require its own brakes as well. Be
the holes later when you remove Follow the manufacturer’s recom- sure to read and follow the instruc-
the hitch. mendation for attaching safety tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
If not sealed, deadly carbon monox- chains. Always leave just enough able to install, adjust and maintain
ide (CO) from your exhaust can get slack so you can turn with your trail- them properly.
into your vehicle, as well as dirt and er. And, never allow safety chains to • Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-
water. drag on the ground. cle's brake system.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not WARNING - Trailer brakes
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use Do not use a trailer with its own
only a frame-mounted hitch that brakes unless you are absolute-
does not attach to the bumper. ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system. This
• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory is not a task for amateurs. Use
is available at an authorized an experienced, competent
HYUNDAI dealer. trailer shop for this work.
5 71
Driving with a trailer Following distance Backing up

Towing a trailer requires a certain Stay at least twice as far behind the Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
amount of experience. Before setting vehicle ahead as you would when with one hand. Then, to move the trail-
out for the open road, you must get to driving your vehicle without a trailer. er to the left, just move your hand to
know your trailer. Acquaint yourself This can help you avoid situations the left. To move the trailer to the right,
with the feel of handling and braking that require heavy braking and sud- move your hand to the right. Always
with the added weight of the trailer. den turns. back up slowly and, if possible, have
And always keep in mind that the someone guide you.
vehicle you are driving is now a good Passing
deal longer and not nearly so respon- Making turns
sive as your vehicle is by itself. You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail- When you’re turning with a trailer,
Before you start, check the trailer er. And, because of the increased make wider turns than normal. Do
hitch and platform, safety chains, vehicle length, you’ll need to go this so your trailer won’t strike soft
electrical connector(s), lights, tires much farther beyond the passed shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer vehicle before you can return to your or other objects near the edge of the
has electric brakes, start your vehicle lane. Due to the added load to the road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
and trailer moving and then apply the engine when going uphill the vehicle vers. Signal well in advance before
trailer brake controller by hand to be may also take longer to pass than it turning or lane changes.
sure the brakes are working. This lets would on flat ground.
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
5 72
Turn signals when towing a trailer Driving on grades

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle WARNING Reduce speed and shift to a lower
has to have a different turn signal Failure to use an approved trail- gear before you start down a long or
flasher and extra wiring. The green er wiring harness could result steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
arrows on your instrument panel will in damage to the vehicle electri- down, you might have to use your
flash whenever you signal a turn or cal system and/or personal brakes so much that they would get
lane change. Properly connected, injury. hot and no longer operate efficiently.
the trailer lights will also flash to alert On a long uphill grade, shift down
other drivers you’re about to turn, and reduce your speed to around 45
change lanes, or stop. mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possi-
When towing a trailer, the green bility of engine and transaxle over-
arrows on your instrument panel will heating.
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may when towing a trailer will minimize
think drivers behind you are seeing heat build up and extend the life of
your signals when, in fact, they are your transaxle.
not. It’s important to check occasion-
ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working. You must also check the
lights every time you disconnect and
then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
5 73
Parking on hills However, if you ever have to park your

CAUTION Generally, if you have a trailer trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
• When towing a trailer on steep attached to your vehicle, you should 1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
grades (in excess of 6%) pay not park your vehicle on a hill. People space.Turn the steering wheel in the
close attention to the engine can be seriously or fatally injured, direction of the curb (right if headed
coolant temperature gauge to and both your vehicle and the trailer down hill, left if headed up hill).
ensure the engine does not can be damaged if they unexpected- 2. If the vehicle has an automatic
overheat. ly roll down hill. transaxle, place the car in P (Park).
If the needle of the coolant 3. Set the parking brake and shut off
temperature gauge moves
across the dial towards “H” WARNING - Parking the vehicle.
(HOT), pull over and stop as on a hill 4. Place chocks under the trailer
soon as it is safe to do so, and Parking your vehicle on a hill wheels on the down hill side of the
allow the engine to idle until it with a trailer attached could wheels.
cools down. You may proceed cause serious injury or death, 5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
once the engine has cooled should the trailer break loose or shift to neutral, release the parking
sufficiently. the brake stops working. brake and slowly release the
• Use caution when driving on brakes until the trailer chocks
an uphill grade to reduce the absorb the load.
possibility of engine and 6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the
transaxle overheating. parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
5 74
Maintenance when trailer towing

WARNING - Parking CAUTION
Your vehicle will need service more
brake often when you regularly pull a trail- • Due to higher load during
It can be dangerous to get out er. Important items to pay particular trailer usage, overheating
of your vehicle if the parking attention to include engine oil, auto- might occur in hot days or
brake is not firmly set. matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant during uphill driving. If the
If you have left the engine run- and cooling system fluid. Brake con- coolant gauge indicates over-
ning, the vehicle can move sud- dition is another important item to heating, switch off the A/C and
denly. You or others could be frequently check. Each item is cov- stop the vehicle in a safe area
seriously or fatally injured. ered in this manual, and the Index to cool down the engine.
will help you find them quickly. If • When towing check transaxle
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to fluid more frequently.
When you are ready to leave after review these sections before you
parking on a hill start your trip.
1. With the automatic transaxle in P Don’t forget to also maintain your
(Park), apply your brakes and hold trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
the brake pedal down while you: nance schedule that accompanied
• Start your engine; your trailer and check it periodically.
• Shift into gear; and Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
• Release the parking brake. importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
2. Slowly remove your foot from the should be tight.
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
5 75
If you do decide to pull a trailer

Engine Gasoline Engine
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
Item 3.3 GDI
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control. Without brake System 1653 lbs (750 kg)
• Do not do any towing with your car Maximum trailer
during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 weight
Without trailer
km) in order to allow the engine to 2000 lbs (907 kg)
With brake package
properly break in. Failure to heed Ibs. (kg)
System With trailer
this caution may result in serious 5000 lbs (2267 kg)
engine or transaxle damage. package
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI Maximum permissible static vertical load
dealer for further information on on the coupling device 500 lbs (226 kg)
additional requirements such as a Ibs. (kg)
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 60 mph
(100 km/h)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
5 76
Weight of the trailer Weight of the trailer tongue The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to correct them simply by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM C190E02JM
What is the maximum safe weight of The tongue load of any trailer is an
a trailer? It should never weigh more important weight to measure
than the maximum trailer weight with because it affects the total gross
trailer brakes. But even that can be vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
too heavy. cle. This weight includes the curb
It depends on how you plan to use weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
your trailer. For example, speed, alti- may carry in it, and the people who
tude, road grades, outside tempera- will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
ture and how often your vehicle is will tow a trailer, you must add the
used to pull a trailer are all important. tongue load to the GVW because
The ideal trailer weight can also your vehicle will also be carrying that
depend on any special equipment weight.
that you have on your vehicle.
5 77
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol.
5 78
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading information label
Vehicle capacity weight:
- 6 persons : 1111 lbs. (504 kg)
- 7 persons : 1296 lbs. (588 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
ONCNMC3200 ONCNMC3202
Seating capacity:
Total : 6 or 7 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 4 or 5 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
ONCNMC3201 ONCNMC3203 of the cargo being carried or towed.
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold Do not overload the vehicle as there
tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that is a limit to the total weight, or load
can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight. limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
5 79
Towing capacity: Steps For Determining Correct 5. Determine the combined weight of
Without trailer brakes: Load Limit luggage and cargo being loaded
1653 lbs (750 kg) 1. Locate the statement "The com- on the vehicle. That weight may
bined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
With trailer brakes: cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX
2000 lbs (907 kg) calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
Towing capacity is the maximum placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
trailer weight including its cargo er, load from your trailer will be
2. Determine the combined weight of
weight, your vehicle can tow. transferred to your vehicle. Consult
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle. this manual to determine how this
Cargo capacity: reduces the available cargo and
3. Subtract the combined weight of luggage load capacity of your
The cargo capacity of your vehicle the driver and passengers from
will increase or decrease depending vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
on the weight and the number of
4. The resulting figure equals the
occupants and the tongue load, if
available amount of cargo and lug-
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lb
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5 80
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
A B C A B C A B C
C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM
Item Description Total Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
A A A
Weight (635 kg) Weight (635 kg) Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
300 lbs 750 lbs 860 lbs
B Weight B Weight B Weight
(136 kg) (340 kg) (390 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
Available Cargo and 1100 lbs Available Cargo and 650 lbs Available Cargo and 540 lbs
C C C
Luggage weight (499 kg) Luggage weight (295 kg) Luggage weight (245 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 81
Certification label To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go to (Continued)
a weigh station and weigh your vehi- • Do not load your vehicle any
cle. Your dealer can help you with this. heavier than the GVWR, either
Be sure to spread out your load equal- the maximum front or rear
ly on both sides of the centerline. GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts, includ-
ing tires on your vehicle can
WARNING - Over loading break, and it can change the
• Never exceed the GVWR for way your vehicle handles and
your vehicle, the GAWR for braking ability. This could
either the front or rear axle cause you to lose control and
and vehicle capacity weight. crash. Also, overloading can
OEN056020 Exceeding these ratings can shorten the life of your vehicle.
cause an accident or vehicle
The certification label is located on damage. You can calculate the
the driver's door sill at the center pillar. weight of your load by weigh- The label will help you decide how
This label shows the maximum allowing the items (or people) much cargo and installed equipment
able weight of the fully loaded vehi- before putting them in the your vehicle can carry.
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross vehicle. Be careful not to over-
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR load your vehicle. If you carry items inside your vehicle
includes the weight of the vehicle, all (Continued) - like suitcases, tools, packages, or
occupants, fuel and cargo. anything else - they are moving as
This label also tells you the maxi- fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
mum weight that can be supported or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
by the front and rear axles, called the items will keep going and can
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
5 82
WARNING CAUTION WARNING - Loose cargo

• Overloading your vehicle can Overloading your vehicle may Items you carry inside your
cause heat buildup in your cause damage. Repairs would vehicle can strike and injure
vehicle's tires and possible not be covered by your warran- occupants in a sudden stop or
tire failure that could lead to a ty. Do not overload your vehicle. turn, or in a crash.
crash. • Put items in the cargo area of
• Overloading your vehicle can your vehicle. Try to spread the
cause increased stopping dis- weight evenly.
tances that could lead to a • Never stack items, like suit-
crash. cases, inside the vehicle
• A crash resulting from poor above the tops of the seats.
handling vehicle damage, tire • Do not leave an unsecured
failure, or increased stopping child restraint in your vehicle.
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death. • When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
5 83
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the Base curb weight GAWR
proper loading of your vehicle and/or This is the weight of the vehicle (Gross axle weight rating)
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all This is the maximum allowable
weight within its design rating capa- standard equipment. It does not weight that can be carried by a single
bility, with or without a trailer. Properly include passengers, cargo, or option- axle (front or rear). These numbers
loading your vehicle will provide max- al equipment. are shown on the compliance label.
imum return of the vehicle design
performance. Before loading your The total load on each axle must
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the Vehicle curb weight never exceed its GAWR.
following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or with- This is the weight of your new vehicle
out a trailer, from the vehicle's speci- when you picked it up from your deal- GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
fications and the compliance label: er plus any aftermarket equipment. This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
Cargo weight gers.
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including GVWR
cargo and optional equipment. (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
GAW (Gross axle weight) (including all options, equipment,
This is the total weight placed on passengers and cargo). The GVWR
each axle (front and rear) - including is shown on the certification label.
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
5 84
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 • Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3 • Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4 • Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4 • Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 • Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
- Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Low tire pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
- Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
■ Type A
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
When you must make such an emer-

ODM042242 gency stop, always pull off the road
■ Type B
as far as possible.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
ODM042243
• To turn the hazard warning lights
The hazard warning flasher serves as off, push the switch again.
a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
6 2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a cross- If you have a flat tire while If engine stalls while driving
road or crossing driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually,
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or If a tire goes flat while you are driving: keeping a straight line. Move cau-
crossing, set the shift lever in the N 1. Take your foot off the accelerator tiously off the road to a safe place.
(Neutral) position and then push the pedal and let the car slow down 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
vehicle to a safe place. while driving straight ahead. Do 3. Try to start the engine again. If
not apply the brakes immediately your vehicle will not start, contact
or attempt to pull off the road as an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
this may cause a loss of control. seek other qualified assistance.
When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the ✽ NOTICE
road. Drive off the road as far as If there was a check engine light and
possible and park on firm, level loss of power or stall, it is best if safe
ground. If you are on a divided to do so to wait at least 10 seconds to
highway, do not park in the median restart a vehicle after it stalls. This
area between the two traffic lanes. may reset the car so it will no longer
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on run at low power (limp home) condi-
your emergency hazard flashers, tion.
set the parking brake and put the
transaxle in P.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4. When repairing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
6 3
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or If engine turns over normally
turns over slowly but does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic 1. Check fuel level.
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is 2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the position, check all connectors at
emergency brake is set. ignition coils and spark plugs.
2. Check the battery connections to Reconnect any that may be discon-
be sure they are clean and tight. nected or loose.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light 3. If the engine still does not start, call
dims or goes out when you oper- an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
ate the starter, the battery is dis- seek other qualified assistance.
charged.
4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other dam-
age. In addition, push or pull
starting may cause the catalytic
converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
6 4
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jumper Cables Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
WARNING - Battery
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid • Keep all flames or sparks
harm to yourself or damage to your away from the battery. The
vehicle or battery, follow the jump battery produces hydrogen
starting procedures. If in doubt, we gas which may explode if
strongly recommend that you have a exposed to flame or sparks.
Booster technician or towing service jump If these instructions are not fol-
battery
start your vehicle. lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehi-
cle may occur! If you are not
1VQA4001 CAUTION sure how to follow this proce-
Connect cables in numerical order Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- dure, seek qualified assis-
and disconnect in reverse order. tem. You can damage a 12-volt tance. Automobile batteries
starting motor, ignition system, contain sulfuric acid. This is
and other electrical parts poisonous and highly corro-
beyond repair by use of a 24-volt sive. When jump starting, wear
power supply (either two 12-volt protective glasses and be care-
batteries in series or a 24-volt ful not to get acid on yourself,
motor generator set). your clothing or on the car.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
6 5
Jump starting procedure 4.Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus- CAUTION - Battery cables
✽ NOTICE tration. First connect one end of a Do not connect the jumper cable
If the battery is discharged, the jumper cable to the positive termi- from the negative terminal of the
engine can be started using a battery nal of the discharged battery (1), booster battery to the negative
of another vehicle and two jumper then connect the other end to the terminal of the discharged bat-
cables. Only use jumper cables with positive terminal on the booster tery. This can cause the dis-
fully insulated clamp handles. battery (2). Proceed to connect charged battery to overheat and
To prevent personal injury or dam- one end of the other jumper cable crack, releasing battery acid.
age to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the negative terminal of the
to the following procedure. booster battery (3), then the other 5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
end to a solid, stationary, metallic the booster battery and let it run at
1.Make sure the booster battery is point (for example, the engine lift-
12-volt and that its negative termi- 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
ing bracket) away from the battery the vehicle with the discharged
nal is grounded. (4). Do not connect it to or near any battery. If the first starting attempt
2.If the booster battery is in another part that moves when the engine is is not successful, wait a few min-
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to cranked. utes before making another
touch. Make sure that there is no contact attempt in order to allow the dis-
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical between the bodywork of the two charged battery to recharge.
loads. vehicles; otherwise, there is the To charge the discharged battery
danger of short circuits. enough, it is recommended to let the
Do not allow the jumper cables to engine at idle or to drive the vehicle
contact anything except the correct for a certain period of time.
battery terminals or the correct If the cause of your battery discharg-
ground. Do not lean over the bat- ing is not apparent, you should have
tery when making connections. your vehicle checked by an author-
6 6
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
6 7
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates 4. Check to see if the water pump
overheating, you experience a loss drive belt is missing. If it is not WARNING
of power, or hear loud pinging or missing, check to see that it is Do not remove the radiator cap
knocking, the engine is probably too tight. If the drive belt seems to be when the engine is hot. This
hot. If this happens, you should: satisfactory, check for coolant may result in coolant being
leaking from the radiator, hoses or blown out of the opening and
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon under the car. (If the air condition- cause serious burns.
as it is safe to do so. ing had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
2. Place the shift lever in P and set when you stop.) 6. If you cannot find the cause of the
the parking brake. If the air condi- overheating, wait until the engine
tioning is on, turn it off. temperature has returned to nor-
3. If engine coolant is running out WARNING mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
under the car or steam is coming While the engine is running, carefully add coolant to the reser-
out from the hood, stop the keep hair, hands and clothing voir to bring the fluid level in the
engine. Do not open the hood until away from moving parts such reservoir up to the halfway mark.
the coolant has stopped running as the fan and drive belts to pre- 7. Proceed with caution, keeping
or the steaming has stopped. If vent injury. alert for further signs of overheat-
there is no visible loss of engine ing. If overheating happens again,
coolant and no steam, leave the 5. If the water pump drive belt is bro- call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
engine running and check to be ken or engine coolant is leaking er for assistance.
sure the engine cooling fan is out, stop the engine immediately
operating. If the fan is not running, and call the nearest authorized
turn the engine off. CAUTION
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates there is a leak in the cool-
ing system and this should be
checked as soon as possible by
6 8
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) - TYPE A

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- Please note that the TPMS is not a
vided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance,
when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to
pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the
tire inflation pressure label. (If your level to trigger illumination of the
vehicle has tires of a different size than TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
the size indicated on the vehicle plac- Your vehicle has also been equipped
ard or tire inflation pressure label, you with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
should determine the proper tire infla- indicate when the system is not
ODM062002 tion pressure for those tires.) operating properly. The TPMS mal-
As an added safety feature, your function indicator is combined with
vehicle has been equipped with a tire the low tire pressure telltale. When
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) the system detects a malfunction,
that illuminates a low tire pressure the telltale will flash for approximate-
telltale when one or more of your tires ly one minute and then remain con-
is significantly under-inflated. tinuously illuminated. This sequence
Accordingly, when the low tire pres- will continue upon subsequent vehi-
sure telltale illuminates, you should cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
stop and check your tires as soon as tion exists. When the malfunction
possible, and inflate them to the prop- indicator is illuminated, the system
OANNDR2003/OANNDR2004
er pressure. Driving on a significantly may not be able to detect or signal
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale / under-inflated tire causes the tire to low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
TPMS malfunction indicator overheat and can lead to tire failure. malfunctions may occur for a variety
(2) Low tire pressure indicator Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- of reasons, including the installation
(Shown on the LCD display) ciency and tire tread life, and may of replacement or alternate tires or
affect the vehicle’s handling and stop- wheels on the vehicle that prevent
ping ability. the TPMS from functioning properly.
6 9
Always check the TPMS malfunction Low tire pressure indicator Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
telltale after replacing one or more sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
tires or wheels on your vehicle to placard or tire inflation pressure label
ensure that the replacement or alter- located on the driver’s side center pil-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
to continue to function properly. service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
✽ NOTICE
The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
If the TPMS indicator does not illu- remain on and the TPMS Malfunction
minate for 3 seconds when the igni- Indicator may blink for one minute
tion switch is turned to the ON posi- and then remain illuminated (when
tion or engine is running, or if it the vehicle is driven approximately
comes on after blinking for approxi- 20 minutes at speed above 15.5 mph
mately one minute, take your car to (25 km/h)) until you have the low
your nearest authorized HYUNDAI pressure tire repaired and replaced
dealer and have the system checked. on the vehicle.
OANNDR2003/OANNDR2004
When the tire pressure monitoring

CAUTION
system warning indicator is illuminat- In winter or cold weather, the
ed, one or more of your tires is sig- low tire pressure indicator may
nificantly under-inflated. be illuminated if the tire pres-
sure was adjusted to the recom-
If the indicator illuminates, immedi-
mended tire inflation pressure
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
in warm weather.
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances.You should check (Continued)
your tires as soon as possible.
6 10
(Continued) TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System) CAUTION
It does not mean your TPMS is malfunction indicator • The TPMS malfunction indica-
malfunctioning because the tor may be illuminated if the
decreased temperature leads to vehicle is moving around elec-
a lowering of tire pressure. The TPMS malfunction indicator will tric power supply cables or
When you drive your vehicle illuminate after it blinks for approxi- radios transmitter such as at
from a warm area to a cold area mately one minute when there is a police stations, government
or from a cold area to a warm problem with the Tire Pressure public offices, broadcasting
area, or the outside temperature Monitoring System. If the system is stations, military installations,
is higher or lower, you should able to correctly detect an under airports, or transmitting tow-
check the tire inflation pressure inflation warning at the same time as ers, etc. This can interfere with
and adjust the tires to the rec- system failure then it will illuminate normal operation of the Tire
ommended cold tire inflation the TPMS malfunction indicator. Pressure Monitoring System
pressure. Have the system checked by an (TPMS).
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon • The TPMS malfunction indica-
as possible to determine the cause tor may illuminate if snow
WARNING - Low pressure of the problem. chains or some separately
damage purchased devices such as
Significantly low tire pressure notebook computers, mobile
makes the vehicle unstable and charger, remote starter, navi-
can contribute to loss of vehicle gation etc. are used in the
control and increased braking vehicle. This can interfere with
distances. normal operation of the Tire
Continued driving on low pres- Pressure Monitoring System
sure tires can cause the tires to (TPMS).
overheat and fail.
6 11
Changing a tire with TPMS The spare tire (if equipped) does not You may not be able to identify a tire
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire come with a tire pressure monitoring with low pressure by simply looking
Pressure indicator will come on. sensor. When the low pressure tire or at it. Always use a good quality tire
Have the flat tire repaired by an the flat tire is replaced with the spare pressure gauge to measure. Please
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale note that a tire that is hot (from being
as possible or replace the flat tire will remain on. Also, the TPMS driven) will have a higher pressure
with the spare tire. Malfunction Indicator will illuminate measurement than a tire that is cold.
after blinking for one minute if the A cold tire means the vehicle has
vehicle is driven at speed above 15.5 been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
CAUTION mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20 less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
Never use a puncture-repairing minutes. hour period.
agent not approved by Once the original tire equipped with
HYUNDAI to repair and/or inflate a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
a low pressure tire. Tire sealant reinflated to the recommended pres-
not approved by HYUNDAI may sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
damage the tire pressure sen- the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and
sor. TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go
off within a few minutes.
If the indicators do not extinguish
after a few minutes, please visit an
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
6 12
Allow the tire to cool before measur- This device complies with Part
ing the inflation pressure. Always be WARNING - TPMS 15 of the FCC rules.
sure the tire is cold before inflating to • The TPMS cannot alert you to Operation is subject to the following
the recommended pressure. severe and sudden tire dam- two conditions:
age caused by external factors
such as nails or road debris. 1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot 2. This device must accept any inter-
off the accelerator, apply the ference received, including inter-
brakes gradually with light ference that may cause undesired
force, and slowly move to a operation.
safe position off the road.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
WARNING - Protecting expressly approved by the party
TPMS responsible for compliance
Tampering with, modifying, or could void the user’s authority
disabling the Tire Pressure to operate the equipment.
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
6 13
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) - TYPE B

Check tire pressure • You can change the tire pressure
unit in the user settings mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “User set-
tings mode” in chapter 4).
ODM062002
ODM064024L/ODM064021L
• You can check the tire pressure in

the information mode on the clus-
ter.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-
ODM064023L/ODM064020L utes later after driving.
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/ • If tire pressure is not displayed
TPMS Malfunction Indicator when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale to display” message displays. After
and tire pressure telltale driving, check the tire pressure.
(Shown on the LCD display)
6 14
Tire pressure monitoring sys- As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been equipped
tem vehicle has been equipped with a tire with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicate when the system is not
that illuminates a low tire pressure operating properly. The TPMS mal-
WARNING telltale when one or more of your function indicator is combined with
Over-inflation or under-inflation tires is significantly under-inflated. the low tire pressure telltale. When
can reduce tire life, adversely Accordingly, when the low tire pres- the system detects a malfunction,
affect vehicle handling, and sure telltale illuminates, you should the telltale will flash for approximate-
lead to sudden tire failure that stop and check your tires as soon as ly one minute and then remain con-
may cause loss of vehicle con- possible, and inflate them to the tinuously illuminated. This sequence
trol resulting in an accident. proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tire to overheat and can lead to tire tion exists. When the malfunction
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
failure. Under-inflation also reduces indicator is illuminated, the system
vided), should be checked monthly
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may not be able to detect or signal
when cold and inflated to the inflation
may affect the vehicle’s handling and low tire pressure as intended.
pressure recommended by the vehi-
stopping ability. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If Please note that the TPMS is not a variety of reasons, including the
your vehicle has tires of a different substitute for proper tire mainte- installation of replacement or alter-
size than the size indicated on the nance, and it is the driver’s responsi- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- bility to maintain correct tire pres- that prevent the TPMS from function-
sure label, you should determine the sure, even if under-inflation has not ing properly. Always check the TPMS
proper tire inflation pressure for reached the level to trigger illumina- malfunction telltale after replacing
those tires.) tion of the TPMS low tire pressure one or more tires or wheels on your
telltale. vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
6 15
✽ NOTICE Low tire pressure If either telltale illuminates, immedi-

If any of the below happens, we rec- telltale ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
ommend that the system be checked cornering and anticipate increased
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. stopping distances. You should stop
Low tire pressure position tell- and check your tires as soon as pos-
1.The low tire pressure telltale/ tale and tire pressure telltale
TPMS malfunction indicator does sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
not illuminate for 3 seconds when ■ Type A ■ Type B pressure as indicated on the vehi-
Engine Start/Stop button is turned cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
to the ON or engine is running. label located on the driver’s side cen-
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
remains illuminated after blinking reach a service station or if the tire
for approximately 1 minute. cannot hold the newly added air,
3.The Low tire pressure position replace the low pressure tire with a
telltale remains illuminated. spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph
ODM064023L/ODM064020L (25 km/h) after replacing the low
pressure tire with the spare tire, the
When the tire pressure monitoring below will happen:
system warning indicators are illumi- • The TPMS malfunction indicator
nated and warning massage dis- may blink for approximately 1
played on the cluster LCD display, minute and then remain continu-
one or more of your tires is signifi- ously illuminated because the
cantly under-inflated. The low tire TPMS sensor is not mounted on
pressure position telltale light will the spare wheel.
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
6 16
✽ NOTICE TPMS (Tire Pressure

The spare tire is not equipped with a WARNING - Low pressure Monitoring System)
tire pressure sensor. damage malfunction indicator
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
CAUTION can contribute to loss of vehicle The TPMS malfunction indicator will
In winter or cold weather, the control and increased braking illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
low tire pressure telltale may distances. mately one minute when there is a
illuminate if the tire pressure problem with the Tire Pressure
Continued driving on low pres- Monitoring System.
was adjusted to the recom- sure tires can cause the tires to
mended tire inflation pressure overheat and fail. We recommend that the system be
in warm weather. It does not checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
mean your TPMS is malfunction- dealer.
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a lowering of
tire pressure. ✽ NOTICE
When you drive your vehicle If there is a malfunction with the
from a warm area to a cold area TPMS, the low tire pressure position
or from a cold area to a warm telltale will not be displayed even
area, or the outside temperature though the vehicle has an under-
is higher or lower, you should inflated tire.
check the tire inflation pressure
and adjust the tires to the rec-
ommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
6 17
Changing a tire with TPMS If you drive the vehicle for about 10
CAUTION minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
• The TPMS malfunction indica- Pressure and Position telltales will (25 km/h) after replacing the low
tor may blink for approximate- come on. We recommend that the pressure tire with the spare tire, the
ly 1 minute and then remain system be checked by an authorized below will happen:
continuously illuminated if the HYUNDAI dealer. • The TPMS malfunction indicator
vehicle is moving around elec- may blink for approximately 1
tric power supply cables or minute and then remain continu-
radios transmitter such as at CAUTION ously illuminated because the
police stations, government NEVER use a puncture-repair- TPMS sensor is not mounted on
and public offices, broadcasting agent to repair and/or inflate the spare wheel.
ing stations, military installa- a low pressure tire. The tire
tions, airports, or transmitting sealant can damage the tire
towers, etc. This can interfere pressure sensor. If used, you You may not be able identify a low
with normal operation of the will have to replace the tire pres- tire by simply looking at it. Always
Tire Pressure Monitoring sure sensor. use a good quality tire pressure
System (TPMS). gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
• The TPMS malfunction indica- Each wheel is equipped with a tire is hot (from being driven) will have a
tor may blink for approximate- pressure sensor mounted inside the higher pressure measurement than a
ly 1 minute and then remain tire behind the valve stem. You must tire that is cold (from sitting station-
continuously illuminated if use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ary for at least 3 hours and driven
snow chains are used or some ommended that you have your tires less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
separate electronic devices serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI 3 hour period).
such as notebook computer, dealer.
mobile charger, remote starter Allow the tire to cool before measur-
or navigation etc., are used in ing the inflation pressure. Always be
the vehicle. sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
6 18
A cold tire means the vehicle has This device complies with Part
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for WARNING - Protecting 15 of the FCC rules.
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 TPMS
Operation is subject to the following
hour period. Tampering with, modifying, or two conditions:
disabling the Tire Pressure
1. This device may not cause harm-
Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING - TPMS components may interfere with
ful interference, and
• The TPMS cannot alert you to the system's ability to warn the 2. This device must accept any inter-
severe and sudden tire dam- driver of low tire pressure con- ference received, including inter-
age caused by external fac- ditions and/or TPMS malfunc- ference that may cause undesired
tors such as nails or road tions. Tampering with, modify- operation.
debris. ing, or disabling the Tire
• If you feel any vehicle instabil- Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void CAUTION
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the the warranty for that portion of Changes or modifications not
brakes gradually and with the vehicle. expressly approved by the party
light force, and slowly move to responsible for compliance
a safe position off the road. could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
6 19
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jack and tools Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency WARNING - Changing
tire changing only. tires
To prevent the jack from “rattling” • Never attempt vehicle repairs
while the vehicle is in motion, store it in the traffic lanes of a public
properly. road or highway.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce • Always move the vehicle com-
the possibility of personal injury. pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
ONCNEM2003
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug assistance.
nut wrench are stored in the luggage • Be sure to use the correct
compartment. Pull up the luggage front and rear jacking posi-
box cover to find these equipment. tions on the vehicle; never use
(1) Jack handle the bumpers or any other part
(2) Jack of the vehicle for jack support.
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench • The vehicle can roll off the
jack causing serious injury or
death. No person should
place any portion of their
body under a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack; use
vehicle support stands.
(Continued)
6 20
(Continued) Removing and storing the

spare tire
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the ONCNEM2002
jack. 3.Connect the wheel lug nut wrench.
ONCNEM2001 4.Loosen the bolt enough to lower
the spare tire.
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo Turn the wrench counterclockwise
area. until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
To remove the spare tire:
1.Open the tailgate.
2.Remove cover with coin or flat-
head screwdriver.
6 21
WARNING - Storing the

spare tire
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire from “rattling”.
Otherwise, it may cause the
spare tire to fall off the carrier
and lead to an accident.
ODM062006 ODM062007
5. After the spare tire reaches the To store the spare tire:
ground, continue to turn the 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
wrench counterclockwise, and valve stem facing up.
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth- 2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
erwise the spare tire carrier may and install the retainer (1) through
be damaged. the wheel center.
6. Remove the retainer (1) from the 3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it
center of the spare tire clicks.
6 22
Changing tires
WARNING - Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
1VQA4023 blocked, and that no person
1VQA4022 4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, remain in a vehicle that is
jack, jack handle, and spare tire being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface and apply from the vehicle.
the parking brake firmly. 5. Block both the front and rear of the
2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park). wheel that is diagonally opposite
3. Activate the hazard warning flash- the jack position.
er.
6 23
ODM062008 ONCNEM2004 ODM062010

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- 7. Place the jack at the front or rear 8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
terclockwise one turn each, but do jacking position closest to the tire and turn it clockwise, raising the
not remove any nut until the tire you are changing. Place the jack vehicle until the tire just clears the
has been raised off the ground. at the designated locations under ground. This measurement is
the frame. approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
WARNING - Jack location ble and that there is no chance for
To reduce the possibility of movement or slippage.
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 24
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and 10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
remove them with your fingers. WARNING the studs, put the wheel nuts on
Slide the wheel off the studs and Wheels may have sharp edges. the studs and tighten them finger
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To Handle them carefully to avoid tight. The nuts should be installed
put the wheel on the hub, pick up possible severe injury. Before with their tapered small diameter
the spare tire, line up the holes putting the wheel into place, be ends directed inward. Jiggle the
with the studs and slide the wheel sure that there is nothing on the tire to be sure it is completely
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, seated, then tighten the nuts as
wheel slightly and get the top hole gravel, etc.) that prevents the much as possible with your fin-
in the wheel lined up with the top wheel from fitting solidly gers again.
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back against the hub. 11. Lower the car to the ground by
and forth until the wheel can be turning the wheel nut wrench
If there is, remove it. If there is
slid over the other studs. counterclockwise.
insufficient contact on the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub, the wheel nuts
could come loose and cause
the loss of a wheel. Loss of a
wheel may result in loss of con-
trol of the vehicle. This may
cause serious injury or death.
6 25
If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure. CAUTION
If the pressure is lower than recom- Your vehicle has metric threads
mended, drive slowly to the nearest on the wheel studs and nuts.
service station and inflate to the cor- Make certain during wheel
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it removal that the same nuts that
until it is correct. Always reinstall the were removed are reinstalled -
valve cap after checking or adjusting or, if replaced, that nuts with
tire pressure. If the cap is not metric threads and the same
replaced, air may leak from the tire. If chamfer configuration are used.
you lose a valve cap, buy another and Installation of a non-metric
ODM062011 install it as soon as possible. thread nut on a metric stud or
After you have changed wheels, vice-versa will not secure the
Then position the wrench as shown wheel to the hub properly and
in the drawing and tighten the wheel always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their will damage the stud so that it
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated must be replaced.
completely over the nut. Do not stand proper storage locations.
on the wrench handle or use an Note that most lug nuts do not
extension pipe over the wrench han- have metric threads. Be sure to
dle. Go around the wheel tightening use extreme care in checking
every other nut until they are all tight. for thread style before installing
Then double-check each nut for aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
tightness. After changing wheels, If in doubt, consult an author-
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer ized HYUNDAI dealer.
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)
6 26
Important - use of temporary

WARNING - Wheel studs compact spare tire WARNING
If the studs are damaged, they If your vehicle is equipped with a com- The temporary compact spare
may lose their ability to retain pact spare tire, it will take up less tire is for emergency use only.
the wheel. This could lead to the space than a regular-size tire. This tire Do not operate your vehicle on
loss of the wheel and a collision is smaller than a conventional tire and this compact spare at speeds
resulting in serious injuries. is designed for temporary use only. over 50 mph (80 km/h). The orig-
inal tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
To prevent the jack, jack handle, CAUTION to avoid failure of the spare
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire • You should drive carefully possibly leading to personal
from rattling while the vehicle is in when the temporary compact injury or death.
motion, store them properly. spare is in use. The compact
spare should be replaced by
the proper conventional tire The compact spare should be inflat-
WARNING - Inadequate and rim at the first opportunity. ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
spare tire • Do not drive a vehicle with
pressure more than one compact spare ✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressures tire in use at the same time.
as soon as possible after
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
it to the specified pressure, if
the specified pressure, as necessary.
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” section 8.
6 27
When using a temporary compact • Do not use tire chains on the com-
spare tire, observe the following pre- pact spare tire. Because of the small-
cautions: er size, a tire chain will not fit proper-
• Under no circumstances should you ly. This could damage the vehicle
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); higher and result in loss of the chain.
speeds could damage the tire. • Do not use the compact spare tire
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough on any other vehicle because this
for the road conditions to avoid all tire has been designed especially
hazards. Any road hazard, such as a for your vehicle.
pothole or debris, could seriously • The compact spare tire’s tread life is
damage the compact spare. shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
• Any continuous road use of this tire your compact spare tire regularly
could result in tire failure, loss of and replace worn compact spare
vehicle control, and possible per- tires with the same size and design,
sonal injury. mounted on the same wheel.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi- • The compact spare tire should not
mum load rating or the load-carry- be used on any other wheels, nor
ing capacity shown on the sidewall should standard tires, snow tires,
of the compact spare tire. wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The such use is attempted, damage to
compact spare tire diameter is these items or other car compo-
smaller than the diameter of a con- nents may occur.
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1 • Do not use more than one compact
inch (25 mm), which could result in spare tire at a time.
damage to the vehicle. • Do not tow a trailer while the com-
• Do not take the vehicle through an pact spare tire is installed.
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
6 28
Jack label
■ Example 1. Model Name
• Type A
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
OHYK064001
• Type B 6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
OHYK064005
• Type C
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6 29
TOWING
Towing service On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
A or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never
B be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious OUN046030
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.
dolly
C
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
OXM069028
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
OCM054034
If emergency towing is necessary, pension components are damaged
we recommend having it done by an or the vehicle is being towed with the
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a front wheels on the ground, use a CAUTION
commercial tow-truck service. towing dolly under the front wheels. • Do not tow with sling-type
Proper lifting and towing procedures When being towed by a commercial equipment. Use wheel lift or
are necessary to prevent damage to tow truck and wheel dollies are not flatbed equipment.
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies used, the front of the vehicle should
or flatbed is recommended. • Do not tow the vehicle back-
always be lifted, not the rear. wards with the front wheels on
For trailer towing guidelines informa- the ground as this may cause
tion, refer to "Trailer towing" in chap- damage to the vehicle.
ter 5.
6 30
When towing your vehicle in an Removable towing hook 3. Install the towing hook by turning it
emergency without wheel dollies : (if equipped) clockwise into the hole until it is
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC fully secured.
■ Front
position. 4. Remove the towing hook and
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral). install the cover after use.
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle. ONCNEM2005
■ Rear
ONCNEM2006
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the

towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
6 31
Emergency towing (if equipped) If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be CAUTION
■ Front
temporarily towed using a cable or • Attach a towing strap to the
chain secured to the emergency tow- tow hook.
ing hook attached to the front (or • Using a portion of the vehicle
under the rear) of the vehicle. other than the tow hooks for
Use extreme caution when towing the towing may damage the body
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehi- of your vehicle.
cle to steer it and operate the brakes. • Use only a cable or chain
Towing in this manner may be done specifically intended for use
only on hard-surfaced roads for a in towing vehicles. Securely
ONCNEM2007 short distance and at low speeds. fasten the cable or chain to
■ Rear Also, the wheels, axles, power train, the towing hook provided.
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Before emergency towing, check
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a that the hook is not broken or dam-
vehicle out of mud, sand or other aged.
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own • Fasten the towing cable or chain
power. securely to the hook.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than • Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
the vehicle doing the towing. and even force.
ONCNEM2008
• The drivers of both vehicles should • To avoid damaging the hook, do not
If towing is necessary, we recom- communicate with each other fre- pull from the side or at a vertical
mend you to have it done by an quently. angle. Always pull straight ahead.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
6 32
Emergency towing precautions

WARNING CAUTION - Automatic
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so transaxle
Use extreme caution when tow- the steering wheel isn’t locked.
ing the vehicle. • If the car is being towed with all
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N four wheels on the ground, it
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic (Neutral).
driving maneuvers which can be towed only from the
• Release the parking bake. front. Be sure that the transaxle
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing hook • Press the brake pedal with more is in neutral. Be sure the steer-
and towing cable or chain. The force than normal since you will ing is unlocked by placing the
hook and towing cable or have reduced brake performance. ignition switch in the ACC posi-
chain may break and cause • More steering effort will be tion. A driver must be in the
serious injury or damage. required because the power steer- towed vehicle to operate the
ing system will be disabled. steering and brakes.
• If the disabled vehicle cannot
be moved, do not forcibly con- • If you are driving down a long hill, • To avoid serious damage to
tinue the towing. Contact an the brakes may overheat and brake the automatic transaxle, limit
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or performance will be reduced. Stop the vehicle speed to 10 mph
a commercial tow truck serv- often and let the brakes cool off. (15 km/h) and drive less than 1
ice for assistance. mile (1.5 km) when towing.
• Tow the vehicle as straight • Before towing, check under
ahead as possible. your vehicle for leaking auto-
matic transaxle fluid. If the
• Keep away from the vehicle automatic transaxle fluid is
during towing. leaking, a flatbed equipment
or towing dolly must be used.
6 33
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 • Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-26 Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 • Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 • Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-48
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 • Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 • Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 • Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 • Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74 7
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 • Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 • Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 • Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-79
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 • High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-81
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (LAMBDA 3.3) - GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
ONCEIN2007
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care Owner’s responsibility We recommend you have your vehi-
to prevent damage to your vehicle cle maintained and repaired by an
and injury to yourself whenever per- authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
forming any maintenance or inspec- ✽ NOTICE authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
tion procedures. Maintenance Service and Record HYUNDAI’s high service quality
Should you have any doubts con- Retention are the owner's responsi- standards and receives technical
cerning the inspection or servicing of bility. support from HYUNDAI in order to
your vehicle, we strongly recom- provide you with a high level of serv-
mend that you have an authorized You should retain documents that ice satisfaction.
HYUNDAI dealer perform this work. show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has dance with the scheduled mainte-
factory-trained technicians and gen- nance service charts shown on the
uine HYUNDAI parts to service your following pages. You need this infor-
vehicle properly. For expert advice a mation to establish your compliance
d quality service, see an authorized with the servicing and maintenance
HYUNDAI dealer. requirements of your vehicle war-
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- ranties.
cient servicing may result in opera- Detailed warranty information is pro-
tional problems with your vehicle that vided in your Owner’s Handbook &
could lead to vehicle damage, an Warranty Information booklet.
accident, or personal injury.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
7 4
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-

tions WARNING -
Improper or incomplete service may
Maintenance work
result in problems. This section gives • Performing maintenance work
instructions only for the maintenance on a vehicle can be danger-
items that are easy to perform. ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
As explained earlier in this section,
maintenance procedures. If
several procedures can be done only
you lack sufficient knowledge
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and experience or the proper
with special tools.
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an
✽ NOTICE authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper owner maintenance dur- • Working under the hood with
ing the warranty period may affect the engine running is danger-
warranty coverage. For details, read ous. It becomes even more
the separate Owner’s Handbook & dangerous when you wear
Warranty Information booklet pro- jewelry or loose clothing.
vided with the vehicle. If you're These can become entangled
unsure about any servicing or main- in moving parts and result in
tenance procedure, have it done by injury. Therefore, if you must
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and sim-
ilar loose clothing before get-
ting near the engine or cooling
fans.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks Owner maintenance schedule While operating your vehicle:
and inspections that should be per- • Note any changes in the sound of
formed by the owner or an author-
When you stop for fuel:
the exhaust or any smell of
ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen- • Check the engine oil level.
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
cies indicated to help ensure safe, • Check coolant level in coolant
dependable operation of your vehi- • Check for vibrations in the steering
reservoir.
cle. wheel. Notice any increased steer-
• Check the windshield washer fluid ing effort or looseness in the steer-
Any adverse conditions should be level. ing wheel, or change in its straight-
brought to the attention of your deal- • Look for low or under-inflated tires. ahead position.
er as soon as possible.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
These Owner Maintenance Checks turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
are generally not covered by war- WARNING when traveling on smooth, level
ranties and you may be charged for Be careful when checking your road.
labor, parts and lubricants used. engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot • When stopping, listen and check
coolant and steam may blow for unusual sounds, pulling to one
out under pressure. This could side, increased brake pedal travel
cause burns or other serious or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
injury. • If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
7 6
Maintenance
• Check for fluid leaks under your At least twice a year At least once a year :
vehicle (water dripping from the air (i.e., every Spring and Fall) : • Clean body and door drain holes.
conditioning system during or after • Check radiator, heater and air con-
use is normal). • Lubricate door hinges and checks,
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam- and hood hinges.
age.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
At least monthly: • Check windshield washer spray latches.
• Check coolant level in the engine and wiper operation. Clean wiper
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
coolant reservoir. blades with clean cloth dampened
strips.
with washer fluid.
• Check the operation of all exterior • Check the air conditioning system.
lights, including the stoplights, turn • Check headlight alignment.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
signals and hazard warning flash- • Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
transaxle linkage and controls.
ers. shields and clamps.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the inflation pressures of all • Check the lap/shoulder belts for
tires including the spare. wear and function. • Check the brake fluid level.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
7 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance If your vehicle is operated under the
Schedule if the vehicle is usually above conditions, you should
operated where none of the following inspect, replace or refill more fre-
conditions apply. If any of the follow- quently than the following Normal
ing conditions apply, follow Maintenance Schedule. After 120
Maintenance Under Severe Usage months or 150,000 miles (240,000
Conditions. km) continue to follow the prescribed
• Repeated short distance driving. maintenance intervals.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
7 8
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one *3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail- anytime they have been submerged in water.
able from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with * : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine
4
information on how to use them. Do not mix other vibration and adjust if necessary.
additives. *5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
* : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be
2
or tension is reduced excessively.
maintenance free but periodic inspection is recom-
mended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
replace.
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.
7 10
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months) ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months) ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
replace. ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
(Continued)
7 11
Maintenance

(Continued) 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Rotate tire

❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect battery condition
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months) ❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
replace. (37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

replace.
7 12
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler (52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD) ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads replace.

replace.
7 13
Maintenance

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months (Continued)
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Inspect drive belts
❑ Inspect battery condition (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD) ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
joint, upper arm ball joint ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts replace.
❑ Inspect valve clearance *4
(Continued)
7 14
Maintenance

❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*5
(Continued)
replace.
7 15
Maintenance

❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Rotate tire
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months) ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Replace coolant ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Add fuel additive *1 (82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months) ❑ Add fuel additive *1

replace.
7 16
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace climate control air filter

❑ Inspect battery condition (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD) replace.
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
(Continued)
7 17
Maintenance


❑ Replace spark plugs ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
(Every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 10 years) ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months) ❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
replace. joint, upper arm ball joint
(Continued)
7 18
Maintenance

❑ Replace coolant
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
replace. ❑ Replace engine oil and filter

replace.
7 19
Maintenance

❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD) ❑ Replace coolant
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
joint, upper arm ball joint ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts (120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Inspect brake fluid ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 replace.
❑ Inspect valve clearance *4
(Continued)
7 20
Maintenance

replace.
(Continued)
7 21
Maintenance

❑ Replace coolant ❑ Rotate tire

(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months ❑ Inspect battery condition
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Add fuel additive *1
replace. (142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

replace.
7 22
Maintenance

❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD) ❑ Replace coolant
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
joint, upper arm ball joint ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts (150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Inspect brake fluid ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 replace.
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2 No check, No service required
❑ Inspect parking brake ❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
(Continued)
7 23
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE DRIVING CONDI-
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION TION
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R
OR 6 MONTHS H, I, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, B, F, G, H, I, J, K
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC /PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &

BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
7 24
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE DRIVING CONDI-

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION TION
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
6 MONTHS
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
UNIT)
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR
PROPELLER SHAFT I C, E
6 MONTHS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez- G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
ing temperature H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis- I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
tances towing
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
spread roads K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
7 25
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at nections
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
the maintenance schedule. If the car damage the emission system and connections for leakage and dam-
is being driven in severe conditions, cause multiple issues such as hard age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
more frequent oil and filter changes starting. If an excessive amount of dealer replace any damaged or leak-
are required. foreign matter accumulates in the ing parts immediately.
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
Drive belts Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
After installing a new filter, run the
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of engine for several minutes, and The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil check for leaks at the connections. should be inspected at those inter-
saturation and replace if necessary. Fuel filters should be installed by an vals specified in the maintenance
Drive belts should be checked peri- authorized HYUNDAI dealer. schedule. Make sure that a new
odically for proper tension and vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
adjusted as necessary. rectly replaced.
7 26
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation Air cleaner filter Cooling system

hoses (if equipped) A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner fil- Check the cooling system parts,
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- ter is recommended when the filter is such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
dence of heat and/or mechanical replaced. hoses and connections for leakage
damage. Hard and brittle rubber, and damage. Replace any damaged
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and parts.
excessive swelling indicate deterio- Spark plugs
ration. Particular attention should be Make sure to install new spark plugs
paid to examine those hose surfaces of the correct heat range. Coolant
nearest to high heat sources, such The coolant should be changed at
as the exhaust manifold. the intervals specified in the mainte-
Valve clearance nance schedule.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con- Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
tact with any heat source, sharp engine vibration and adjust if neces-
edges or moving component which sary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer
might cause heat damage or should perform the operation.
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
7 27
Maintenance
Automatic transaxle fluid Brake hoses and lines

(if equipped) CAUTION
Visually check for proper installation,
Automatic transaxle fluid should not The use of a non-specified fluid chafing, cracks, deterioration and
be checked under normal usage could result in transaxle mal- any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
conditions. function and failure. ed or damaged parts immediately.
But in severe conditions, the fluid Use only specified automatic
should be changed at an authorized transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and Brake fluid
HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to
the scheduled maintenance at the capacities” in section 8.) Check brake fluid level in the brake
beginning of this chapter. fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
✽ NOTICE hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
Automatic transaxle fluid color is DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
7 28
Maintenance
Parking brake Steering gear box, linkage &

Inspect the parking brake system boots/lower arm ball joint
including the parking brake lever (or With the vehicle stopped and engine
pedal) and cables. off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Brake pads, calipers and Check the linkage for bends or dam-
rotors age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-
Check the pads for excessive wear, age. Replace any damaged parts.
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
Suspension mounting bolts clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
Check the suspension connections damage. Replace any damaged
for looseness or damage. Retighten parts and, if necessary, repack the
to the specified torque. grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/

compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
7 29
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should
be between F and L. ONCNMC2018
ONCEMC2003 If it is near or at L, add enough oil to

CAUTION bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level • Do not overfill with engine oil.
ground. Engine damage may result. Use a funnel to help prevent oil
2. Start the engine and allow it to • Do not spill engine oil, when from being spilled on engine com-
reach normal operating tempera- adding or changing engine oil. ponents.
ture. If you spill engine oil on the
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a engine room, wipe it off imme- Use only the specified engine oil.
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for diately. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants
the oil to return to the oil pan. and capacities” in section 8.)
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
7 30
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and

filter CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects,
and reproductive harm.
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
Have engine oil and filter changed by hands thoroughly with soap
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and warm water as soon as pos-
according to the Maintenance sible after handling used oil.
Schedule at the beginning of this
section.
7 31
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
(Continued) WARNING
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is • Turn the engine off and wait The electric motor
filled at the factory. until it cools down. Use (cooling fan) is con-
extreme care when removing trolled by engine
Check the antifreeze protection and
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick coolant temperature,
coolant concentration level at least
towel around it, and turn it refrigerant pressure
once a year, at the beginning of the
counterclockwise slowly to and vehicle speed. It may some-
winter season, and before traveling
the first stop. Step back while times operate even when the
to a colder climate.
the pressure is released from engine is not running. Use
the cooling system. extreme caution when working
Checking the coolant level When you are sure all the near the blades of the cooling
pressure has been released, fan so that you are not injured
press down on the cap, using by a rotating fan blades. As the
WARNING a thick towel, and continue engine coolant temperature
Removing radiator turning counterclockwise to decreases, the electric motor
cap remove it. will automatically shut off. This
• Even if the engine is not oper- is a normal condition.
ating, do not remove the radi- If your vehicle is equipped with
ator cap or the drain plug GDI, the electric motor (cooling
• Never attempt to remove the while the engine and radiator
radiator cap while the engine fan) may operate until you dis-
are hot. Hot coolant and connect the negative battery
is operating or hot. Doing so steam may still blow out
might lead to cooling system cable.
under pressure, causing seri-
and engine damage and could ous injury.
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
(Continued)
7 32
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant For mixture percentage, refer to the

• When adding coolant, use only following table.
deionized water for your vehicle Mixture Percentage
and never mix hard water in the Ambient (volume)
coolant filled at the factory. An Temperature
improper coolant mixture can Antifreeze Water
result in serious malfunction or 5°F (-15°C) 35 65
engine damage. -13°F (-25°C) 40 60
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol- -49°F (-45°C) 60 40
ODM073006 based coolant to prevent corrosion
Check the condition and connections and freezing.
of all cooling system hoses and • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
heater hoses. Replace any swollen coolant or mix them with the spec-
or deteriorated hoses. ified coolant.
The coolant level should be filled • Do not use a solution that contains
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks more than 60% antifreeze or less
on the side of the coolant reservoir than 35% antifreeze, which would
when the engine is cool. reduce the effectiveness of the
If the coolant level is low, add enough solution.
coolant to bring the level to F (MAX),
but do not overfill. If frequent coolant
refill is required, see an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling sys-
tem inspection.
7 33
Maintenance
Changing the coolant

Have coolant changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
ONCNMC2007 prevent the coolant from over-
flowing into engine parts such
as generator.
WARNING
Radiator cap
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
Do not remove the radiator cap reservoir.
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant • Radiator coolant can severely
and steam may blow out under obscure visibility when
pressure causing serious sprayed on the windshield
injury. and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
7 34
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level Before removing the reservoir cap Never mix different types of fluid.
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor- WARNING - Loss of
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam- brake fluid
ination.
In the event the brake system
If the level is low, add fluid to the requires frequent additions of
MAX level. The level will fall with fluid, the vehicle should be
accumulated mileage. This is a nor- inspected by an authorized
mal condition associated with the HYUNDAI dealer.
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ONCNMC2009
Check the fluid level in the reservoir Use only the specified brake fluid.
periodically. The fluid level should be (Refer to “Recommended lubricants
between MAX and MIN marks on the and capacities” in section 8.)
side of the reservoir.
7 35
Maintenance
WARNING - Brake fluid CAUTION

When changing and adding Do not allow brake fluid to con-
brake fluid, handle it carefully. tact the vehicle's body paint, as
Do not let it come in contact paint damage will result. Brake
with your eyes. If brake fluid fluid, which has been exposed
should come in contact with to open air for an extended time
your eyes, immediately flush should never be used as its
them with a large quantity of quality cannot be guaranteed. It
fresh tap water. Have your eyes should be disposed of properly.
examined by a doctor as soon Do not put in the wrong type of
as possible. fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
7 36
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID PARKING BRAKE

Checking the washer fluid Checking the parking brake
level WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts OCM050015
ODMNMC2019 of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum- Check whether the stroke is within
The reservoir is translucent so that stances. Do not allow sparks the recommended specification
you can check the level with a quick or flame to contact the washer when the parking brake pedal is fully
visual inspection. fluid or the washer fluid reser- engaged. When engaged, the park-
Check the fluid level in the washer voir. Damage to the vehicle or ing brake alone should hold the vehi-
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- occupants could occur. cle securely. If the stroke is more or
sary. Plain water may be used if less than specified, have the parking
• Windshield washer fluid is brake adjusted by an authorized
washer fluid is not available. poisonous to humans and
However, use washer solvent with HYUNDAI dealer.
animals. Do not drink and
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- avoid contacting windshield
mates to prevent freezing. Stroke : 8~9 notches
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
7 37
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
ONCNMC2013 ONCNMC2014
ONCNMC2012 1. Loosen the air cleaner cover 2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
attaching clips and open the cover. 3. Lift the air cleaner cover and pull
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed. the air cleaner filter cover.
You can clean the filter when inspect- 4. Pull the air cleaner to replace.
ing the air cleaner element. 5. Lock the cover (1) with the cover
Clean the filter by using compressed attaching clips.
air. 6. Verify that the air cleaner cover is
properly attached at all four corners
and sealing against air cleaner.
7 38
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part.
Use of nongenuine part could
damage the air flow sensor.
7 39
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection Filter replacement
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you, the owner, replace the climate
control air filter, replace it performing
the following procedure, and be care-
ful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
ODM072014
Replace the filter according to the
maintenance Schedule. ODM072015 2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1).
7 40
Maintenance
ODM072016 OANNMC2038
3. Remove the climate control air fil- 4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out both sides ter.
of the cover. 5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter, install it properly.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the fil-
ter may be reduced.
7 41
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection Contamination of either the wind- Blade replacement
shield or the wiper blades with for- When the wipers no longer clean
eign matter can reduce the effective- adequately, the blades may be worn
ness of the windshield wipers. or cracked, and require replacement.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer- CAUTION
cial car washes. If the blades are not To prevent damage to the wiper
wiping properly, clean both the win- arms or other components, do
dow and the blades with a good not attempt to move the wipers
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse manually.
thoroughly with clean water.
1JBA5122
CAUTION CAUTION
✽ NOTICE To prevent damage to the wiper The use of a non-specified
Commercial hot waxes applied by blades, do not use gasoline, wiper blade could result in
automatic car washes have been kerosene, paint thinner, or other wiper malfunction and failure.
known to make the windshield diffi- solvents on or near them.
cult to clean.
7 42
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
1JBA7037 1JBA7038
1LDA5023
2. Compress the clip and slide the 3. Lift it off the arm.
blade assembly downward. 4. Install the blade assembly in the
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose reverse order of removal.
the plastic locking clip.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
7 43
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
OHM078063
OHM078062 2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the center part into the
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
the wiper blade assembly. into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the wiper blade.
7 44
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service (Continued)
WARNING - Battery
dangers If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
Always read the follow-
your eyes with clean
ing instructions carefully
water for at least 15 min-
when handling a battery.
utes and get immediate
Keep lighted cigarettes medical attention.
and all other flames or
If electrolyte gets on
sparks away from the
your skin, thoroughly
battery.
wash the contacted area.
Hydrogen, a highly com- If you feel a pain or a
bustible gas, is always burning sensation, get
ONCNMC2021 present in battery cells medical attention imme-
and may explode if ignit- diately.
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
ed. Wear eye protection
Keep batteries out of the when charging or work-
• Keep the battery top clean and dry. reach of children ing near a battery.
• Keep the terminals and connec- because batteries con- Always provide ventila-
tions clean, tight, and coated with tain highly corrosive tion when working in an
petroleum jelly or terminal grease. SULFURIC ACID. Do not enclosed space.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from allow battery acid to
An inappropriately dis-
the battery immediately with a contact your skin, eyes,
posed battery can be
solution of water and baking soda. clothing or paint finish.
harmful to the environ-
• If the vehicle is not going to be (Continued) ment and human health.
used for an extended time, discon- Dispose the battery
nect the battery cables. according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
7 45
Maintenance
(Continued) Battery recharging

CALIFORNIA PROPO- Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
• When lifting a plastic-cased SITION 65 WARNING
battery, excessive pressure calcium-based battery.
Battery posts, terminals, and • If the battery becomes discharged
on the case may cause battery
related accessories contain in a short time (because, for exam-
acid to leak, resulting in per-
lead and lead compounds, ple, the headlights or interior lights
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
chemicals known to the State of were left on while the vehicle was
carrier or with your hands on
California to cause cancer, birth not in use), recharge it by slow
opposite corners.
defects, and reproductive harm. charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• Never attempt to recharge the Batteries also contain other
battery when the battery chemicals known to the State of • If the battery gradually discharges
cables are connected. California to cause cancer. because of high electric load while
• The electrical ignition system Wash hands after handling. the vehicle is being used, recharge
works with high voltage. it at 20-30A for two hours.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running CAUTION
or the ignition switched on.
• Always charge the battery
Failure to follow the above fully to prevent battery case
warnings can result in serious damage in low temperature
bodily injury or death. area.
• If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the bat-
tery, the battery may dis-
charge. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
7 46
Maintenance
(Continued) Reset items

WARNING - Recharging Items should be reset after the bat-
battery • Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order. tery has been discharged or the bat-
When recharging the battery, tery has been disconnected.
observe the following precau- 1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch. • Auto up/down window
tions: (See section 4)
• The battery must be removed 2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery • Sunroof (See section 4)
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation. terminal. • Trip computer (See section 4)
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, 3. Unhook the positive clamp • Climate control system
or flame near the battery. from the positive battery (See section 4)
terminal. • Clock (See section 4)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce • Before performing mainte- • Audio (See section 4)
the charging rate if the battery nance or recharging the bat-
cells begin gassing (boiling) tery, turn off all accessories
violently or if the temperature and stop the engine.
of the electrolyte of any cell • The negative battery cable
exceeds 120°F (49°C). must be removed first and
• Wear eye protection when installed last when the battery
checking the battery during is disconnected.
charging.
(Continued)
7 47
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care
CAUTION
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must • Underinflation also results in
always maintain recommended tire excessive wear, poor handling
inflation pressures and stay within and reduced fuel economy.
the load limits and weight distribution Wheel deformation also is
recommended for your vehicle. possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
Recommended cold tire infla- have it checked by an author-
tion pressures ized HYUNDAI dealer.
All tire pressures (including the ODMNMC2017 • Overinflation produces a
spare) should be checked when the All specifications (sizes and pres- harsh ride, excessive wear at
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the sures) can be found on a label the center of the tire tread, and
vehicle has not been driven for at attached to the vehicle. a greater possibility of dam-
least three hours or driven less than age from road hazards.
1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire under-
Recommended pressures must be inflation
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear. Severe underinflation (10 psi
(70 kPa) or more) can lead to
For recommended inflation pressure severe heat build-up, causing
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8. blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
7 48
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pres-

CAUTION CAUTION - Tire pressure sure
• Warm tires normally exceed Always observe the following: Check your tires once a month or
recommended cold tire pres- • Check tire pressure when the more.
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 tires are cold. (After vehicle
kPa). Do not release air from Also, check the tire pressure of the
has been parked for at least spare tire.
warm tires to adjust the pres- three hours or hasn't been
sure or the tires will be under- driven more than 1 mile (1.6
inflated. km) since startup.) How to check
• Be sure to reinstall the tire • Check the pressure of your Use a good quality gage to check tire
inflation valve caps. Without spare tire each time you check pressure. You can not tell if your tires
the valve cap, dirt or moisture the pressure of other tires. are properly inflated simply by look-
could get into the valve core ing at them. Radial tires may look
and cause air leakage. If a • Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a properly inflated even when they're
valve cap is missing, install a underinflated.
new one as soon as possible. vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one. Check the tire's inflation pressure
• Worn, old tires can cause acci- when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
dents. If your tread is badly means your vehicle has been sitting
WARNING - Tire worn, or if your tires have for at least three hours or driven no
inflation been damaged, replace them. more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
7 49
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire Tire rotation

valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- WARNING To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure • Inspect your tires frequently mended that the tires be rotated
measurement. If the cold tire inflation for proper inflation as well as every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
pressure matches the recommended wear and damage. Always use sooner if irregular wear develops.
pressure on the tire and loading a tire pressure gauge.
information label, no further adjust- During rotation, check the tires for
• Tires with too much or too little correct balance.
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
pressure wear unevenly caus-
low, add air until you reach the rec- When rotating tires, check for uneven
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
ommended amount. wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
cle control, and sudden tire
If you overfill the tire, release air by usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
failure leading to accidents,
pushing on the metal stem in the cen- sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
injuries, and even death. The
ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire of-balance wheels, severe braking or
recommended cold tire pres-
pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure severe cornering. Look for bumps or
sure for your vehicle can be
to put the valve caps back on the bulges in the tread or side of tire.
found in this manual and on
valve stems. They help prevent leaks Replace the tire if you find either of
the tire label located on the dri-
by keeping out dirt and moisture. these conditions. Replace the tire if
ver's side center pillar.
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
• Worn tires can cause acci- be sure to bring the front and rear tire
dents. Replace tires that are pressures to specification and check
worn, show uneven wear, or lug nut tightness.
are damaged.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every time
you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
7 50
Maintenance
Without a spare tire ✽ NOTICE Wheel alignment and tire bal-

Rotate radial tires that have an ance
asymmetric tread pattern only from The wheels on your vehicle were
front to rear and not from right to aligned and balanced carefully at the
left. factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
WARNING In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
• Do not use the compact spare However, if you notice unusual tire
tire for tire rotation. wear or your vehicle pulling one way
• Do not mix bias ply and radial or the other, the alignment may need
S2BLA790A
ply tires under any circum- to be reset.
Disc brake pads should be inspected stances. This may cause If you notice your vehicle vibrating
for wear whenever tires are rotated. unusual handling characteris- when driving on a smooth road, your
tics that could result in death, wheels may need to be rebalanced.
severe injury, or property
damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
7 51
Maintenance
Tire replacement (Continued)

WARNING - Replacing
tires • The use of any other tire size
Tread wear indicator
or type may seriously affect
• Driving on worn-out tires is
ride, handling, ground clear-
very hazardous and will
ance, stopping distance, body
reduce braking effectiveness,
to tire clearance, snow tire
steering accuracy, and trac-
clearance, and speedometer
tion.
reliability.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
• It is best to replace all four
tires designed to provide for
tires at the same time. If that
safe ride and handling capa-
is not possible, or necessary,
bility. Do not use a size and
then replace the two front or
type of tire and wheel that is
OEN076053 two rear tires as a pair.
different from the one that is
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear Replacing just one tire can
originally installed on your
indicator will appear as a solid band seriously affect your vehicle’s
vehicle. It can affect the safety
across the tread. This shows there is handling.
and performance of your vehi-
less than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) of tread cle, which could lead to han- • The ABS works by comparing
left on the tire. Replace the tire when dling failure or rollover and the speed of the wheels. Tire
this happens. serious injury. When replacing size can affect wheel speed.
Do not wait for the band to appear the tires, be sure to equip all When replacing tires, all 4
across the entire tread before replac- four tires with the tire and tires must use the same size
ing the tire. wheel of the same size, type, originally supplied with the
tread, brand and load-carrying vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
capacity. ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
(Continued)
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), to work irregularly.
7 52
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement Wheel replacement Tire traction

(if equipped) When replacing the metal wheels for Tire traction can be reduced if you
A compact spare tire has a shorter any reason, make sure the new drive on worn tires, tires that are
tread life than a regular size tire. wheels are equivalent to the original improperly inflated or on slippery
Replace it when you can see the factory units in diameter, rim width road surfaces. Tires should be
tread wear indicator bars on the tire. and offset. replaced when tread wear indicators
The replacement compact spare tire appear. To reduce the possibility of
should be the same size and design losing control, slow down whenever
tire as the one provided with your WARNING there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
new vehicle and should be mounted A wheel that is not the correct
on the same compact spare tire size may adversely affect wheel
wheel. The compact spare tire is not and bearing life, braking and
designed to be mounted on a regular stopping abilities, handling
size wheel, and the compact spare characteristics, ground clear-
tire wheel is not designed for mount- ance, body-to-tire clearance,
ing a regular size tire. snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
7 53
Maintenance
Tire maintenance Tire sidewall labeling 2. Tire size designation

In addition to proper inflation, correct A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
1
wheel alignment helps to decrease size designation. You will need this
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn 5,6 information when selecting replace-
unevenly, have your dealer check the ment tires for your car. The following
7
wheel alignment. explains what the letters and numbers
When you have new tires installed, in the tire size designation mean.
4
make sure they are balanced. This Example tire size designation:
will increase vehicle ride comfort and (These numbers are provided as an
tire life. Additionally, a tire should 2 example only; your tire size designa-
3
always be rebalanced if it is removed tor could vary depending on your
from the wheel. vehicle.)
1 I030B04JM (P)235/65R17 102H
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac- (P) - Applicable vehicle type (tires
teristics of the tire and also provides marked with the prefix “P’’ are
the tire identification number (TIN) intended for use on passenger
for safety standard certification. The vehicles or light trucks; howev-
TIN can be used to identify the tire in er, not all tires have this mark-
case of a recall. ing).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
1. Manufacturer or brand name 65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
Manufacturer or Brand name is height as a percentage of its
shown. width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 54
Maintenance
102 - Load Index, a numerical code Tire speed ratings 3. Checking tire life
associated with the maximum The chart below lists many of the dif- (TIN : Tire Identification
load the tire can carry. ferent speed ratings currently being Number)
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the used for passenger car tires. The Any tires that are over 6 years old,
speed rating chart in this section speed rating is part of the tire size based on the manufacturing date
for additional information. designation on the sidewall of the (including the spare tire) should be
tire. This symbol corresponds to that replaced by new ones. You can find
tire's designed maximum safe oper- the manufacturing date on the tire
Wheel size designation ating speed. sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
Wheels are also marked with impor- wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
tant information that you need if you Speed The DOT Code is a series of num-
ever have to replace one. The follow- Rating Maximum Speed bers on a tire consisting of numbers
ing explains what the letters and Symbol and English letters. The manufactur-
numbers in the wheel size designa- ing date is designated by the last four
tion mean. S 112 mph (180 km/h)
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
Example wheel size designation: DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
7.0JX17 The front part of the DOT means a
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
plant code number, tire size and
7.0 - Rim width in inches. tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
J - Rim contour designation.
factured.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
7 55
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and mate- 6. Maximum load rating

WARNING - Tire age rial This number indicates the maximum
Tires degrade over time, even The number of layers or plies of rub- load in kilograms and pounds that can
when they are not being used. ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire be carried by the tire. When replacing
Regardless of the remaining manufacturers also must indicate the the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tread, it is recommended that materials in the tire, which include tire that has the same load rating as
tires generally be replaced after steel, nylon, polyester, and others. the factory installed tire.
six (6) years of normal service. The letter "R" means radial ply con-
Heat caused by not climates or struction; the letter "D" means diago-
frequent high loading conditions 7. Uniform tire quality grading
nal or bias ply construction; and the
can accelerate the aging letter "B" means belted-bias ply con- Quality grades can be found where
process. Failure to follow this struction. applicable on the tire sidewall
Warning can result in sudden between tread shoulder and maxi-
tire failure, which could lead to a mum section width.
loss of control and an accident 5. Maximum permissible inflation For example:
involving serious injury or death. pressure
TREADWEAR 200
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in TRACTION AA
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum TEMPERATURE A
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
7 56
Maintenance
Tread wear Traction - AA, A, B & C Sustained high temperature can

The tread wear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to cause the material of the tire to
tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those degenerate and reduce tire life, and
the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tires ability to excessive temperature can lead to
conditions on a specified govern- stop on wet pavement as measured sudden tire failure. The Grade C cor-
ment test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on speci- responds to a level of performance
graded 150 would wear one-and-a- fied government test surfaces of which all passenger car tires must
half times (1½) as well on the gov- asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C meet under the Federal Motor
ernment course as a tire graded 100. may have poor traction performance. Vehicle Safety Standard NO. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
The relative performance of tires
levels of performance on the labora-
depends upon the actual conditions WARNING tory test wheel than the minimum
of their use, however, and may
The traction grade assigned to required by the law.
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving this tire is based on straight-
habits, service practices and differ- ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera- WARNING - Tire
ences in road characteristics and cli- temperature
mate. tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics. The temperature grade for this
These grades are molded on the tire is established for a tire that
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. is properly inflated and not
The tires available as standard or Temperature -A, B & C
overloaded. Excessive speed,
optional equipment on your vehicle The temperature grades are A (the underinflation, or excessive
may vary with respect to grade. highest), B and C representing the loading, either separately or in
tire’s resistance to the generation of combination, can cause heat
heat and its ability to dissipate heat build-up and possible sudden
when tested under controlled condi- tire failure. This can cause loss
tions on a specified indoor laboratory of vehicle control and serious
test wheel. injury or death.
7 57
Maintenance
Tire terminology and definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
Air Pressure: The amount of air air pressure in a tire, measured in side of an asymmetrical tire, that
inside the tire pressing outward on pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- must always face outward when
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pascals (kPa) before a tire has built mounted on a vehicle.
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- up heat from driving. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
pascal (kPa). Curb Weight: This means the weight air pressure.
Accessory Weight: This means the of a motor vehicle with standard and Load Index: An assigned number
combined weight of optional acces- optional equipment including the ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sories. Some examples of optional maximum capacity of fuel, oil and sponds to the load carrying capacity
accessories are, automatic transaxle coolant, but without passengers and of a tire.
power seats, and air conditioning. cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a DOT Markings: A code molded into maximum air pressure to which a
tire's height to its width. the sidewall of a tire signifying that cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords the tire is in compliance with the U.S. mum air pressure is molded onto the
that is located between the plies and Department of Transportation motor sidewall.
the tread. Cords may be made from vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification Maximum Load Rating: The load
steel or other reinforcing materials. rating for a tire at the maximum per-
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
Bead: The tire bead contains steel ignator which can also identify the missible inflation pressure for that
wires wrapped by steel cords that tire manufacturer, production plant, tire.
hold the tire onto the rim. brand and date of production. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The sum of curb weight; accessory
which the plies are laid at alternate weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
angles less than 90 degrees to the GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight production options weight.
centerline of the tread. Rating for the Front Axle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight number of occupants a vehicle is
Rating for the Rear axle. designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
7 58
Maintenance
Occupant Distribution: Designated Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
seating positions. code assigned to a tire indicating the Load on an individual tire due to curb
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side maximum speed at which a tire can and accessory weight plus maximum
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- operate. occupant and cargo weight.
ticular side that faces outward when Traction: The friction between the Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
mounted on a vehicle. The outward tire and the road surface. The Load on an individual tire that is
facing sidewall bears white lettering amount of grip provided. determined by distributing to each
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or Tread: The portion of a tire that axle its share of the curb weight,
model name molding that is higher or comes into contact with the road. accessory weight, and normal occu-
deeper than the same moldings on pant weight and dividing by 2.
the inner facing sidewall. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars," Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire that show across the tread of a tire ly attached to a vehicle showing the
used on passenger cars and some when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. original equipment tire size and rec-
light duty trucks and multipurpose ommended inflation pressure.
vehicles. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
Recommended Inflation Pressure: system that provides consumers with
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown ture and treadwear. Ratings are
on the tire placard. determined by tire manufacturers
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in using government testing proce-
which the ply cords that extend to the dures. The ratings are molded into
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the the sidewall of the tire.
centerline of the tread. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
Rim: A metal support for a tire and ber of designated seating positions
upon which the tire beads are seated. multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
Sidewall: The portion of a tire rated cargo and luggage load.
between the tread and the bead.
7 59
Maintenance
All season tires Snow tires Be sure that the chains are installed
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires If you equip your car with snow tires, in accordance with the manufactur-
on some models to provide good they should be the same size and er's instructions.
performance for use all year round, have the same load capacity as the To minimize tire and chain wear, do
including snowy and icy road condi- original tires. Snow tires should be not continue to use tire chains when
tions. All season tires are identified installed on all four wheels; other- they are no longer needed.
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud wise, poor handling may result.
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 WARNING - Snow or ice
tires have better snow traction than kPa) more air pressure than the
all season tires and may be more • When driving on roads covered
pressure recommended for the stan-
appropriate in some areas. with snow or ice, drive at less
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the • Use the SAE “S” class or wire
Summer tires chains.
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on • If you hear noise caused by
some models to provide superior Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with chains contacting the body,
performance on dry roads. Summer retighten the chain to avoid
tire performance is substantially snow tires.
contact with the vehicle body.
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat- • To prevent body damage,
Tire chains retighten the chains after driv-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. if you plan to operate your Tire chains, if necessary, should be ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions. installed on the drive wheels as fol- • Do not use tire chains on vehi-
HYUNDAI recommends the use of lows. cles equipped with aluminum
snow tires or all season tires on all 2WD : Front wheels wheels. In unavoidable circum-
four wheels. AWD : All four wheels stance, use a wire type chain.
If a full set of chains is not • Use wire chains less than 0.59
available for a AWD vehicle, inches (15mm) to prevent dam-
chains may be installed on age to the chain’s connection.
the front wheels only.
7 60
Maintenance
Radial-ply tires Low aspect ratio tire (Continued)

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread (if equipped)
• If the tire is impacted, inspect
life, road hazard resistance and Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect the tire condition or contact an
smoother high speed ride. The radial- ratio is lower than 50, are provided authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ply tires used on this vehicle are of for sporty looks.
belted construction, and are selected • To prevent damage to the tire,
Because the low aspect ratio tires inspect the tire condition and
to complement the ride and handling are optimized for handling and brak-
characteristics of your vehicle. Radial- pressure every 1,800miles
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to (3,000km).
ply tires have the same load carrying ride in and there is more noise com-
capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires pare with normal tires.
of the same size, and use the same
recommended inflation pressure. CAUTION
Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or CAUTION • It is not easy to recognize the
bias belted tires is not recommended. Because the sidewall of the low tire damage with your own
Any combinations of radial-ply and aspect ratio tire is shorter than eyes. But if there is the slight-
bias-ply or bias belted tires when used the normal, the wheel and tire of est hint of tire damage, even
on the same vehicle will seriously dete- the low aspect ratio tire is easi- though you cannot see the tire
riorate vehicle handling. The best rule er to be damaged. So, follow the damage with your own eyes,
to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires instructions below. have the tire checked or
should always be used as a set of four. • When driving on a rough road replaced because the tire
Longer wearing tires can be more sus- or off road, drive cautiously damage may cause air leak-
ceptible to irregular tread wear. It is because tires and wheels may age from the tire.
very important to follow the tire rotation be damaged. And after driving, • If the tire is damaged by driv-
interval shown in this section to inspect tires and wheels. ing on a rough road, off road,
achieve the tread life potential of these • When passing over a pothole, pothole, manhole, or curb
tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by
tires are repairable only in the tread stone, drive slowly so that the the warranty.
area, because of sidewall flexing. tires and wheels are not dam- • You can find out the tire infor-
Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply aged. mation on the tire sidewall.
tire repairs. (Continued)
7 61
Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam- WARNING - Fuse
age by fuses. replacement
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one • Never replace a fuse with any-
Normal Blown located in the driver’s side panel bol- thing but another fuse of the
ster, the other in the engine compart- same rating.
■ Cartridge type
ment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces- • A higher capacity fuse could
sories, or controls do not work, check cause damage and possibly a
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse fire.
has blown, the element inside the • Never install a wire or alu-
fuse will be melted. minum foil instead of the
If the electrical system does not proper fuse - even as a tem-
Normal Blown
work, first check the driver’s side porary repair. It may cause
■ Multi fuse fuse panel. extensive wiring damage and
Always replace a blown fuse with a possible fire.
one of the same rating.
Before replacing an open fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable. CAUTION
Normal Blown If the replacement fuse blows, this
Do not use a screwdriver or any
■ BFT indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
other metal object to remove
using the system involved and imme-
fuses because it may cause a
diately consult an authorized
short circuit and damage the
HYUNDAI dealer.
system.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher ✽ NOTICE
Normal Blown amperage ratings.
The actual fuse/relay panel label
OLM079051N
may differ from equipped items.
7 62
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement

CAUTION
• When replacing an open fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips. The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with ONCNMC2030
bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays 3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
ODM072017
and terminals may be fas- out. Use the removal tool provided
tened incompletely, and it may 1. Turn the ignition switch and all in the engine compartment fuse
cause a possible fire. If fuses, other switches off. panel.
relays and terminals fastened 2. Open the fuse panel cover.
with bolts or nuts are open, 4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
consult with an authorized if it is blown.
HYUNDAI dealer. 5. Push in a new fuse of the same
• Do not input any other objects rating, and make sure it fits tightly
except fuses or relays into in the clips.
fuse/relay terminals such as a If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
driver or wiring. It may cause HYUNDAI dealer.
contact failure and system If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
malfunction. of the same rating from a circuit you
may not need for operating the vehi-
cle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.
7 63
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical Fuse switch Engine compartment panel fuse
components do not work and the replacement
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
ODM072019
Always, put the mode switch at the ONCNMC2032
ON position. 1. Turn the ignition switch and all
If you move the switch to the OFF other switches off.
position, some items such as audio 2. Remove the fuse box cover by
and digital clock must be reset and pressing the tab and pulling up.
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving
the vehicle.
7 64
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it Multi fuse Main fuse

if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse box ONCNMC2033 ONCDMC2037
cover. If not, electrical failures If the multi fuse is blown, it must be If the main fuse is blown, it must be
may occur from water leaking in. removed as follows: removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery 1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. cable.
2. Remove the bolts shown in the 2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
picture above. ture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one 3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating. of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of 4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal. removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
Authorized HYUNDAI Dealer.
7 65
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
ODM072017
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in ODMNMC2014
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
7 66
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected Component

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster
A/BAG 15A ACU, A/C Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
Sunroof_MTR, RAIN_SNSR,RR_BLOWER,PGS, AC_INVERTER_UNIT,Smart Key Control Module,
MODULE 5 7.5A
BCM, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH,Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
MODULE 1 7.5A Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid, Console Switch LH/RH,Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH
FOG LAMP RR 10A RR_FOG_LH/RH

BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Auto
MEMORY 2 10A
Light & Photo Sensor, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, FRT_DRV_SEAT
SMART KEY 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
BCM, Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger
Door Module, ATM Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, 4WD ECU, Driver/Passenger Seat
MODULE 3 10A Warmer Module, MTS Module, Rear(SMART) Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, A/V & Navigation Head
Unit, Rear Parking Assist Sensor (Center)LH/RH, AMP, SAS_ESP,EPB_EXT, Electro Chromic Mirror,
BSD
SMART KEY 4 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module

Cargo Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Personal Lamp
INTERIOR LAMP 15A
LH/RH
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module,D_CLOCK
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Switch
MEMORY 1 10A RF Receiver, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch
7 67
Maintenance

W/O IMMO. & Smart Key : ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
START 7.5A
With IMMO. or Smart Key : INHIBIT_SW(POSITION_SW)
Crash Pad Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Auto
MODULE 2 10A Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Stop Lamp Switch,AFLS_UNIT, F_WATER_SNSR,
GLOW_RLY_UNIT_METAL, FPAS_SNSR, DSL_BOX
SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof_MTR
S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
IGN 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 5, TCU)
A/CON 1 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay), A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, DSL_BOX(PTC_RLY)
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch,BCM
SMART KEY 1 25A Smart Key Control Module
S/HEATER FRT 20A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module
C/LIGHTER 20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter, Luggage Power Outlet
WIPER FRT 15A Multifunction Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper HI Relay, IG2 Relay)
BLOWER RR 20A ICM Relay Box (RR BLOWER Relay)
P/WDW RH 25A Passenger Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch RH
RR HTD 10A A/C Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
7 68
Maintenance

SUNROOF 1 20A SUNROOF_MTR
P/WDW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module, Driver Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH
FUEL LID 15A Fuel Fillar Door Switch (DOOR_EXT)
SMART KEY 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
P/SEAT PASS 20A Passenger Seat Manual Switch, Passenger Lumbar Support Switch
AMP 30A AMP
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, BCM, Overhead Console Lamp, AMP, MTS Module, Power Outside
MODULE 4 10A
Mirror Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Power Outlet Relay),PGS,D_CLOCK
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch
7 69
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
ONCNMC2036
ONCNMC2015
7 70
Maintenance
Relay NO. Relay Name Relay Type

E30 POWER OUTLET RELAY ISO MICRO
E31 START RELAY ISO MICRO
E32 FRONT DEICER RELAY ISO MICRO
E33 BLOWER RELAY ISO MICRO
E34 WIPER LO RELAY ISO MICRO
E36 ACC RELAY ISO MICRO
E37 IG1 RELAY ISO MICRO
E38 IG2 RELAY ISO MICRO
E39 COOLING FAN RELAY ISO MINI
E40 WIPER HI RELAY ISO MICRO
E41 REAR DEFOGGER RELAY ISO MICRO
E42 HORN RELAY ISO MICRO
7 71
Maintenance

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
Smart Junction Box (IPS 1 (4CH), IPS 2 (1CH), IPS 5 (1CH), Fuse - SUNROOF 1, P/SEAT
B+2 60A
PASS, P/SEAT DRV), RR A/CON
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
MULTI RR HTD 40A Rear Defogger Relay

FUSE ABS1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 40A ESC Module
C/FAN 60A Cooling Fan Relay
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - MODULE 1, SMART KEY 4, SUNROOF 2, SMART KEY 1, Leak
B+3 60A
Current Autocut Device)
Smart Junction Box (IPS 3 (4CH), IPS 6 (2CH), Fuse - F/LID, STOP LAMP, DR LOCK, BRAKE
B+4 50A
SWITCH), FUEL LID
EMS 40A EMS Box
IG1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - ACC Relay, IG1 Relay
IG2 40A Start Relay, IG2 Relay, W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet
FUSE
B+1 50A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - S/HEATER RR, S/HEATER FRT, P/WDW RH, P/WDW LH)
HORN 15A Horn Relay
DEICER 15A Front Deicer Relay
POWER OUTLET 25A Power Outlet Relay
AC INVERTER 30A AC Inverter Module
7 72
Maintenance

P/TAIL GATE 30A Power Tail Gate Module
IDB 15A IDB Module
4WD 20A 4WD ECM
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
AMS (WIPER) 10A BCM, PCM
WIPER FRT 25A Wiper LO Relay, Front Wiper Motor
A/T - Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/V & Navigation
B/UP LAMP 10A
Head Unit
ABS3 7.5A ESC Module
SENSOR5 7.5A PCM
FUSE TCU 15A A/T : Transaxle Range Switch
F/PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay
ECU 1 15A PCM
ECU 2 10A IDB Module
SENSOR 3 10A Fuel Pump Relay
IGN COIL 20A Condenser, Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
SENSOR 2 10A Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve(G4KJ), Oil Control Valve #1/#2
Oxygen sensor(#1/#2/#3/#4), PCM, Oxygen Sensor(Down), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling
SENSOR 1 15A
Fan Relay)
B/A HORN 10A Burgl Aralarm Horn Relay
7 73
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
✽ NOTICE
WARNING - Working on CAUTION
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
the lights If you don’t have necessary ing, headlamp and taillamp lenses
Prior to working on the light, tools, the correct bulbs and the could appear frosty. This condition
firmly apply the parking brake, expertise, consult an authorized is caused by the temperature differ-
ensure that the ignition switch HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, ence between the lamp inside and
is turned to the “LOCK” position it is difficult to replace vehicle outside. This is similar to the con-
and turn off the lights to avoid light bulbs because other parts densation on your windows inside
sudden movement of the vehi- of the vehicle must be removed your vehicle during the rain and
cle and burning your fingers or before you can get to the bulb. doesn’t indicate a problem with
receiving an electric shock. This is especially true if you your vehicle. If the water leaks into
have to remove the headlight the lamp bulb circuitry, have the
assembly to get to the bulb(s). vehicle checked by an authorized
Use only the bulbs of the specified Removing/installing the head- HYUNDAI dealer.
wattage. light assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
7 74
Maintenance
Headlamp, Front position Headlamp bulb

(Continued)
lamp, Front turn signal lamp,
Front fog lamp bulb replace- • Always handle them carefully,
ment and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never
touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed
in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
OHD076046 cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
WARNING - Halogen • Wear eye protection when
ONCNMC2017
bulbs changing a bulb. Allow the
(1) Headlamp (High) bulb to cool down before han-
• Halogen bulbs contain pres- dling it.
(2) Headlamp (Low) surized gas that will produce
(3) Front position lamp flying pieces of glass if bro-
(4) Front turn signal lamp/ ken.
Front side marker (Continued)
(5) Front fog lamp (if equipped)
7 75
Maintenance
7. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Tu r n s i g n a l
Low ✽ NOTICE Position
High
Always have the headlight aiming lamp
ODMEMC2006 adjusted after an accident or the ODMEMC2006

1. Open the hood.
headlight assembly is reinstalled at Turn signal lamp/Position lamp
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover 1. Remove the socket from the
by turning it counterclockwise. assembly by turning the socket
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb counterclockwise until the tabs on
socket-connector. the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket 2. Remove the bulb from the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on by pressing it in and rotating it
the socket align with the slots on counterclockwise until the tabs on
the assembly. the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out. socket
6. Inset a new bulb by inserting it into 3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
the socket. into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7 76
Maintenance
4. Install the socket in the assembly Front fog lamp bulbs 5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
by aligning the tabs on the socket (if equipped) housing by aligning the tabs on
with the slots in the assembly. the socket with the slots in the
Push the socket into the assembly housing. Push the socket into the
and turn the socket clockwise. housing and turn the socket clock-
wise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
ONCEMC3211
1. Remove the front bumper under

cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
7 77
Maintenance
Headlamp (HID type), position ✽ NOTICE Side repeater lamp replacement

(LED), turn signal, and front fog HID lamps have superior perform-
lamp bulb replacement ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
If the lamp bulb does not operate, are estimated by the manufacturer to
have the vehicle checked by an last twice as long or longer than halo-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. gen bulbs depending on their fre-
quency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point in
WARNING - HID the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
Headlamp low beam headlamps on and off more than typ-
(if equipped) ical use will shorten HID lamps life.
Do not attempt to replace or HID lamps do not fail in the same
inspect the low beam (XENON manner as halogen incandescent ODM072031
bulb) due to electric shock dan- lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
ger. If the low beam (XENON period of operation but will immedi- If the lamp bulb does not operate,
bulb) is not working, have your ately relight when the headlamp have the vehicle checked by an
vehicle checked by an author- switch is cycled it is likely the HID authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ized HYUNDAI Dealer. lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.
7 78
Maintenance
Rear combination lamp bulb Outside lamp

replacement 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing please verify.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
ONCNMC2038
5. Remove the socket from the
ONCNMC2037
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
(1) Rear turn signal lamp the socket align with the slots on
(2) Back-up lamp the assembly.
(3) Rear stop and tail lamp 6. Remove the bulb from the socket by
(4) Rear tail lamp/Rear stop and tail pressing it in and rotating it counter-
lamp* clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
(5) Rear side marker Pull the bulb out of the socket. (Side
* : if equipped marker : Remove the bulb from the
socket by pulling it out)
7 79
Maintenance
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it Inside lamp

into the socket and rotating it until
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
ONCNMC2039
OANNMC2036 3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket
1. Open the tailgate. counterclockwise until the tabs on
2. Remove the service cover using a the socket align with the slots on
flat-blade screwdriver. the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket. (Back-up lamp : Remove
the bulb from the socket by pulling
it out)
7 80
Maintenance
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it High mounted stop lamp

into the socket and rotating it until replacement
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
ODMEMC2022
4.Loosen the retaining nuts and
ONCNMC3204
remove the spoiler.
1.Open the tailgate.
2.Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3.Disconnect the electrical connector.
7 81
Maintenance
License plate lamp bulb Door courtesy lamp bulb

replacement replacement
B
ODMEMC2021
5.Remove the high mounted stop
lamp assembly (A) after loosening ODM072039 ODM042261
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6.Reinstall a new lamp assembly in 1. Loosen the lens retaining screws If the lamp does not operate, have
the reverse order of removal. with a screwdriver. the vehicle checked by an authorized
2. Remove the lens. HYUNDAI dealer.
3. Remove the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
7 82
Maintenance
■ Map lamp ■ Luggage room lamp (if equipped) Interior lamp bulb replacement
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
■ Room lamp ■ Sunvisor lamp

■ Type A 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
lamp housing notches and snap
■ Type B
the lens into place.
■ Glove box lamp (if equipped)
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
ODM072040/ODM072042/ODM072052 OXM079044/ODM072041/ODM072043
7 83
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care Finish maintenance
Washing CAUTION
Exterior general caution
To help protect your vehicle’s finish • Do not use strong soap, chem-
It is very important to follow the label ical detergents or hot water,
directions when using any chemical from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least and do not wash the vehicle in
cleaner or polish. Read all warning direct sunlight or when the
and caution statements that appear once a month with lukewarm or cold
water. body of the vehicle is warm.
on the label.
If you use your vehicle for off-road • Be careful when washing the
driving, you should wash it after each side windows of your vehicle.
off-road trip. Pay special attention to Especially, with high-pressure
the removal of any accumulation of water, water may leak through
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate- the windows and wet the inte-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the rior.
lower edges of the doors and rocker • To prevent damage to the
panels are kept clear and clean. plastic parts and lamps, do
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, not clean with chemical sol-
industrial pollution and similar vents or strong detergents.
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain WARNING - Wet brakes
water may not completely remove all After washing the vehicle, test
these deposits. the brakes while driving slowly
A mild soap, safe for use on painted to see if they have been affected
surfaces, may be used. by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
applying them lightly while main-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
taining a slow forward speed.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
7 84
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no CAUTION
longer bead on the paint. • Wiping dust or dirt off the
Always wash and dry the vehicle body with a dry cloth will
before waxing. Use a good quality scratch the finish.
liquid or paste wax, and follow the • Do not use steel wool, abra-
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all sive cleaners, or strong deter-
metal trim to protect it and to main- gents containing highly alka-
tain its luster. line or caustic agents on
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- chrome-plated or anodized
als with a spot remover will usually aluminum parts. This may
OJB037800
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure result in damage to the pro-
to re-wax these areas even if the rest tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
CAUTION of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
tion.
• Water washing in the engine ing.
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
7 85
Maintenance
Finish damage repair Bright-metal maintenance Underbody maintenance

Deep scratches or stone chips in the • To remove road tar and insects, Corrosive materials used for ice and
painted surface must be repaired use a tar remover, not a scraper or snow removal and dust control may
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly other sharp object. collect on the underbody. If these
rust and may develop into a major • To protect the surfaces of bright- materials are not removed, acceler-
repair expense. metal parts from corrosion, apply a ated rusting can occur on underbody
coating of wax or chrome preser- parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
✽ NOTICE vative and rub to a high luster.
though they have been treated with
If your vehicle is damaged and • During winter weather or in coastal rust protection.
requires any metal repair or areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
replacement, be sure the body shop body and wheel openings with luke-
applies anti-corrosion materials to preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum warm or cold water once a month,
the parts repaired or replaced. after off-road driving and at the end
jelly or other protective compound.
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
7 86
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance Corrosion protection

WARNING The aluminum wheels are coated Protecting your vehicle from corro-
After washing the vehicle, test with a clear protective finish. sion
the brakes while driving slowly • Do not use any abrasive cleaner, By using the most advanced design
to see if they have been affected polishing compound, solvent, or and construction practices to combat
by water. If braking performance wire brushes on aluminum wheels. corrosion, we produces cars of the
is impaired, dry the brakes by They may scratch or damage the highest quality. However, this is only
applying them lightly while main- finish. part of the job. To achieve the long-
taining a slow forward speed. term corrosion resistance your vehi-
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
• Use only a mild soap or neutral tion and assistance is also required.
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted Common causes of corrosion
roads. This helps prevent corrosion. The most common causes of corro-
• Avoid washing the wheels with sion on your vehicle are:
high-speed car wash brushes. • Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
• Do not use any alkaline or acid allowed to accumulate underneath
detergent. It may damage and cor- the car.
rode the aluminum wheels coated • Removal of paint or protective
with a clear protective finish. coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
7 87
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas Moisture breeds corrosion Keep your car clean

If you live in an area where your car Moisture creates an atmosphere that The best way to prevent corrosion is
is regularly exposed to corrosive both promotes and facilitates corro- to keep your car clean and free of
materials, corrosion protection is sion. For example, corrosion is accel- corrosive materials. Attention to the
particularly important. Some of the erated by high humidity, particularly underside of the car is particularly
common causes of accelerated cor- when temperatures are just above important.
rosion are road salts, dust control freezing. In such conditions, the cor-
chemicals, ocean air and industrial rosive material is kept in contact with
pollution. the car surfaces by moisture that is • If you live in a high-corrosion area
slow to evaporate. where road salts are used, near the
Mud is particularly corrosive ocean, areas with industrial pollu-
because it is slow to dry and holds tion, or acid rain, etc., you should
moisture in contact with the vehicle. take extra care to prevent corrosion.
Although the mud appears to be dry, In winter, spray or rinse the under-
it can still retain the moisture and side of your car at least once a
promote corrosion. month and be sure to clean the
High temperatures can also acceler- underside thoroughly when winter
ate corrosion of parts that are poorly is over.
ventilated against moisture disperal. • When cleaning underneath the car,
It is particularly important to keep give particular attention to the
your car clean and free of mud or components under the fenders and
accumulations of other materials. other areas that are hidden from
This applies not only to the visible view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
surfaces but particularly to the ening the accumulated mud rather
underside of the car. than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent
To help prevent corrosion it. Water under high pressure and
You can help prevent corrosion or steam are particularly effective in
drastically limit by observing the fol- removing accumulated mud and
lowing: corrosive materials.
7 88
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels, Keep paint and trim in good con- Interior care
rocker panels and frame mem- dition
bers, be sure that drain holes are
Interior general precautions
Scratches or chips in the finish
kept open so that moisture can Prevent caustic solutions such as
should be covered with "touch-up"
escape. If these areas are not kept perfume and cosmetic oil from con-
paint as soon as possible to reduce
clear, moisture could become tacting the dashboard because they
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
trapped and accelerate corrosion. may cause damage or discoloration.
metal is showing, the attention of a
If they do contact the dashboard,
qualified body and paint shop is rec-
clean immediately. See the instruc-
Keep your garage dry ommended.
tions that follow for the proper way to
Don't park your car in a damp or clean vinyl.
poorly ventilated garage. This cre- Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
ates a favorable environment for cor- highly corrosive and may damage CAUTION
rosion. This is particularly true if you painted surfaces in just a few hours.
wash your car in the garage or drive Always remove bird droppings as Never allow water or other liq-
it into the garage when it is still wet or soon as possible. uids to come in contact with
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even electrical/electronic components
a heated garage can contribute to inside the vehicle as this may
corrosion unless it is well ventilated Don't neglect the interior damage them.
so moisture can dispersed. Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi- CAUTION
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry. When cleaning leather products
Use particular care if you carry fertil- (steering wheel, seats etc.), use
izers, cleaning materials or chemi- neutral detergents or low alco-
cals in the car. hol content solutions. If you use
These should be carried only in prop- high alcohol content solutions
er containers and any spills or leaks or acid/alkaline detergents, the
should be cleaned up, flushed with color of the leather may fade or
clean water and thoroughly dried. the surface may get stripped off.
7 89
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte- Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt

rior trim webbing
Vinyl Clean the belt webbing with any mild
Remove dust and loose dirt from soap solution recommended for
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a the instructions provided with the
vinyl cleaner. soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Fabric
Cleaning the interior window
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum glass
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- If the interior glass surfaces of the
tion recommended for upholstery or vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If film), they should be cleaned with
fresh spots do not receive immediate glass cleaner. Follow the directions
attention, the fabric can be stained on the glass cleaner container.
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be CAUTION
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained. Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
CAUTION window defroster grid.
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
7 90
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your Caution for the Inspection and 2. Evaporative emission con-
vehicle is covered by a written limited Maintenance Test (With Electronic trol (including ORVR:
warranty. Please see the warranty Stability Control (ESC) system) Onboard Refueling Vapor
information contained in the Owner’s • To prevent the vehicle from mis- Recovery) system
Handbook & Warranty Information firing during dynamometer test- The Evaporative Emission Control
booklet in your vehicle. ing, turn the Electronic Stability System is designed to prevent fuel
Your vehicle is equipped with an Control (ESC) system off by vapors from escaping into the atmos-
emission control system to meet all pressing the ESC switch. phere.
emission regulations. • After dynamometer testing is (The ORVR system is designed to
There are three emission control completed, turn the ESC system allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
systems which are as follows. back on by pressing the ESC be loaded into a canister while refu-
switch again. eling at the gas station, preventing
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- the escape of fuel vapors into the
tem 1. Crankcase emission control atmosphere.)
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- system
Canister
tem The positive crankcase ventilation Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
(3) Exhaust emission control system system is employed to prevent air tank are absorbed and stored in the
pollution caused by blow-by gases onboard canister. When the engine is
being emitted from the crankcase. running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
In order to assure the proper function This system supplies fresh filtered air
of the emission control systems, it is the canister are drawn into the surge
to the crankcase through the air tank through the purge control sole-
recommended that you have your intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
car inspected and maintained by an noid valve.
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in gases, which then pass through the
accordance with the maintenance PCV valve into the induction system.
schedule in this manual.
7 91
Maintenance
Purge Control Solenoid Valve 3. Exhaust emission control Engine exhaust gas precautions
(PCSV) system (carbon monoxide)
The purge control solenoid valve is The Exhaust Emission Control • Carbon monoxide can be present
controlled by the Engine Control System is a highly effective system with other exhaust fumes. Therefore,
Module (ECM); when the engine which controls exhaust emissions if you smell exhaust fumes of any
coolant temperature is low during while maintaining good vehicle per- kind inside your vehicle, have it
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- formance. inspected and repaired immediately.
orated fuel is not taken into the If you ever suspect exhaust fumes
engine. After the engine warms-up are coming into your vehicle, drive it
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
Vehicle modifications only with all the windows fully open.
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to This vehicle should not be modified. Have your vehicle checked and
the engine. Modification of your vehicle could repaired immediately.
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg- WARNING - Exhaust
ulations. Engine exhaust gases contain
In addition, damage or performance carbon monoxide (CO). Though
problems resulting from any modifi- colorless and odorless, it is
cation may not be covered under dangerous and could be lethal if
warranty. inhaled. Follow the instructions
• If you use unauthorized electronic on this page to avoid CO poi-
devices, it may cause the vehicle to soning.
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
7 92
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con- Operating precautions for catalyt-

CALIFORNIA PROPO- fined or closed areas (such as ic converters (if equipped)
SITION 65 WARNING garages) any more than what is
Engine exhaust and a wide vari- necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area. WARNING - Fire
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo- • When the vehicle is stopped in an • A hot exhaust system can
nents found in the interior fur- open area for more than a short ignite flammable items under
nishings in a vehicle, contain or time with the engine running, adjust your vehicle. Do not park, idle,
emit chemicals known to the the ventilation system (as needed) or drive the vehicle over or
State of California to cause can- to draw outside air into the vehicle. near flammable objects, such
cer and birth defects and repro- as grass, vegetation, paper,
• Never sit in a parked or stopped leaves, etc.
ductive harm. In addition, cer- vehicle for any extended time with
tain fluids contained in vehicles the engine running. • The exhaust system and cat-
and certain products of compo- alytic system are very hot
• When the engine stalls or fails to while the engine is running or
nent wear contain or emit chem-
start, excessive attempts to restart immediately after the engine
icals known to the State of
the engine may cause damage to is turned off. Keep away from
California to cause cancer and
the emission control system. the exhaust system and cat-
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm. alytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
7 93
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- Failure to observe these precautions

alytic converter emission control could result in damage to the catalyt-
device. ic converter and to your vehicle.
Therefore, the following precautions Additionally, such actions could void
must be observed: your warranties.
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
7 94
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle

Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials,
such as air bag inflators, seatbelt
pretensioners and keyless remote
entry batteries, must be disposed of
according to Title 22 California Code
of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
7 95
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Consumer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8
DIMENSIONS ENGINE
Item in (mm) Item Lambda 3.3
Overall length 193.11 (4,905) Displacement
203.9 (3,342)
Overall width 74.21 (1,885) cu. in (cc)
Overall height 66.54 (1,690), 66.93 (1,700) *1 Bore x Stroke
3.6x3.3 (92x83.8)
235/60R18 64.09 (1,628) in. (mm)
Front tread
P235/55R19 64.09 (1,628) Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
235/60R18 64.53 (1,639) No. of cylinders 6
Rear tread
P235/55R19 64.53 (1,639)
Wheelbase 110.24 (2,800)
*1 with roof rack
8 2
BULB WATTAGE
Lamp Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Headlamp (Low) 55 or 35 (HID)* H7L or D3S
Headlamp (High) 55 H7L
Front turn signal lamp 28 PY28W
Front Front position lamp 5 or LED* W5W or LED
Front fog lamp* 35 H8
Front turn signal lamp (Outside mirror)* LED* LED
Front marker lamp 5 W5W
Rear Stop/Tail lamp (Outside) 28 or 8, LED* P28 or W8W, LED
Tail lamp (Inside) 8, LED* W8W, LED
Rear turn signal lamp 27 PY27W
Rear Back-up lamp 16 W16W
Rear marker lamp LED* LED
High mounted stop lamp* LED* LED
License plate lamp 5 W5W
Map lamp 10 FESTOON
Room lamp 8 FESTOON
Interior Vanity mirror lamp 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
* If equipped
* HID : High Intensity Discharge
8 3
TIRES AND WHEELS

Inflation pressure [psi (kPa)]
Normal load Maximum load Wheel lug nut torque
Item Tire size Wheel size
( ) ( ) lb•ft, N•m (kg•m)
Front Rear Front Rear
235/60R18 7.5J×18 33 33 33 33
Full size tire
P235/55R19 7.5J×19 (230) (230) (230) (230)
65~79, 88~107
Compact spare tire 60 60 60 60 (9~11)
T165/90R17 4.0T×17
(if equipped) (420) (420) (420) (420)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
8 4
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

Lambda 3.3
Item
2WD AWD
Automatic transaxle 2500 kg (5510 lbs) 2550 kg (5620 lbs)
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Item 6 Seater 7 Seater
1 Seat 2265 l (79 cu f)
SAE 2 Seat 1159 l (40.9 cu f)
3 Seat 383 l (13.5 cu f)
8 5
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil * *1 2
API Service SM *3,
(drain and refill) Gasoline
Lambda 3.3 6.02 US qt. (5.7 l) ILSAC GF-4 (or above),
Recommends Engine
ACEA A5 (or above)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,

Gasoline NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
Automatic transaxle fluid Lambda 3.3 8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)
Engine or other brands meeting the above specification
approved by HYUNDAI Motor Company
Gasoline Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
Coolant Lambda 3.3 9.6 US qt. (9.1 l)
Engine (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
0.74 ~ 0.85 US qt.
Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
(0.7 ~ 0.8 l)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
Rear differential oil (AWD) 0.56 US qt. (0.53 l)
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
Transfer case oil (AWD) Lambda 3.3 0.72 US qt. (0.68 l)
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Fuel 18.95 US gal. (71 l) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
* Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
1
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econo-
my by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in
everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
* If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
3
8 6
Recommended SAE viscosity Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an When choosing an oil, consider the
number effect on fuel economy and cold range of temperature your vehicle will
weather operating (engine start and be operated in before the next oil
CAUTION engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity change. Proceed to select the recom-
engine oils can provide better fuel mended oil viscosity from the chart.
Always be sure to clean the area economy and cold weather perform-
around any filler plug, drain ance, however, higher viscosity engine
plug, or dipstick before check- oils are required for satisfactory lubri-
ing or draining any lubricant. cation in hot weather. Using oils of any
This is especially important in viscosity other than those recommend-
dusty or sandy areas and when ed could result in engine damage.
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
and grit from entering the °C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature
engine and other mechanisms (°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
that could be damaged. Gasoline 10W-30
Engine Oil *1 5W-30, 5W-40
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of

a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API SM/ILSAC GF-4). However, if the
engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine
oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8 7
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

Frame number VIN label LABEL
ONCEVS2001 OEN086004N
The vehicle identification number The VIN is also on a plate attached OCM056002
(VIN) is the number used in register- to the top of the dashboard. The
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat- number on the plate can easily be The vehicle certification label
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc. seen through the windshield from attached on the driver’s side center
outside. pillar gives the vehicle identification
The number is punched on the number (VIN).
engine compartment bulkhead.
8 8
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL

PRESSURE LABEL ■ Gasoline engine
ONCEVS2002 ONCNMC2016
ONCNMC2001 The engine number is stamped on The refrigerant label is located at the
The tires supplied on your new vehi- the engine block as shown in the front of the engine room.
cle are chosen to provide the best drawing. The label contains the following infor-
performance for normal driving. mation:
The tire label located on the driver's • Type of refrigerant
side center pillar gives the tire pres- • Amount of refrigerant
sures recommended for your vehicle.
8 9
CONSUMER INFORMATION
This consumer information has been Eastern Region: Connecticut, Central Region: Illinois, Indiana,
prepared in accordance with regula- Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
tions issued by the National Highway New Hampshire, New Jersey, New Nebraska, North Dakota, South
Traffic Safety Administration of the York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas,
U.S. Department of Transportation. Vermont. Missouri.
Your Hyundai dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you Eastern Region Central Region
read this information. 1122 Cranbury South River Road 1705 Sequoia Drive
Hyundai motor vehicles are Jamesburg, NJ 08831 Aurora, Illinois 60506
designed and manufactured to meet (800) 633-5151 (800) 633-5151
or exceed all applicable safety stan-
dards. Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,
North Carolina, South Carolina, Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho,
For your safety, however, we strongly Virginia, and West Virginia. Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,
urge you to read and follow all direc- Washington, Wyoming.
tions in this Owner's Manual, particu- Southern Region
larly the information under the head- 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway Western Region
ings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 10550 Talbert Avenue
"WARNING". (800) 633-5151 P.O.Box 20850
If, after reading this manual, you Fountain Valley,
have any questions regarding the South Central Region: Alabama, California 92728-0850
operation of your vehicle, please Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, (800) 633-5151
contact your nearest Hyundai Motor New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,
America Regional Office as listed in Texas.
the following:
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road,
Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
8 10
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building Washington, DC 20590 You
can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
8 11

2015 Hyundai Santa Fe 75344

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Hyundai Santa Fe 75344

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER'S MANUAL

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

This manual applies to all of this vehicle and includes descriptions

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

Your vehicle at a glance 2

Safety features of your vehicle 3

Features of your vehicle

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Safety symbol in illustrations

The symbol means to "Avoid"

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS VEHICLE HANDLING

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1. Panoramic sunroof ..............................4-47

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)

1. Inside door handle...............................4-23

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Lighting control lever .........................4-112

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir .....................7-33

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

2nd row seat

3rd row seat

WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver WARNING - Driver’s seat

WARNING - Rear (Continued) WARNING

Front seat adjustment - Manual Seatback angle Seat cushion height

2-way lumbar support Front seat adjustment - power

Forward and backward Seatback angle

4-way lumbar support Driver position memory system

Storing positions into memory

Recalling positions from memory Easy access function

You can activate or deactivate this

Headrest Forward and backward adjustment

Adjusting the height up and down Removal and installation

To remove the headrest:

Seat warmer (if equipped) With the ignition switch in the ON

The seat warmer is provided to warm

3. Fatigued individuals The air ventilation seat is provided to

Seatback pocket Rear seat adjustment

To move the seat forward or backward:

To recline the seatback:

Headrest (for rear seat) Adjusting the height up and down

Removal and installation Fold the headrest - 3rd row

To reinstall the headrest :

Unfold the headrest - 3rd row Armrest Seat warmer

• Each time you push the button, the

alcohol and gasoline. Doing themselves to be exposed to

Walk-in seat Folding the rear seat

■ 2nd row seat To fold down the rear seatback

■ 3rd row seat

■ 2nd row seat 4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,

WARNING - 2nd row center WARNING - Uprighting CAUTION - Damaging

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

Height adjustment (Front) To raise the height adjuster, pull it up